ME61-012-R07a

GAUGING SYSTEMS OSP-P200M/P200MA/P20M, OSP-P200M-R/P200MA-R/P20M-R

INSTRUCTION MANUAL (7th Edition) Pub No. 5249-E-R6 (ME61-012-R7) Apr. 2011

5249-E P-(i) SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The machine is equipped with safety devices which serve to protect personnel and the machine itself from hazards arising from unforeseen accidents. However, operators must not rely exclusively on these safety devices: they must also become fully familiar with the safety guidelines presented below to ensure accidentfree operation. This instruction manual and the warning signs attached to the machine cover only those hazards which Okuma can predict. Be aware that they do not cover all possible hazards.

1.

Precautions Relating to Installation (1) Please be noted about a primary power supply as follows.

• Do not draw the primary power supply from a distribution panel that also supplies a major noise source (for example, an electric welder or electric discharge machine) since this could cause malfunction of the CNC unit.

• If possible, connect the machine to a ground not used by any other equipment. If there is no choice but to use a common ground, the other equipment must not generate a large amount of noise (such as an electric welder or electric discharge machine). (2) Installation Environment Observe the following points when installing the control enclosure.

• Make sure that the CNC unit will not be subject to direct sunlight. • Make sure that the control enclosure will not be splashed with chips, water, or oil. • Make sure that the control enclosure and operation panel are not subject to excessive vibrations or shock.

• The permissible ambient temperature range for the control enclosure is 5 to 40°C. • The permissible ambient humidity range for the control enclosure is related humidity 50% or less at 40°C (no condensation).

• The maximum altitude at which the control enclosure can be used is 1000 m (3281ft.).

2.

Points to Check before Turning on the Power (1) Close all the doors of the control enclosure and operation panel to prevent the entry of water, chips, and dust. (2) Make absolutely sure that there is nobody near the moving parts of the machine, and that there are no obstacles around the machine, before starting machine operation. (3) When turning on the power, turn on the main power disconnect switch first, then the CONTROL ON switch on the operation panel.

5249-E P-(ii) SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

3.

Precautions Relating to Operation (1) After turning on the power, carry out inspection and adjustment in accordance with the daily inspection procedure described in this instruction manual. (2) Use tools whose dimensions and type are appropriate for the work undertaken and the machine specifications. Do not use badly worn tools since they can cause accidents. (3) Do not, for any reason, touch the spindle or tool while spindle indexing is in progress since the spindle could rotate: this is dangerous. (4) Check that the workpiece and tool are properly secured. (5) Never touch a workpiece or tool while it is rotating: this is extremely dangerous. (6) Do not remove chips by hand while machining is in progress since this is dangerous. Always stop the machine first, then remove the chips with a brush or broom. (7) Do not operate the machine with any of the safety devices removed. Do not operate the machine with any of the covers removed unless it is necessary to do so. (8) Always stop the machine before mounting or removing a tool. (9) Do not approach or touch any moving part of the machine while it is operating. (10) Do not touch any switch or button with wet hands. This is extremely dangerous. (11) Before using any switch or button on the operation panel, check that it is the one intended.

4.

Precautions Relating to the ATC (1) The tool clamps of the magazine, spindle, etc., are designed for reliability, but it is possible that a tool could be released and fall in the event of an unforeseen accident, exposing you to danger: do not touch or approach the ATC mechanism during ATC operation. (2) Always inspect and change tools in the magazine in the manual magazine interrupt mode. (3) Remove chips adhering to the magazine at appropriate intervals since they can cause misoperation. Do not use compressed air to remove these chips since it will only push the chips further in. (4) If the ATC stops during operation for some reason and it has to be inspected without turning the power off, do not touch the ATC since it may start moving suddenly.

5.

On Finishing Work (1) On finishing work, clean the vicinity of the machine. (2) Return the ATC, APC and other equipment to the predetermined retraction position. (3) Always turn off the power to the machine before leaving it. (4) To turn off the power, turn off the CONTROL ON switch on the operation panel first, then the main power disconnect switch.

5249-E P-(iii) SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

6.

Precautions during Maintenance Inspection and When Trouble Occurs In order to prevent unforeseen accidents, damage to the machine, etc., it is essential to observe the following points when performing maintenance inspections or during checking when trouble has occurred. (1) When trouble occurs, press the emergency stop button on the operation panel to stop the machine. (2) Consult the person responsible for maintenance to determine what corrective measures need to be taken. (3) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate to confirm safety before proceeding to each new step. (4) Use only the specified replacement parts and fuses. (5) Always turn the power off before starting inspection or changing parts. (6) When parts are removed during inspection or repair work, always replace them as they were and secure them properly with their screws, etc. (7) When carrying out inspections in which measuring instruments are used - for example voltage checks - make sure the instrument is properly calibrated. (8) Do not keep combustible materials or metals inside the control enclosure or terminal box. (9) Check that cables and wires are free of damage: damaged cables and wires will cause current leakage and electric shocks. (10) Maintenance inside the Control Enclosure a.

Switch the main power disconnect switch OFF before opening the control enclosure door.

b.

Even when the main power disconnect switch is OFF, there may some residual charge in the MCS drive unit (servo/spindle), and for this reason only service personnel are permitted to perform any work on this unit. Even then, they must observe the following precautions.

• MCS drive unit (servo/spindle) The residual voltage discharges two minutes after the main switch is turned OFF.

5249-E P-(iv) SAFETY PRECAUTIONS c.

The control enclosure contains the NC unit, and the NC unit has a printed circuit board whose memory stores the machining programs, parameters, etc. In order to ensure that the contents of this memory will be retained even when the power is switched off, the memory is supplied with power by a battery. Depending on how the printed circuit boards are handled, the contents of the memory may be destroyed and for this reason only service personnel should handle these boards.

(11) Periodic Inspection of the Control Enclosure a.

Cleaning the cooling unit The cooling unit in the door of the control enclosure serves to prevent excessive temperature rise inside the control enclosure and increase the reliability of the NC unit. Inspect the following points every three months.

• Is the fan motor inside the cooling unit working? The motor is normal if there is a strong draft from the unit.

• Is the external air inlet blocked? If it is blocked, clean it with compressed air.

7.

General Precautions (1) Keep the vicinity of the machine clean and tidy. (2) Wear appropriate clothing while working, and follow the instructions of someone with sufficient training. (3) Make sure that your clothes and hair cannot become entangled in the machine. Machine operators must wear safety equipment such as safety shoes and goggles. (4) Machine operators must read the instruction manual carefully and make sure of the correct procedure before operating the machine. (5) Memorize the position of the emergency stop button so that you can press it immediately at any time and from any position. (6) Do not access the inside of the control panel, transformer, motor, etc., since they contain highvoltage terminals and other components which are extremely dangerous. (7) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate to confirm safety before proceeding to each new step.

5249-E P-(v) SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

8.

Symbols Used in This Manual The following warning indications are used in this manual to draw attention to information of particular importance. Read the instructions marked with these symbols carefully and follow them.

DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in damage to your property.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS indicates general instructions for safe operation.

5249-E P-(i) TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION ....................................................1 1. Overview.................................................................................................................................. 1 1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging ..................................................................................... 2 1-2. Function Menu .................................................................................................................. 3 2. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Operation........................ 9 2-1. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point ............................................................................. 10 2-2. Setting the Tool Pot No./Tool No. Table ......................................................................... 16 2-3. Operation Mode Designation .......................................................................................... 17 2-4. Automatic Tool Length Offset Function .......................................................................... 19 2-5. Setting the Tool Change Position (Other Than MC-H) ................................................... 23 2-6. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection ............................................................................... 24 2-7. Cycle Time Reduction for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle ....................................................................................................... 29 2-8. New Cycle Time Reduction Function for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle ............................................................................ 31 3. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function for Special Tools and Attachments ............................................................................................. 35 3-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function for Horizontal Tools of MCM ................................................................................................ 35 3-2. Operation for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection on B/C-axis Attachments, 90° Angular Attachments and Extension Attachments (Option) ................................................................................................................ 42 3-3. Operation of Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection with 30° Angular Attachments (Option).................................................................... 51 3-4. Operation of Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection with 45° Angular Attachments (Option).................................................................... 63 4. Y-axis Escape Position (MCM-B/MCR-B II/MCR-A/VH-40)................................................... 75 4-1. Setting the Y-axis Escape Position................................................................................. 75 4-2. Tool Movements during Automatic Tool Length Offset (Cutter Radius Compensation)/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle ................................................... 76 5. Interference Prevention Measures for MCV-A/MCV-A II During Execution of the Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle............................. 78 5-1. Touch Sensor Operation Interlock .................................................................................. 78 5-2. Measures against Interference during Execution of the Automatic Tool Length Offset/Tool Breakage Detection Cycle ........................................................................... 78 6. Variables Used in Subprograms ............................................................................................ 80 6-1. Table of Subprograms and Variables ............................................................................. 80 6-2. Table of Subprograms and Variables (MCM Horizontal Tools) ...................................... 83 6-3. How to Use Variables ..................................................................................................... 86 7. Cautions on Operation........................................................................................................... 94 8. Program Examples ................................................................................................................ 97 8-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset ......................................................................................... 97

5249-E P-(ii) TABLE OF CONTENTS 8-2. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection ............................................................................... 99 9. Alarm List............................................................................................................................. 102

SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION...................................................109 1. Overview.............................................................................................................................. 109 1-1. Dimension Check Function........................................................................................... 109 1-2. Automatic Zero Offset Function .................................................................................... 109 2. Operation of the Automatic Gauging Function..................................................................... 110 2-1. Setting the Datum Hole Zero Point ............................................................................... 111 2-2. Touch Probe Radius Compensation............................................................................. 113 2-3. Touch Probe Length Offset .......................................................................................... 119 2-4. Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Function ......................................................................... 121 2-5. Outer Diameter (OD) Gauging Function ....................................................................... 123 2-6. End Face Gauging Cycle.............................................................................................. 126 2-7. Saving of Gauging Cycle Results ................................................................................. 132 2-8. Calculating the Center and Distance between Two Points........................................... 133 2-9. Calculating the Center and Distance between Two End Faces ................................... 135 2-10.Automatic Zero Offset Function................................................................................... 138 2-11.Copying the Touch Probe Offset Data......................................................................... 139 3. Automatic Gauging Function for B-/C-axis, 90° Angular and Extension Attachments (Option) ..................................................................................................................... 140 3-1. Automatic Gauging for 90° Angular Attachment and B-/C-axis Attachment (PAB=90°)..................................................................................................................... 142 3-2. Automatic Gauging for Extension Attachment and B-/C-axis Attachment (PAB=0°)....................................................................................................................... 143 3-3. Automatic Gauging for Millac 800 VH and Millac 1000 VH .......................................... 144 4. Power ON/OFF Cycle of the Touch Probe .......................................................................... 147 4-1. Power ON/OFF Cycle Operation .................................................................................. 148 5. Details.................................................................................................................................. 151 5-1. Touch Probe Movements ............................................................................................. 151 5-2. Approach Speed to the Workpiece ............................................................................... 154 5-3. Dwell Time in Work Gauging ........................................................................................ 156 5-4. Reducing Time before Movement of Touch Probe ....................................................... 156 5-5. Variables Used in Subprograms ................................................................................... 157 6. Touch Probe Safety Measures ............................................................................................ 171 6-1. Checking Proximity Switch Operation .......................................................................... 171 6-2. Replacing the Touch Probe Battery.............................................................................. 172 7. Supplementary Information.................................................................................................. 173 8. Program Examples .............................................................................................................. 175 8-1. ID Gauging ................................................................................................................... 175 8-2. OD Gauging.................................................................................................................. 176 8-3. End Face Gauging on Z-axis ........................................................................................ 177 8-4. Distance between End Faces (X-axis direction) ........................................................... 178 8-5. Automatic Zero Offset................................................................................................... 179

5249-E P-(iii) TABLE OF CONTENTS 8-6. Example Program for MCM Horizontal Spindle ............................................................ 180 9. Examples of Gauging Result Display .................................................................................. 183 10.Alarm List............................................................................................................................. 186 10-1.Alarm List..................................................................................................................... 186 10-2.Gauging Impossible Cause Code Chart (Alarm B 2305)............................................. 188

SECTION 3 GAUGING DATA OUTPUT TO FILE....................................................194 1. Outline ................................................................................................................................. 194 2. Parameters .......................................................................................................................... 194 2-1. NC Optional Parameter Bit ........................................................................................... 194 3. Designation of Displaying Device ........................................................................................ 195 4. Print Command.................................................................................................................... 195 4-1. System Variables for Printing ....................................................................................... 196

SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING ............................................................................197 1. Overview.............................................................................................................................. 197 1-1. Specifications ............................................................................................................... 197 1-2. Overview of Manual Gauging Functions....................................................................... 198 1-3. List of Display Screens ................................................................................................. 202 2. Basic Operation ................................................................................................................... 203 3. Preparation for Gauging ...................................................................................................... 204 3-1. Preparation for Work Gauging/Tool Length Gauging Cycles ....................................... 204 3-2. Preparation for Cutter Radius Compensation Cycle..................................................... 211 4. Work Gauging...................................................................................................................... 213 4-1. End Face Gauging (X, Y, Z) ......................................................................................... 213 4-2. I.D. Center Gauging...................................................................................................... 218 4-3. O.D. Center Gauging .................................................................................................... 223 4-4. Internal Faces Center Gauging .................................................................................... 230 4-5. External Faces Center Gauging ................................................................................... 244 4-6. Inclination and Corner Gauging .................................................................................... 258 5. Tool Length Gauging ........................................................................................................... 267 6. Cutter Radius Gauging ........................................................................................................ 270 7. Comparison and Calculation of Gauging Results ................................................................ 273 7-1. Transferring Gauging Results....................................................................................... 273 7-2. Comparison with Gauging Data.................................................................................... 275 7-3. Example of Calculation Results Display ....................................................................... 276 8. Error List .............................................................................................................................. 279

SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION................................................281 1. Specifications....................................................................................................................... 281 2. List of Display Screen .......................................................................................................... 282 3. Switches .............................................................................................................................. 283

5249-E P-(iv) TABLE OF CONTENTS 3-1. Interactive Gauging Operation Panel ........................................................................... 283 4. Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 284 5. Basic Operation ................................................................................................................... 285 6. Outline of Interactive Gauging Function .............................................................................. 286 7. Work Gauging Function ....................................................................................................... 292 7-1. PARAMETER (WORK) Screen .................................................................................... 292 7-2. PREPARATION (WORK) Screen ................................................................................. 293 7-3. X, Y, Z END FACE ....................................................................................................... 299 7-4. I.D. CENTER ................................................................................................................ 303 7-5. O.D. CENTER .............................................................................................................. 307 7-6. INT END CENTER ....................................................................................................... 310 7-7. EXT END CENTER ...................................................................................................... 313 7-8. INCLINE, CORNER ...................................................................................................... 316 8. Tool Length Gauging ........................................................................................................... 319 8-1. Parameter (Tool Length) .............................................................................................. 319 8-2. Preparation (Tool Length)............................................................................................. 321 8-3. Tool Length Gauging .................................................................................................... 324 9. Other Supplementary Explanations ..................................................................................... 327 10.Operation Flow .................................................................................................................... 329 11.Error List .............................................................................................................................. 330

SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION .....................332 1. What is Non-contact Sensor? .............................................................................................. 332 2. Outline ................................................................................................................................. 333 3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode............................................................. 334 4. Maker’s Subprogram in the Fixed Sensor Mode ................................................................. 353 5. Maker’s Subprogram for Gauging a Vertical Spindle Tool in the Fixed Sensor Mode .............. 354 6. Maker’s Subprogram for Gauging a Horizontal Spindle Tool in the Fixed Sensor Mode.................................................................................................................................... 370 7. List of Alarms ....................................................................................................................... 385

SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC.........................................................................................386 1. What is Non-contact Sensor? .............................................................................................. 386 2. Outline ................................................................................................................................. 387 3. Gauging with the Fixed Sensor............................................................................................ 387 4. Each Manufacturer’s Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor...................................................... 388 5. List of Alarms ....................................................................................................................... 406

SECTION 8 SPECIAL BARRIER FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC ..................407 1. Outline ................................................................................................................................. 407 2. Detailed Specifications ........................................................................................................ 407

5249-E P-(v) TABLE OF CONTENTS 2-1. Parameter Setting......................................................................................................... 407 2-2. Setting Items................................................................................................................. 408 2-3. Barrier Range Setting Example .................................................................................... 409 2-4. Barrier Alarm and Resetting Method ............................................................................ 409 3. Alarms.................................................................................................................................. 410 3-1. Alarm A ......................................................................................................................... 410

SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCRAF ........................................................................................................411 1. What is Non-contact Sensor? .............................................................................................. 411 2. Outline ................................................................................................................................. 412 3. Manufacturer’s Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor............................................................... 412 4. Manufacturer’s Subprogram for Gauging Vertical Spindle Tools with the Fixed Sensor........................................................................................................................................ 413 5. List of Alarms ....................................................................................................................... 432

SECTION 10NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/ 45° AT (103 VERSIONS) .....................................................................433 1. What is Non-contact Sensor? .............................................................................................. 433 2. Outline ................................................................................................................................. 434 3. Manufacturer’s Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor............................................................... 435 4. Manufacturer’s Subprogram for 30°/45° AT Tool Gauging by the Fixed Sensor ................. 436 5. List of Alarms ....................................................................................................................... 455

5249-E P-1 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

SECTION 1

1.

AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/ AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION

Overview The automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function automatically calculates the tool offset data and detects breakage (chipping) of tools such as drills, taps, reamers and boring bars. The specifications of this function are classified into the following two types.

• Specifications for automatic tool length offset only, and • Specifications for automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection A touch sensor is mounted in the machine: a tool mounted in the spindle is brought into contact with this touch sensor to determine the tool offset data and to detect if the tool has been broken. For tools which are mounted and removed without using the ATC, refer to the section Tool Management Function in the special specifications of the Operation Manual. (1) Automatic Tool Length Offset With the tool length offset function, the tool mounted in the spindle is brought into contact with the touch sensor to calculate the tool length. A subprogram prepared for this purpose is used for this operation. (2) Automatic Tool Breakage Detection With the automatic tool breakage detection function, the same contact detection cycle as used for the tool length offset function is executed to obtain the tool length. The function compares the obtained tool length with the tool length offset data stored in the CNC memory to judge if the tool has been broken. If the tool is found to have been broken, it is replaced with a spare tool.

5249-E P-2 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

1-1.

Displaying the Result of Gauging Display the screen that displays the gauging result (GAUGING RESULTS screen) by following the steps indicated below. Procedure :

1

Select an operation mode (automatic, MDI, manual).

2

Press function key [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE). The DISPLAY CHANGE window opens.

3

In the DISPLAY CHANGE window, select “GAUGING RESULTS”.

4

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The GAUGING RESULTS screen, shown below, is displayed.

ME61012R0700300020001

5249-E P-3 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

1-2.

Function Menu The function menu switches as shown below to display the functions relating to the gauging result when the extend key, to the right of function key [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE), is pressed.

ME61012R0700300030001

When the extend key is pressed.

ME61012R0700300030002

The function menu relating to gauging result processing is described below. Function Menu TOOL/ZERO

Description Displays the presently set zero offset/tool offset number.

MSB ZERO ON/OFF

Displays the offset data presently set for the individual zero offset numbers.

MSB TOOL ON/OFF

Displays the offset data presently set for the tool length offset number and the cutter diameter offset number.

SENSstat ON/OFF

Displays the value set for system variable VNCOM and the sensor contact status.

VARIOUS ON/OFF

Displays the values set for the system variables.

For details on the function keys, refer to [1-2-1. TOOL/ZERO Function Key] to [1-2-5. VARIOUS ON/ OFF Function Key].

5249-E P-4 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

1-2-1. TOOL/ZERO Function Key The TOOL/ZERO pop-up window displays the presently set zero offset number and tool offset numbers. To display the TOOL/ZERO pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below. Procedure :

1

Display the GAUGING RESULTS screen. For the procedure used to display the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to [1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging].

2

Press the extend key to switch the function menu.

3

Press function key [F2] (TOOL/ZERO). The TOOL/ZERO pop-up window opens.

ME61012R0700300040001

The TOOL/ZERO pop-up window closes when function key [F2] (TOOL/ZERO) is pressed again.

5249-E P-5 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

1-2-2. MSB ZERO ON/OFF Function Key The MSB (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window displays the offset data set for the individual zero offset numbers. To display the MSB (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below. Procedure :

1

Display the GAUGING RESULTS screen. For the procedure used to display the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to [1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging].

2

Press the extend key to switch the function menu.

3

Press function key [F4] (MSB ZERO ON/OFF). The MSB (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window opens.

ME61012R0700300050001

The MSB (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window closes when function key [F4] (MSB ZERO ON/OFF) is pressed again.

5249-E P-6 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

1-2-3. MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key The TOOL OFFSET/COMPENSATION pop-up window displays the offset data set for the individual tool length offset and cutter radius compensation numbers. To display the TOOL OFFSET/COMPENSATION pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below. Procedure :

1

Display the GAUGING RESULTS screen. For the procedure used to display the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to [1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging].

2

Press the extend key to switch the function menu.

3

Press function key [F5] (MSB TOOL ON/OFF). The MSB TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (VSTOH[N])/MSB CUTR RADIUS COMP (VSTOD[N]) pop-up window opens.

ME61012R0700300060001

The MSB TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (VSTOH[N])/MSB CUTR RADIUS COMP (VSTOD[N]) pop-up window closes when function key [F5] (MSB TOOL ON/OFF) is pressed again.

5249-E P-7 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

1-2-4. SENSstat ON/OFF Function Key The NC COMMUNICATION (VNCOM[N]) pop-up window displays the values set for system variables VNCOM and the contact status of the sensor. To display the NC COMMUNICATION (VNCOM[N]) pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below. Procedure :

1

Display the GAUGING RESULTS screen. For the procedure used to display the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to [1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging].

2

Press the extend key to switch the function menu.

3

Press function key [F6] (SENSstat ON/OFF). The NC COMMUNICATION (VNCOM[N]) pop-up window opens.

ME61012R0700300070001

The NC COMMUNICATION (VNCOM[N]) pop-up window closes when function key [F6] (SENSstat ON/OFF) is pressed again.

5249-E P-8 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

1-2-5. VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key The VARIOUS DATA pop-up window displays the values set for the individual system variables. To display the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below. Procedure :

1

Display the GAUGING RESULTS screen. For the procedure used to display the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to [1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging].

2

Press the extend key to switch the function menu.

3

Press function key [F7] (VARIOUS ON/OFF). The VARIOUS DATA pop-up window opens.

ME61012R0700300080001

The VARIOUS DATA pop-up window closes when function key [F7] (VARIOUS ON/OFF) is pressed again.

5249-E P-9 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

2.

Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Operation A general breakdown of the operational procedure for carrying out automatic tool length and tool breakage detection functions is given below.

Setting the zero point for the touch sensor

Setting the correspondence between pot numbers/tool numbers Executing the automatic tool length offset cycle with the tool used for setting the touch sensor zero point

Executing automatic tool length offset for other tools

Setting the tool change position data

Executing automatic tool breakage detection cycle

Tool not broken

Checking for breakage Tool broken

Pallet change, etc.

Zero point setting is necessary only when the machine is installed. (If higher gauging accuracy is required, however, you are recommended to set the zero point occasionally.) When tools in the magazine are replaced, it is necessary to set the new correspondence between the tool pot numbers and the tool numbers.

Make sure that the tool length offset value is "0±0.005 mm" or "PLI setting±0.005mm". Call the tool whose tool length offset data is to be set from the magazine and mount it in the spindle, then execute the automatic tool length offset cycle. Repeat this operation for all tools that require tool length offset data setting. This step is not necessary for MC-H. Usually, the tool breakage detection cycle is executed after each cutting operation with the relevant tool is completed. Tool length offset data must be set for tools that are checked for breakage. The function determines whether the machining is continued as programmed or error processing is executed according to the result of the automatic tool breakage detection cycle. This step is not necessary if the setting that specifies the machine should stop in the alarm stop state when tool breakage is detected is made. When the setting that specifies automatic selection of a spare tool if tool breakage is detected is made, the error processing on occurrence of tool breakage should be as follows: the CNC judges that the workpiece machined using the broken tool is defective, changes the pallet to a new one and starts machining for a new workpiece.

ME61012R0700300090001

[Supplement] With a double-column machining center that has a touch sensor at a location other than the crossrail (on the table, for example), the Z-axis zero point must be set after positioning the crossrail.

5249-E P-10 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

2-1.

Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point

2-1-1. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point (Z-axis) Set the Z-axis direction offset value of the touch sensor zero point using a reference tool so that the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function operates correctly. [Supplement] If Y-axis has to be retracted to set the touch sensor zero point, set the Y-axis retraction position first by referring to [4. Y-axis Escape Position (MCM-B/MCR-B II/MCR-A/VH-40)]. Procedure :

1

After selecting the MDI mode, input “VFST=**”, press the CYCLE START button. Set an appropriate value for “**” by referring to [2-3. Operation Mode Designation]. In this setting, either the automatic tool length offset mode or the automatic tool breakage detection cycle may be selected. The set value can be confirmed by opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

ME61012R0700300100001

For the procedure for opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window, refer to [1-2-5. VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key].

2

Execute the sensor advance command M144 in the MDI mode. (In the case of a movable type sensor)

3

Set the reference tool in the spindle, and manually bring the nose of the reference tool near the Z-axis touch sensor. There will inevitably be some slight displacement between the center of the sensor and the center of the reference tool. This displacement, however, does not pose a problem for the succeeding operation.

5249-E P-11 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION [Supplement] The “reference tool” means the tool used for setting the zero point in a work coordinate system.

4

At this position, execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode. CALL OO30 PAXI=7 PLI=** (VFST=**) M02 [Supplement] The settings for PLI should be as indicated below

Offset Type

PLl Setting

Relative offset type

0

Absolute offset type

Length from the spindle nose face

Usually, the tool used for zero setting of the work coordinate system is also used for the sensor zero point setting cycle. Therefore, there is no tool length difference between the tools used for the two different zero point setting cycles, and the setting for PLI should be “zero” (PLI = 0). For the absolute offset type, set the accurate length of the tool currently set in the spindle as illustrated to the left. If no value is set for PLI, either “PLI = 150 mm.” or “PLI = 200 mm” is assumed. Which of the values is used is determined by the machine model. Tool used for zero setting of the work coordinate system Relative offset type PLI = 0

Absolute offset type

PLI

ME61012R0700300100002

[Supplement] VFST may be set in this step instead of setting it first in the MDI mode. As the program above is executed, the reference tool automatically comes into contact with the Z-axis touch sensor, whereupon Z-axis zero offset is executed. Zero offset of both the X and Y axes is executed so that the present (actual) position of the reference tool becomes X = 0, Y = 0. How the reference tool moves during the execution of the program is explained in [2-1-2. Reference Tool Movements during Z-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting].

5249-E P-12 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

5

Execute the sensor advance command M144 in the MDI mode. (In the case of a movable type sensor)

6

Mount a small-diameter drill in the spindle.

7

Bring the drill tip manually near to the touch sensor and align the spindle center (drill center) with the center of the touch sensor.

8

At this position, execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode. CALL OO30 PAXI=3 M02 X- and Y-axis zero offset is executed so that the present (actual) position of the drill becomes X = 0, Y = 0. (The Z-axis does not move.) After the execution of the X- and Y-axis zero offset, the Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction and the sensor retracts, completing touch sensor zero point setting. The result is fed back to the offset data of system work coordinate system No. 1. The set offset data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The offset data of the X-, Y- and Z-axis is displayed at the X, Y, and Z columns of the NO. 1 line

ME61012R0700300100003

[Supplement] Since system work coordinate system No. 1 is used exclusively for the automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection functions, it cannot normally be set or referenced. For the procedure for opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window, refer to [1-2-2. MSB ZERO ON/OFF Function Key]. This completes the Z-axis touch sensor zero point setting.

5249-E P-13 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

2-1-2. Reference Tool Movements during Z-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting During the execution of the Z-axis touch sensor zero point setting, the reference tool moves as indicated below.

Machine operation (1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (2) The spindle is oriented. (3) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back once and then moves forward. (4) The Z-axis moves at an approach feedrate in the negative (-) direction until the reference tool comes into contact with the touch sensor. (5) The Z-axis comes to a stop when the reference tool comes into contact with the touch sensor. (6) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (7) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back.

2-1-3. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point (Y-axis) When the specifications for automatic tool length offset and automatic breakage detection in the Yaxis direction (diameter direction) are selected, set the Y-axis touch sensor zero point retraction position first by referring to [2-4. Automatic Tool Length Offset Function]. Procedure :

1

After selecting the MDI mode, input “VFST=**”, and press the CYCLE START button. Set an appropriate value for “**” by referring to [2-3. Operation Mode Designation]. In this setting, either the automatic tool length offset mode or the automatic tool breakage detection cycle may be selected. If an appropriate value is already set for VFST, it is not necessary to set the value here. The set value can be confirmed by opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. For the procedure for opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window, refer to [1-2-5. VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key].

2

Execute the sensor advance command M144 in the MDI mode. (In the case of a movable type sensor)

3

Set the reference tool in the spindle, and manually bring the nose of the reference tool near the Y-axis touch sensor. Align the center of the reference tool with the center of the Y-axis touch sensor.

4

At this position, execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode.

CALL OO30 PAXI=#17H PLI=0(or accurate length of reference tool) PY=Accurate radius of reference tool (VFST=**) M02 ME61012R0700300120001

In actual programming, the three lines of program above are expressed in one line as indicated below.

5249-E P-14 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION [Example]

CALL OO30 PAXI=#17H PLI=0 PY=10 (VFST=1) φ or accurate length of reference tool

Accurate radius of reference tool ME61012R0700300120002

[Supplement] 1) When setting PLI, pay attention to the same point as explained in [2-1-1. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point (Z-axis)]. 2) Always set PY. If it is not set, “PY = 0” is assumed. 3) VFST may be set in this step instead of setting it first in the MDI mode. As the program above is executed, the reference tool automatically comes into contact with the Y-axis touch sensor, whereupon Y-axis zero offset is executed. Zero offset of both the Zand X-axes is executed at the same time. How the reference tool moves during the execution of the program is explained in [2-1-4. Reference Tool Movements during Y-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting]. The result is fed back to the offset data of system work coordinate system No. 4. The set offset data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The offset data of the X-, Y- and Z-axis is displayed at the X, Y, and Z columns, respectively. 4) Since system work coordinate system No. 4 is used exclusively for the automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection functions, it cannot normally be set nor referenced. For the procedure for opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window, refer to [1-2-2. MSB ZERO ON/OFF Function Key]. This completes the Y-axis touch sensor zero point setting.

5249-E P-15 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

2-1-4. Reference Tool Movements during Y-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting During the execution of the Y-axis touch sensor zero point setting, the reference tool moves as indicated below.

Machine operation (1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (2) The spindle is oriented. (3) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back once and then moves forward. (4) The Z-axis moves to the Y-axis touch sensor position (the position where the Z-axis was first moved manually). (5) The Y-axis moves at an approach feedrate until the reference tool comes into contact with the touch sensor. (6) The Y-axis comes to a stop when the reference tool comes into contact with the touch sensor. (7) The Y-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the approach start position. (8) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (9) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back.

5249-E P-16 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

2-2.

Setting the Tool Pot No./Tool No. Table Set the correspondence between tool numbers and tool pot numbers in the tool pot number - tool number correspondence table. The table setting shown below uses a machine with 10-tool capacity magazine as an example.

Assign a tool number to each tool.

Magazine capacity: 10 tools The total number of tools user for cutting the various types of workpieces is 300.

Correspondence Table Toolpot Number

Tool Number

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

20

5

30

6

31

7

32

8

105

9

270

10

271

Write the correspondence between the tool number and the pot number on the screen when tools in the magazine are to be changed for new setup. The memory of the OSP can hold the life expectancy data of up to 300 tools. Max. tool number: Standard 50 Option 300

ME61012R0700300140001

The tool offset data obtained by the execution of an automatic tool length offset cycle is set for the same offset number as the tool number of the tool presently being used (active tool).Similarly, the tool offset number referred to and compared when the automatic tool breakage detection cycle is executed is the same offset number as the tool number of the active tool. [Supplement] To automatically change a tool for a spare tool, tools must be registered in a tool group. For the procedure for registering tools in a group, refer to the Tool Management Function section of the special specifications of the Operation Manual.

5249-E P-17 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

2-3.

Operation Mode Designation The basic operation mode of automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection is designated by the system variable VFST. Since the system variable VFST is backed up in the CNC memory, it only has to be designated once: it does not have to be set each time the MSB of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle is called. VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance.

VFST

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0 ME61012R0700300150001

Bit No

Setting

Description

0

Automatic tool breakage detection cycle

1

Automatic tool length offset cycle

1

Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the Y-axis direction.

1

Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the Y-axis direction after the execution of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the Z-axis direction. To execute automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle only in the Z-axis direction, set “0” for both Bit 1 and Bit 2.

Bit 3

1

Does not move the X-axis when positioning a reference tool at the touch sensor position. Set “1” for Bit 3 with machine models such as MCV in which the touch sensor is installed independently of the X-axis movement.

Bit 4

0

Always set “0”.

Bit 5

0

Always set “0”.

Bit 6

0

Always set “0”.

0

Designates the relative offset type. The tool length in reference to the reference tool used for zero point setting of a work coordinate system is used as the tool length offset data.

1

Designates the absolute offset type. The length of the tool from the spindle nose surface is regarded as the tool length offset data.

Bit 0 Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 7

5249-E P-18 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION An example of VFST settings is given in the following table.

Model

MC-H MC-V

Relative/ Absolute Offset Type

X-axis Movement Yes/No

Z-axis/Y-axis Offset

Relative offset

Yes

Only Z-axis offset

Absolute offset

Yes

Only Z-axis offset

Only Z-axis offset Relative offset

No

Only Y-axis offset Y-axis offset after Zaxis offset

MCV MCR MCM (Vertical spindle)

Only Z-axis offset Absolute offset

No

Only Y-axis offset Y-axis offset after Zaxis offset

Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection

VFST Value

Automatic tool length offset

#01H

Automatic tool breakage detection

#00H

Automatic tool length offset

#81H

Automatic tool breakage detection

#80H

Automatic tool length offset

#09H

Automatic tool breakage detection

#08H

Automatic tool length offset

#0BH

Automatic tool breakage detection

#0AH

Automatic tool length offset

#0DH

Automatic tool breakage detection

#0CH

Automatic tool length offset

#89H

Automatic tool breakage detection

#88H

Automatic tool length offset

#8BH

Automatic tool breakage detection

#8AH

Automatic tool length offset

#8DH

Automatic tool breakage detection

#8CH

[Supplement] Refer to [3-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function for Horizontal Tools of MCM] for details of automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection for the horizontal tools of MCM horizontal.

5249-E P-19 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

2-4.

Automatic Tool Length Offset Function The automatic tool length offset function automatically corrects the tool length according to the offset data set using the reference tool.

2-4-1. Z-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset Automatic tool length offset in the Z-axis direction is executed in the manner indicated below. [Supplement] Make sure that the zero point of the Z-axis touch sensor has been set before executing Z-axis automatic tool length offset. Never execute Z-axis automatic tool length offset when the Z-axis touch sensor zero point has not been set. Procedure :

1

After selecting the MDI mode, input “VFST=**”, and press the CYCLE START button. Set an appropriate value for “**” by referring to [2-3. Operation Mode Designation]. The set value can be confirmed by opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. Refer to [1-2-5. VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key].

2

Mount the tool for which automatic tool length offset is to be executed in the spindle. When the tool is mounted in the spindle manually, make sure that the active tool number displayed on the ATC TOOL DISPLAY (MEMORY RANDOM) screen (for the ATC memory random specification) or the POT NO./TOOL NO. TABLE (FIXED ADDRESS) screen (for the ATC fixed address specification) agrees with the tool number of the tool mounted in the spindle. This operation is not necessary when the tool is mounted in the spindle by executing the M06 command, either in automatic or MDI operation.

3

Execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode. CALL OO30 (VFST=**) (PLI = Anticipated tool length) M02 When the program is executed, the tool is automatically brought into contact with the Z-axis touch sensor and the tool length offset data is calculated and stored in the CNC memory. The set tool length offset data can be checked by displaying the TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/ CUTTER RADIUS COMPENSATION screen of the TOOL DATA screen.

5249-E P-20 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION The obtained results are also displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen

ME61012R0700300170001

This ends the Z-axis automatic tool length offset processing. [Supplement] 1) VFST may be set in this step instead of setting it first in the MDI mode. 2) Set the anticipated tool length for PLI. If no value is set for PLI, the value set for CNC optional parameter (long word) No. 43 (distance from the spindle gauge line) is automatically set as the anticipated tool length.

Machine operation During the execution of the Z-axis automatic tool length offset, the tool moves as indicated below. (1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (2) The spindle is oriented. (3) The X- and Y-axis move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the touch sensor. For tools whose nose is not at the center of the spindle, refer to items (6) PX and (7) PY in [6-3. How to Use Variables]. (4) The Z-axis moves at a fast approach feedrate until the tool comes into contact with the touch sensor. (5) The Z-axis comes to a stop when the reference tool comes into contact with the touch sensor. (6) The Z-axis moves back several millimeters at a rapid feedrate. (7) The Z-axis moves at an approach feedrate until the tool comes into contact with the touch sensor again.

5249-E P-21 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION (8) The Z-axis comes to a stop when the reference tool comes into contact with the touch sensor. The result of gauging is stored under the same tool length offset number as the tool number of the active tool. (9) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction.

2-4-2. Y-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset Automatic tool length offset in the Y-axis direction is executed in the manner indicated below. [Supplement] 1) Make sure that the zero point of the Z-axis and Y-axis touch sensors has been set before executing Y-axis automatic tool length offset. Never execute Y-axis automatic tool length offset when the touch sensor zero point has not been set. 2) Before executing automatic tool length offset in the Y-axis direction, set the Z-axis tool length offset data of the tools. The Z-axis tool length offset data can be set either by executing the Z-axis automatic tool length offset or by inputting an appropriate value at the TOOL DATA screen. Procedure :

1

After selecting the MDI mode, input “VFST=**”, and press the CYCLE START button. Set an appropriate value for “**” by referring to [2-3. Operation Mode Designation]. The set value can be confirmed by opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. Refer to [1-2-5. VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key].

2

Mount the tool for which Y-axis automatic tool length offset is to be executed in the spindle. When the tool is mounted in the spindle manually, make sure that the active tool number displayed on the ATC TOOL DISPLAY (MEMORY RANDOM) screen (for the ATC memory random specification) or the POT NO./TOOL NO. TABLE (FIXED ADDRESS) screen (for the ATC fixed address specification) agrees with the tool number of spindle mounted tool. This operation is not necessary when the tool is mounted in the spindle by executing the M06 command either in automatic or MDI operation.

3

Execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode. CALL OO30 PY= Anticipated cutter radius(VFST=**) M02 When the program is executed, the tool is automatically brought into contact with the Y-axis touch sensor and the cutter radius compensation data is calculated and stored in the CNC memory. The set cutter radius compensation data can be checked by displaying the TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/CUTTER RADIUS COMPENSATION screen of the TOOL DATA screen. The obtained results are also displayed at the GAUGING RESULTS screen. This ends the Y-axis automatic tool length offset processing.

[Supplement] VFST may be set in this step instead of setting it first in the MDI mode.

5249-E P-22 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

Machine operation During the execution of the Y-axis automatic tool length offset, the tool moves as indicated below. (1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (2) The spindle is oriented. (3) The X- and Y-axis move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the Z-axis touch sensor. (4) The Z-axis moves at a fast approach feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the Y-axis touch sensor. (5) The Y-axis moves at an approach feedrate until the tool comes into contact with the Y-axis touch sensor. (6) The Y-axis comes to a stop when the tool comes into contact with the touch sensor. The result of gauging is stored under the same cutter radius compensation number as the tool number of the active tool. (7) The Y-axis returns at a rapid feedrate. (8) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction.

2-4-3. Continuous Z-axis and Y-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset To execute automatic tool length offset on the Z-axis and the Y-axis continuously, follow the procedure indicated below. For points of caution and details of the tool length offset, refer to [2-4-1. Z-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset] and [2-4-2. Y-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset]. Procedure :

1

After selecting the MDI mode, input “VFST=**”, and press the CYCLE START button.

2

Execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode. CALL OO30 PY= Anticipated cutter radius (PLI = Anticipated tool length) (VFST=**) M02 The tool is first brought into contact with the Z-axis touch sensor then the Y-axis touch sensor. This ends the continuous Z-axis and Y-axis automatic tool length offset processing.

5249-E P-23 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

2-5.

Setting the Tool Change Position (Other Than MC-H) When a tool is found to be broken in the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the broken tool can be automatically returned to the magazine by using a subprogram. In order to execute this automatic tool return cycle, the tool change position must be set for MC-V and double-column machining centers since these types of machining centers do not have a preset ATC home position like MC-H. If the tool change position is not set for these types of machining centers, the tool change will be carried out just above the touch sensor. Since this may cause problems with some kinds of workpieces, it is necessary to set the tool change position for MC-V and double-column machining centers. Procedure :

1

Move the spindle to the desired tool change position. Note that X- and Y-axis must be positioned at the desired tool change position. Positioning of the Z-axis is not necessary.

2

At this position, execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode. CALL OO31 M02 The axes will not move at all even when a program is executed. The set tool change position data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The tool change position data of the X-, Y- and Z-axis is displayed at the X, Y, and Z columns of the NO. 2 line. This completes the tool change position setting.

[Supplement] Since system work coordinate system No. 2 is used exclusively for the automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection functions, it cannot normally be set or referenced.

5249-E P-24 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

2-6.

Automatic Tool Breakage Detection

2-6-1. Z-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Automatic tool breakage detection in the Z-axis direction is executed in the manner indicated below. [Supplement] Before executing Z-axis automatic tool breakage detection, make sure that the zero point of the touch sensor and the tool change position have been set. Procedure :

1

After selecting the MDI mode, input “VFST=**”, and press the CYCLE START button. Set an appropriate value for “**” by referring to [2-3. Operation Mode Designation].

2

Mount the tool for which automatic tool breakage detection is to be executed in the spindle. When the tool is mounted in the spindle manually, make sure that the active tool number displayed on the ATC TOOL DISPLAY (MEMORY RANDOM) screen (for the ATC memory random specification) or the POT NO./TOOL NO. TABLE (FIXED ADDRESS) screen (for the ATC fixed address specification) agrees with the tool number of the tool mounted in the spindle. This operation is not necessary when the tool is mounted in the spindle by executing the M06 command either in automatic or MDI operation.

3

Execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode. CALL OO30 PLE1 = Tool breakage judgment value (VFST=**) (PGO=**) M02 When the program is executed, the tool is automatically brought into contact with the touch sensor and the tool length is obtained. The obtained tool length is compared to the tool length offset data stored in the CNC memory and a tool breakage alarm occurs if the difference is greater than the value set for PLE1. The tool breakage alarm also occurs if the tool nose fails to contact the touch sensor during the execution of the program. This ends the Z-axis automatic tool breakage detection processing.

[Supplement] 1) VFST may be set in this step instead of setting it first in the MDI mode. 2) To replace a broken tool with a spare tool, PGO must be designated. For details of PGO, refer to item (11) PGO(P GO) in [6-3. How to Use Variables].

5249-E P-25 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

Machine operation During the execution of the Z-axis automatic tool breakage detection, the tool moves as indicated below. (1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (2) The spindle is oriented. (3) The X- and Y-axis move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the Z-axis touch sensor. For tools whose nose is not at the center of the spindle, refer to items (6) PX and (7) PY in [6-3. How to Use Variables]. (4) The tool edge moves at the rapid traverse to a position in front of the touch sensor with a clearance of the safety distance (PUDT). (*1) If PUDT is not specified, the axis moves at the rapid traverse to a position in front of the touch sensor with a clearance of 5 mm. (5) The Z-axis moves at an approach feedrate to the position 10 mm past the point where the tool nose would be in contact with the touch sensor.

• If the tool has not been broken or the amount of chipping is smaller than 10 mm: The tool nose comes into contact with the touch sensor and the Z-axis stops. The tool length is calculated from the coordinate value of the contact position and is stored in the CNC memory temporarily.

• If the tool has been broken (amount of chipping is greater than 10 mm): The tool nose will not contact the touch sensor. (6) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (*1) If the NC optional parameter bit No.74 bit 4 is check marked, the setting is changed from “moves at the rapid traverse” to “moves at the rapid approach rate”.

5249-E P-26 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

2-6-2. Y-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Automatic tool breakage detection in the Y-axis direction is executed in the manner indicated below. [Supplement] Before executing Y-axis automatic tool breakage detection, make sure that the zero point of the touch sensor has been set. Procedure :

1

After selecting the MDI mode, input “VFST=**”, and press the CYCLE START button. Set an appropriate value for “**” by referring to [2-3. Operation Mode Designation].

2

Mount the tool for which automatic tool breakage detection is to be executed in the spindle. When the tool is mounted to the spindle manually, make sure that the active tool number displayed on the ATC TOOL DISPLAY (MEMORY RANDOM) screen (for the ATC memory random specification) or the POT NO./TOOL NO. TABLE (FIXED ADDRESS) screen (for the ATC fixed address specification) agrees with the tool number of the tool mounted in the spindle. This operation is not necessary when the tool is mounted in the spindle by executing the M06 command either in automatic or MDI operation.

3

Execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode. CALL OO30 PLEY=Tool breakage judgment value PY=Anticipated cutter radius (VFST=**) M02 When the program is executed, the tool is automatically brought into contact with the touch sensor and the cutter radius is obtained. The obtained cutter radius is compared to the cutter radius compensation data stored in the CNC memory and a tool breakage alarm occurs if the difference is greater than the value set for PLEY. The tool breakage alarm also occurs if the tool fails to contact the touch sensor during the execution of the program. This ends the Y-axis automatic tool breakage detection processing.

[Supplement] VFST may be set in this step instead of setting it first in the MDI mode.

5249-E P-27 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

Machine operation During the execution of the Y-axis automatic tool breakage detection, the tool moves as indicated below. (1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (2) The spindle is oriented. (3) The X- and Y-axis move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the touch sensor. (4) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the Y-axis touch sensor. (5) The Y-axis moves at an approach feedrate to the position 10 mm past the point where the tool nose would be in contact with the touch sensor.

• If the tool has not been broken or amount of chipping is smaller than 10 mm: The tool nose comes into contact with the touch sensor and the Y-axis stops. The cutter radius is calculated from the coordinate value of the contact position and is stored in the CNC memory temporarily.

• If the tool has been broken (amount of chipping is greater than 10 mm): The tool nose will not contact the touch sensor. (6) The Y-axis returns at a rapid feedrate. (7) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction.

2-6-3. Continuous Z-axis and Y-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection To execute automatic tool breakage detection on the Z-axis and the Y-axis continuously, follow the procedure indicated below. For items carefully attended to and details of the tool length offset, refer to [2-6-1. Z-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection] and [2-6-2. Y-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection]. Procedure :

1

After selecting the MDI mode, input “VFST=**” and press the CYCLE START button.

2

Execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode.

CALL OO30 (VFST=**) PY=Anticipated cutter radius PLE1=Tool breakage judgment value (Z-axis) PLEY=Tool breakage judgment value (Y-axis) M02 ME61012R0700300230001

3

The tool is first brought into contact with the Z-axis touch sensor to check tool breakage in the Z-axis direction. When tool breakage is not detected in the Z-axis direction, tool breakage in the Y-axis direction is checked.

5249-E P-28 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

2-6-4. Judgment of Tool Breakage When a spare tool is selected in response to the detection of tool breakage, operation does not stop even when the breakage is detected. Therefore, it is necessary to judge the occurrence of tool breakage at the end of the automatic tool breakage detection cycle and branch the program execution in accordance with the result of the judgement.

• It can be judged whether or not the tool is broken by reading system variable VOK1. VOK1 = 0 Tool is not broken. VOK1 ≠ 0 Tool is broken. VOK1 indicates the result of the previously executed automatic tool breakage detection cycle.

• Another system variable VOK2 is also available for judgement. VOK2 indicates the result of automatic tool breakage detection cycles executed after clearance to 0 (VOK2 = 0). If tool breakage is detected even once, the value set for VOK2 is “VOK2 ≠ 0”.

• VOK1 and VOK2 are not cleared to 0 when the CNC is reset. [Supplement] When tool breakage is detected by the automatic tool breakage detection function, the tool number is registered by the tool management function as that of a broken tool. In order to use the same tool number after taking the necessary measures, such as replacement with a new tool, the registration of the broken tool number must be cleared. Refer to Tool Management Function in special specifications of the Operation Manual for the procedure for resetting broken tool registration.

5249-E P-29 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

Cycle Time Reduction for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle By feeding a tool close to the sensor at a rapid feedrate, it is possible to reduce the cycle time of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle.

Spindle nose face Tool

2-7.

G0 (4) G31F=PF1 (5) G31F2000 (6)

Max. tool length VLTL

Anticipatedtool length PL1

Safety distancePUDT Sensor

Fig.1-1 Cycle Time Reduction Function ME61012R0700300250001

To use this function, it is necessary to set the following parameters.

• Optional parameter (bit) No. 36, bit 3: Default of maximum tool length for automatic tool length offset/tool breakage detection With check mark: Valid Without check mark: Invalid (Initial value)

• Optional parameter (long ward) No. 44: Max. tool length For this parameter, set the maximum tool length among the tools that will be used. Setting range: 0 to 999 Unit: mm Initial setting: 0 [Supplement] Set an appropriate value for the maximum tool length setting parameter since “0” is set as the initial value.

5249-E P-30 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

2-7-1. Automatic tool length offset cycle Machine operation (1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (2) The spindle is oriented. (3) The X- and Y-axis move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the touch sensor. (4) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the point distanced from the touch sensor by “safety distance (PUDT) + max. tool length (VLTL)”. This operation is or is not executed according to the setting for the parameter. (5) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PF1, to the point distanced from the touch sensor by “anticipated tool length (PLI) + safety distance (PUDT)”. If the PLI command is not specified, the Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate specified by PF1 to the point distanced from the touch sensor by “safety distance (PUDT)”. If the PF1 command is not specified, the Z-axis moves at F2000. (6) The Z-axis moves at F2000 to the point 10 mm beyond the anticipated contact point. It stops when the tool comes into contact with the touch sensor. (7) The Z-axis returns 5 mm from the contact point. (8) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PF2, to the point 10 mm beyond the contact point. It stops when the tool comes into contact with the touch sensor. (9) The tool length offset data is written to the active tool number or the offset number specified by the PH command. (10) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction.

2-7-2. Automatic tool breakage detection cycle Machine operation (1) The same operation as steps 1) to 4) of the automatic tool length offset cycle explained above is executed. (2) The Z-axis moves at rapid feedrate to the point 5 mm away the anticipated contact point. (*1) (3) The Z-axis moves at skip feedrate F1000 to the point 10 mm beyond the anticipated contact point. It stops when the tool comes into contact with the touch sensor. (4) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (*1) If the NC optional parameter bit No.74 bit 4 is check marked, the setting is changed from “moves at the rapid traverse” to “moves at the rapid approach rate”.

5249-E P-31 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

2-8.

New Cycle Time Reduction Function for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle By reducing the execution time of the cycle steps that can be reduced in the previous automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the cycle time reduction function is made more powerful. This new cycle time reduction function is usable only in the vertical tool direction.

2-8-1. Command Format and Variables of the New Cycle Time Reduction Function The command format and the variables used by the new cycle time reduction function are described below.

• Command format The following is an example command to use the cycle time reduction function. CALL OO30 PZRC=1 PSFT=10 POVT=20 PF1=5000 PF2=2000 M02

• Variables PZRC

Used to select the new or conventional cycle time reduction function. “1” selects the new cycle time reduction function and “0” selects the conventional cycle time reduction function. The default is “0”.

PUDT:

Undertravel distance (safety distance) This defines the point where, during the approach of a cutting tool to the touch sensor, the approach speed is changed from high-speed to low-speed. The distance from the touch sensor to the tool nose is designated. For the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the default is 5 mm.

POVT:

Overtravel distance (sensor breakage prevention distance) Default is 10 mm.

PFA:

Approach speed to undertravel point For the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the default is F4000.

PF2:

Approach speed to overtravel point For the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the default is F1000.

VMSBU:

Setting for CNC optional parameter (bit) No. 36 If the setting for bit 3 of this parameter is “1”, with “0” set for PZRC, the conventional cycle time reduction function is selected.

VLTL:

Maximum tool length The value set for CNC optional parameter (long word) No. 44

PSFT:

Feedrate shift distance This defines the point where, during approach of a cutting tool to the touch sensor, the approach speed is changed from a rapid feedrate to high-speed (lowspeed if PSFT is not specified). The distance from the touch sensor to the tool nose is designated. The default is 5 mm.

5249-E P-32 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

2-8-2. Tool Movements of New Cycle Time Reduction Function During the execution of the new cycle time reduction function, the tool moves as indicated below. Note that tool movements differ according to the setting of the variables. Variable setting: PZRC = 0, Bit 3 of VMSBU = 0

Machine operation (1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction (2) The spindle is oriented. (3) The Y-axis and the X-axis, in this order, move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the touch sensor. (4) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PFA, to the position PUDT above the touch sensor zero point. The Z-axis stops when the tool comes into contact with the sensor. (5) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PF2, to the position POVT below the touch sensor zero point. The Z-axis stops when the tool comes into contact with the sensor. (6) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction.

2)

Touch sensor PF2 5) zero point

Rapid feed 6)

PFA 4)

Rapid feed 1)

Rapid feed 3)

PUDT POVT ME61012R0700300300001

5249-E P-33 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION Variable setting: PZRC = 0, Bit 3 of VMSBU = 1

Machine operation (1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (2) The spindle is oriented. (3) The Y-axis and the X-axis, in this order, move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the touch sensor. (4) The Z-axis moves down at a rapid feedrate until the spindle nose face reaches the point VLTL above the touch sensor zero point. (5) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PFA, to the position PUDT above the touch sensor zero point. The Z-axis stops when the tool comes into contact with the sensor. (6) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PF2, to the position POVT below the touch sensor zero point. The Z-axis stops when the tool comes into contact with the sensor. (7) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction.

2)

PF2 6)

Rapid feed 7)

Rapid feed 4) PFA 5)

Rapid feed 1)

Rapid feed 3)

VLTL PUDT POVT ME61012R0700300300002

5249-E P-34 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION Variable setting: PZRC = 1, Bit 3 of VMSBU = 0 or 1 If “PUDT > PSFT”, an alarm (Alarm B 2305 UNTENDED: gauging impossible 64) occurs.

Machine operation (1) If the tool nose is below the point “touch sensor zero point + PSFT”, the Z-axis moves up at a rapid feedrate to the point “touch sensor zero point + PSFT” (2) The spindle is oriented. (3) The Y-axis and the X-axis, in this order, move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the touch sensor. (4) The Z-axis moves down at a rapid feedrate to the point “touch sensor zero point + PSFT”. (5) The Z-axis moves down at a skip feedrate PFA to the point “touch sensor zero point + PUDT”. (6) The Z-axis moves down at a skip feedrate PF2 to the point “touch sensor zero point - POVT”. (7) The Z-axis moves up at rapid feedrate to the point “touch sensor zero point + PSFT”.

Rapid feed 1)

Rapid feed 3)

2)

Rapid feed 4)

2)

PFA 5) PF2 6)

Rapid feed 7)

PSFT PUDT POVT ME61012R0700300300003

5249-E P-35 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3.

Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function for Special Tools and Attachments This section deals with the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function for special tools and attachments. If no such tools or attachments are used, this section may be skipped.

3-1.

Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function for Horizontal Tools of MCM The operation procedure for the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function for horizontal tools of MCM is described below. [Supplement] Since the machine operations for the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function used for horizontal tools of MCM are similar to those for vertical tools of MCM, part of the explanation is omitted. For the information not given below, refer to [2. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Operation].

Machine operation During the execution of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for the horizontal tool of MCM, the tool moves as indicated below. (1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (2) M76 and M19 are executed. The swivel head is indexed to the right position and the spindle is oriented. (3) The Y-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to a position just before the touch sensor. (4) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the touch sensor position for the horizontal tool. (5) From here on, the movements are the same as for a vertical tool. Note, however, that with an MCM horizontal tool, the Z-axis movements of a vertical tool are replaced by the Y-axis movements of a horizontal tool.

3) 2)

1)

4)

5) ME61012R0700300320001

5249-E P-36 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-1-1. Setting the Z-axis Lower Limit Position When executing the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for an MCM horizontal tool, the spindle may strike the workpiece during Z-axis downward operation. To avoid such a problem, it is necessary to set the Z-axis lower limit position as close to the touch sensor as possible, but at a position where the spindle or other machine unit will not collide with the touch sensor unit. Set the Z-axis lower limit position in the manner indicated below. Procedure :

1

Move the Y-axis to the position where the Z-axis lower limit position is to be set. In this operation, the X- and Z-axis may be at any position.

2

At this position, execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode. CALL OO32 M02 When this program is executed, axes do not move. After the execution of the program, the actual position of the Z-axis is stored in system work coordinate system No. 9 as the Z-axis lower limit position. The set value can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The Z-axis lower limit coordinate value is displayed at the Y column of the NO. 9 line.

[Supplement] Since system work coordinate system No. 9 is used exclusively for automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection functions, it cannot normally be set or referenced.

5249-E P-37 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-1-2. Designating the Operation Mode As with a vertical tool, the basic operation mode for a horizontal tool is set using system variable VFST. The setting for system variable VFST is the same as that for a vertical spindle with the exception that “1” is set for bit 6. VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance

VFST

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0 ME61012R0700300340001

Bit No.

Setting

Description

0

Automatic tool breakage detection cycle

1

Automatic tool length offset cycle

1

Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the Z-axis (radial) direction

Bit 2

1

Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the Z-axis (radial) direction after the execution of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the Yaxis (tool length) direction. To execute an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle only in the Y-axis (tool length) direction, set “0” for both Bit 1 and Bit 2

Bit 3

1

Does not move the X-axis when positioning a tool to the touch sensor position.

Bit 4

0

Always set “0”

Bit 5

0

Always set “0”.

0

Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for a vertical tool.

1

Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for a horizontal tool.

0

Designates the relative offset type. The tool length in reference to the reference tool used for zero point setting of a work coordinate system is used as the tool length offset data.

1

Designates the absolute offset type. The length of the tool from the spindle nose surface is regarded as the tool length offset data

Bit 0 Bit 1

Bit 6

Bit 7

5249-E P-38 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION An example of VFST settings is given in the following table.

Model

Relative/ Absolute Offset Type

X-axis Offset in Tool Length Movement Direction/Tool Radial Yes/No Direction Offset only in the tool length direction

Relative offset

No

Offset only in the tool radial direction

Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection

VFST Value

Automatic tool length offset

#49H

Automatic tool breakage detection

#48H

Automatic tool length offset #4BH Automatic tool breakage detection

#4AH

Automatic tool length offset #4DH Offset in the tool length direction then Automatic tool breakage #4CH the tool radial direction detection

MCM Horizontal tool

Offset only in the tool length direction Absolute offset

No

Offset only in the tool radial direction

Automatic tool length offset #C9H Automatic tool breakage detection

#C8H

Automatic tool length offset #CBH Automatic tool breakage detection

#CAH

Automatic tool length offset #CDH Offset in the tool length direction then Automatic tool breakage #CCH the tool radial direction detection

5249-E P-39 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-1-3. Setting the Zero Point of Horizontal Tool Touch Sensor Set the zero point of the touch sensor for MCM horizontal tools in the manner indicated below. Procedure :

1

Select the MDI mode and execute M144 to move the reference tool near the horizontal tool touch sensor. Since the procedure up to this step is the same as used for a vertical tool, refer to [2-1. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point] for details.

2

Execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode.

• Setting the zero point for the tool length (Y-axis) direction touch sensor CALL OO30 PAXI=#27H PLI=0 (or accurate reference tool length) (VFST=**) M02

• Setting the zero point for the tool radius (Z-axis) direction touch sensor CALL OO30 PAXI=#47H PLI=0 (or accurate reference tool length) (VFST=**) PZ=Accurate radius of the reference tool M02 ME61012R0700300350001

The result of gauging is stored in the system work coordinate system No. 7 (zero point of the tool length direction (Y-axis direction) touch sensor) and the system work coordinate system No. 8 (zero point of the tool radius direction (Z-axis direction) touch sensor). The set value can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. [Supplement] Before setting the zero point, index the swivel head to the following position. Vertical tool: Front position (M73) Horizontal tool: Right position (M76)

5249-E P-40 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-1-4. Automatic Tool Length Offset for Horizontal Tools Automatic tool length offset for horizontal tools is executed in the manner indicated below. [Supplement] Before executing automatic tool length offset for horizontal tools, make sure that the zero point of the horizontal tool touch sensor has been set Procedure :

1

After selecting the MDI mode, input “VFST=**”, and press the CYCLE START button. Set an appropriate value for “**” by referring to [3-1-2. Designating the Operation Mode].

2

Mount the tool for which automatic tool length offset should be executed in the spindle.

3

Execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode.

• In the tool length (Y-axis) direction CALL OO30 (VFST=Appropriate value) (PLI=Anticipated tool length) M02

• In the tool radius (Z-axis) direction CALL OO30 (VFST=Appropriate value) PZ=Anticipated tool radius M02

• Both in the tool length (Y-axis) direction and the tool radius (Z-axis) direction CALL OO30 (VFST=Appropriate value) PZ=Anticipated tool radius (PLI=Anticipated tool length) M02 When the program is executed, the tool is automatically brought into contact with the touch sensor and the cutter radius compensation data is calculated and stored in the CNC memory. The result of gauging can be checked by displaying the TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/CUTTER RADIUS COMPENSATION screen of the TOOL DATA screen. The obtained results are also displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

5249-E P-41 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-1-5. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle for Horizontal Tools Automatic tool breakage detection for horizontal tools is executed in the manner indicated below. [Supplement] Before executing automatic tool breakage detection for horizontal tools, make sure that the zero point of the horizontal tool touch sensor has been set. Procedure :

1

After selecting the MDI mode, input “VFST=**”, and press the CYCLE START button. Set an appropriate value for “**” by referring to [3-1-2. Designating the Operation Mode].

2

Mount the tool for which automatic tool breakage detection should be executed in the spindle.

3

Execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode.

• In the tool length (Y-axis) direction CALL OO30 PLE1=Tool breakage judgment value (VFST=Appropriate value) M02

• In the tool radius (Z-axis) direction CALL OO30 PLEZ=Tool breakage judgment value PZ=Anticipated tool radius (VFST=Appropriate value) M02

• Both in the tool length (Y-axis) direction and the tool radius (Z-axis) direction CALL OO30 PZ=Anticipated tool radius PLE1=Tool breakage judgment value (tool length direction) PLEZ=Tool breakage judgment value (tool radius direction) (VFST=Appropriate value) M02 ME61012R0700300370001

When the program is executed, the tool is automatically brought into contact with the touch sensor, and the tool length is calculated. The function compares the obtained tool length to the tool length offset data stored in the CNC memory and judges the tool has been broken if the difference is greater than the set tool breakage judgment value. The result of gauging is displayed at the GAUGING RESULTS screen. [Supplement] Before executing tool length offset/tool breakage detection for horizontal tools, index the swivel head to the following position. Vertical tool: Front position (M73) Horizontal tool: Right position (M76) All other supplements are the same as in the case of vertical tools.

5249-E P-42 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-2.

Operation for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection on B/C-axis Attachments, 90° Angular Attachments and Extension Attachments (Option) This subsection describes the functions of automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection for tools mounted in a B/C-axis attachment, 90° angular attachment, or extension attachment.

(PAC = 90°) (PAC = 180°)

(PAC = 0°) (PAC = 270°)

Z+ Y+

X+ ME61012R0700300380001

Fig.1-2 Relationship between PAC Angles and X, Y, Z Axes of 90° Angular Attachment

PAC = 90° PAC = 180°

PAC = 0° PAC = 270° PAB Z+ Y+

X+ ME61012R0700300380002

Fig.1-3 Relationship between PAC Angles and X, Y, Z Axes of B/C-axis Attachment

5249-E P-43 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION [Supplement] 1) To use an attachment, index the PAB to 0° or 90°. 2) Call the ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen and set the data displayed there on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen. The correspondence between the items displayed on the ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen and those on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen is indicated below.

ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen

ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen

Data for PAC = 0 PAB = 0

H* in the LOWER (G185) screen

Data for PAC = 0 PAB = 90

H* in the FRONT (G181) screen

Data for PAC = 90 PAB = 90

H* in the LEFT (G182) screen

Data for PAC = 180 PAB = 90

H* in the REAR (G183) screen

Data for PAC = 270 PAB = 90

H* in the RIGHT (G184) screen ME61012R0700300380003

H*: Attachment compensation numbers H1 to H8 If two B/C-axis attachments are used, set their data with separate compensation numbers.

5249-E P-44 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-2-1. Designating the Operation Mode Use system variable “VFST” to designate the basic operation modes for automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection. Since the system variable VFST is backed up in the CNC memory, it only has to be designated once: it does not have to be set each time the MSB of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle is called. VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance

VFST

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0 ME61012R0700300390001

Bit No.

Setting

Description

0

Automatic tool breakage detection cycle

1

Automatic tool length offset cycle

1

Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the tool radius direction.

1

Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the tool radius direction after the execution of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the tool length direction. To execute automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle only in the tool length direction, set “0” for both Bit 1 and Bit 2.

Bit 3

1

Does not move the X-axis when positioning a reference tool at the touch sensor position. Set “1” for Bit 3 for machine models such as MC-V in which the touch sensor is installed independently of the X-axis movement.

Bit 4

0

Always set “0”

Bit 5

0

Always set “0”.

0

Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for a vertical tool or a tool in the extension attachment or the B/ C-axis attachment (PAB = 0°).

1

Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for a tool in the 90° attachment or the B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 90°).

0

Designates the relative offset type.

1

Designates the absolute offset type.

Bit 0 Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 6

Bit 7

5249-E P-45 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-2-2. Command Format The command format used for calling the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for B/C-axis attachment, 90° attachment and extension attachment is indicated below.

CALL(OO30 PAXI=*........) PAT=* Conventional transfer variable ME61012R0700300400001

PAT: Attachment swivel compensation number (Setting range: 1 to 7) [Supplement] 1) The installation angle of the 90° angular attachment or the B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 90°) must be set to 270°. 2) The same sensor zero point is used for a vertical tool/extension attachment/B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 0°) and a 90° attachment/B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 90°). Set the sensor zero point so that gauging cycles can be executed without causing trouble for any attachment.

3-2-3. Designating the Attachment The type of attachment to be used is designated by the setting for VFST, PAXI and PAT as indicated below. Bit 6 of VFST

PAXI Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

PAT Command

Vertical spindle

0

0

0

0/1

None

Extension attachment B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 0°)

0

0

0

0/1

1 to 7

90° attachment B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 90°)

1

0/1

0/1

0

1 to 7

3-2-4. Movements of Tool in 90° Attachment/B/C-axis Attachment (PAB = 90°) When a tool is mounted in the 90° attachment or the B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 90°), the cycle is executed in the same manner as for a tool mounted in the horizontal spindle of MCM. In this case, however, the Z-axis lower limit position is determined taking into account the attachment swivel compensation amount. For details and supplemental information on the tool movements of a tool mounted in the 90° attachment or the B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 90°), refer to [3-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function for Horizontal Tools of MCM].

3-2-5. Setting the Tool Change Position If breakage of a tool is detected (PGO = 2) after the execution of a tool breakage detection cycle, the axes move to the tool change position. The tool change position must be determined so that positioning at the tool change position will not cause interference between the tool and a workpiece with any type of attachment (vertical tool, 90° attachment, extension attachment, B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 0°, 90°)).

5249-E P-46 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION [Supplement] If the machine is equipped with the B/C-axis attachment (PAB =90°), set “PGO=12” to do axis movements to the tool change position on detection of tool breakage. For details regarding PGO, refer to the item (11) PGO (P GO) in 6-3. “How to Use Variables.”

3-2-6. Setting the Z-axis Lower Limit Position To set the Z-axis lower limit position, add transfer variable PAT to the usual setting program. CALL OO32 PAT=* PAT:Attachment swivel compensation number (Setting range: 1 to 7)

3-2-7. Setting the Attachment Swivel Compensation Data To use the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function, the attachment swivel compensation data must be correctly set. Set the compensation data for the 90° attachment on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen (G181 to G184) and the data for the extension attachment on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen (G185).

3-2-8. Measuring the Attachment Swivel Compensation Data Measure the attachment swivel compensation data for each type of attachment and each attachment position by repeating the procedure indicated below and set the obtained data for the corresponding item (G181 to G185) on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen. Procedure :

1

Mount the reference tool to the spindle where no attachment is mounted and fix a micro-indicator at the center of the table.

2

Manually move the X-, Y- and Z-axis to the position where the micro-indicator reads “0”.

3

Select a desired zero point and set the zero offset data. Set “0” for the actual position data and take this position as the reference for the following operation.

4

Change the spindle tool to an attachment (90° attachment or extension attachment) and mount the reference to the attachment.

5

Carry out positioning so that the micro-indicator reads “0” and set the coordinate values at that position.

• 90° attachment Index the attachment to four positions, 0° (front), 90° (left), 180° (rear) and 270° (right), and carry out positioning at the individual attachment index positions.

• Extension attachment Since the extension attachment is installed at a fixed angle, carry out positioning at the preset angle.

5249-E P-47 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

6

Set the compensation data by displaying the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen.

• Extension attachment Set the coordinate values obtained in the operation in step 5) above on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen (G185).

• 90° attachment Calculate the compensation data for each index angle (PAC = 0, 90, 180, 270) based on the coordinate values obtained in step 5) and set the calculated compensation data for the corresponding setting item on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen (G181 to G184). To calculate the compensation data at each attachment index angle, refer to [3-2-9. Calculating the Compensation Data for a 90° Attachment]. The correspondence between the PAC angle and setting items is indicated below. PAC = 0: G181 (front) at the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen PAC = 90: G182 (left) at the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen PAC = 180: G183 (rear) at the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen PAC = 270: G184 (right) at the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen

Reference tool X

Z

X

Y Z ME61012R0700300460001

5249-E P-48 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION An example of attachment compensation numbers G181 (Front)

G182 (Left)

G183 (Rear)

G184 (Right)

G185 (Down)

H1

H1

H1

H1

-

-

-

-

-

-

H1

H1

H1

H1

-

T302 (attachment cover)

-

-

-

-

-

T303 (extension attachment)

-

-

-

-

H3

T301 (extension attachment)

-

-

-

-

H1

T302 (universal attachment)

-

-

-

-

-

T303 (special 90° attachment)

-

-

-

-

-

H4

H4

H4

H4

-

T305 (blank)

-

-

-

-

-

T306 (attachment cover)

-

-

-

-

-

(2 stations) T301 (90° attachment) T302 (attachment cover) (3 stations) T301 (90° attachment)

(6 stations)

T304 (90° attachment)

5249-E P-49 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-2-9. Calculating the Compensation Data for a 90° Attachment When a 90° attachment is used, it is necessary to find the attachment swivel compensation data using the coordinate values obtained in step 5) of [3-2-8. Measuring the Attachment Swivel Compensation Data]. The formula below are used to match the center of the vertical reference tool with the horizontal reference tool nose.

Vertical reference tool

Horizontal reference tool ME61012R0700300470001

In the explanation below, D1 represents the diameter of the reference tool mounted in the vertical spindle and D2 the diameter of the reference tool mounted in the horizontal spindle.

• PAC = 0° X' = X +

D1 2

D1

D2

Vertical reference tool

Y' = Y Z' = Z +

Z+

D2 2

X+ Horizontal reference tool ME61012R0700300470002

• PAC = 90° X' = X Y' = Y + Z' = Z +

Z+ D1 2

Vertical reference tool

D2 2

Y+

Horizontal reference tool ME61012R0700300470003

• PAC = 180° X' = X +

D1 2

Y' = Y Z' = Z +

X+

Z+

D2 2 ME61012R0700300470004

5249-E P-50 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

• PAC = 270° X' = X Y' = Y + Z' = Z +

D1 2

Z+

Y+

D2 2 ME61012R0700300470005

5249-E P-51 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-3.

Operation of Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection with 30° Angular Attachments (Option) (1) Automatic Tool Length Offset Function The automatic tool length offset function allows the measurement of tool length offset data for a tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment. Note that this function cannot be used to measure the cutter radius compensation data while a tool is mounted in the 30° angular attachment. (2) Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function The automatic tool breakage detection function allows detection of tool breakage or excessive wear of a tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment. As with the automatic tool length offset function, this automatic tool breakage function is unable check breakage of a tool in the radius direction.

3-3-1. Operation Flow of Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function Measuring the tool length offset value of the reference tool mounted in the vertical spindle ↓ Measuring the tool length offset value of the reference tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment ↓ Setting the relative offset data between the reference tools (VSTOH[20]) ↓ Setting the Z-axis lower limit position data ↓ Setting the zero point of the 30° angular attachment touch sensor ↓ Measuring the tool length offset data for a tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment . . . Check the breakage of a tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment . . .

5249-E P-52 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-3-2. Relative Offset Data between Reference Tools (VSTOH [20]) To use the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function with an angular attachment other than a 90° angular attachment(30°, 45°, 60°), a special referent tool, called reference tool B, is used to measure the attachment compensation data. Differing from the conventionally used reference tool - called reference tool A - which has a cylindrical shape, reference tool B has a ball-shaped nose. When setting the touch sensor zero point, the sensor zero point in the vertical and horizontal directions is usually determined by the length of reference tool A, which is determined by the specification code (Bit 7 of specification code No. 24). When setting the angular attachment touch sensor zero point, however, reference tool B is used to set the zero point. This means the accurate length of the reference tool must be known beforehand. The value used to calculate the length of reference tool B based on the length of reference tool A is called the “relative offset data between reference tools”. If a value is set for PLI, explained in [3-3-5. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point], setting the “relative offset data between reference tools” is not necessary. The relative offset data between reference tools can be obtained easily by following the procedure indicated below. Procedure :

1

Mount reference tool B in the vertical spindle and read the Z-axis coordinate value by bringing it into contact with the reference block. Assume the read Z-axis coordinate value to be “B”.

2

Mount reference tool A in the vertical spindle and read the Z-axis coordinate value by bringing it into contact with the reference block. Assume the read Z-axis coordinate value to be “A”.

3

Calculate the relative offset data between reference tools using the following formula.

Relative offset data between reference tools = Length of reference tool B (coordinate value B) - Length of reference tool A (coordinate value A) ME61012R0700300500001

5249-E P-53 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-3-3. Designating the Operation Mode (VFST) Use system variable “VFST” to designate the basic operation modes for automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection operation for a 30° angular attachment. VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance.

VFST

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0 ME61012R0700300510001

Bit No.

Setting

Description

0

Automatic tool breakage detection cycle

1

Automatic tool length offset cycle

Bit 1

0

Always set “0”.

Bit 2

0

Always set “0”.

0

Moves the X-axis when positioning a reference tool at the touch sensor position. If this setting is made although the zero point of the touch sensor and the X-axis has not been set, this will cause very dangerous situation since positioning is made to the machine zero point in this case.

1

Does not move the X-axis when positioning a reference tool at the touch sensor position.

Bit 4

0

Always set “0”.

Bit 5

0

Always set “0”.

Bit 6

0

Always set “0”.

0

Designates the relative offset type.

1

Designates the absolute offset type.

Bit 0

Bit 3

Bit 7

[Supplement] Pay attention to the setting of system variable VFST since it is also used for the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection functions for a vertical tool, B/C-axis attachment, extension attachment and 90° angular attachment. Although the operation mode is backed up in the CNC memory, you are recommended to set the mode for each execution of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection functions since the setting is also used for other applications as described above.

5249-E P-54 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-3-4. Setting the Z-axis Lower Limit Position (OO32) When the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle is executed, a tool must be brought into contact with the touch sensor at the right angle. Therefore, the tool is positioned in the direction in which the touch sensor is at the right angle before executing these cycles with the 30° angular attachment tool. The point where the tool is positioned is called the “approach start position”. The position where the Y-axis should be retracted to avoid interference with a workpiece before positioning to the approach start position is called the Z-axis lower limit position. For details on the approach start position, refer to [3-3-5. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point]. The Z-axis lower limit position is also used as the spindle retraction position for sensor unit advance/ retract operation for models such as MCR-B II in which the sensor unit can interfere with the spindle during sensor unit advance/retract operation. Note that the set Z-axis lower limit position is used for the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function of the MCM horizontal tool and the B/C-axis attachment, 90° angular attachment and 45° angular attachment. Therefore, if these specifications are used in combination, set the Z-axis lower limit position with care. Procedure :

1

Move the Y-axis to the position where the Z-axis lower limit position is to be set. In this operation, the Z- and X-axis may be at any position.

2

At this position, execute the following program after selecting the MDI or automatic mode. CALLOO32 When this program is executed, the axes do not move. After the execution of the program, the actual position of the Z-axis is stored in system work coordinate system No. 9 as the Z-axis lower limit position. The set value can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

5249-E P-55 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-3-5. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point Before executing the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function using the 30° angular attachment, it is necessary to set the zero point of the touch sensor. Follow the procedure indicated below to set the touch sensor zero point. Procedure :

1

Set the VFST (operation mode) in the MDI or automatic mode. For this operation, only bit 7 (incremental/absolute offset type selection) has significance. For other bits “0” may be set.

2

Execute M144 (sensor unit advance) in the MDI or automatic mode. Pay attention to the execution of M144 since the sensor unit may interfere with the spindle on some models.

3

Mount reference tool B to the 30° angular attachment and orient the attachment.

4

Position the tool approximately 10 mm away from the touch sensor so that it will contact the touch sensor at the right angle when it is moved in the tool length direction.

5

Select the MDI or automatic mode and execute the following program. CALL OO34 PAXI=#07H After the execution of the program above, the touch sensor zero point coordinate values (X, Y, Z) are set using the designation for PAXI. For details of PAXI designation, refer to [3-3-11. Variables]. Note the relative offset data between the reference tools (VSTOH[20]) is used since PLI is not designated.

[Supplement] If PLI is designated, the value to be transferred differs depending on the tool length offset type (VFST setting). For the absolute offset type, set the length of reference tool B from the gauge line to PLI. In the case of the relative offset type, set the relative length of reference tool B in reference to reference tool A. For details on the relative offset data between the reference tools, refer to [3-3-2. Relative Offset Data between Reference Tools (VSTOH [20])]. How the reference tool moves during the execution of the program is explained in [3-3-6. Reference Tool Movements during Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting]. The result is fed back as the zero point data to system work coordinate system No. 13. The set zero point data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

5249-E P-56 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-3-6. Reference Tool Movements during Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting During the execution of the touch sensor zero point setting for a 30° angular attachment, the reference tool moves as indicated below.

Machine operation (1) The reference tool moves to the approach start point (Y- and Z-axis). The approach start point is calculated on a line extended from the 30° angular attachment touch sensor in the tool length direction. The following two positions are calculated on the extended line: the position where the Z-axis is at the travel limit in the positive direction and the position where the Y-axis is at the lower end limit position of the Z-axis. Of these two positions, the position that is closer to the touch sensor is taken as the approach start point. Since the sensor position has not been measured at the start of touch sensor zero point setting, the position 10 mm ahead of the point where the tool was moved in step 4) of the operation described in [3-3-5. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point] is regarded as the 30° angular attachment touch sensor position. (2) The spindle is oriented. (3) The reference tool moves the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (4) The sensor unit retracts. (5) The sensor unit advances. (6) The reference tool moves to the approach start point (Y-axis). (7) The reference tool is brought into contact with the sensor (Z- and Y-axis). (8) The reference tool moves to the approach start point (Z- and Y-axis). (9) The reference tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (If PRET ≠ 1) (10) The sensor unit retracts. (If PRET ≠ 1) This completes the setting of the touch sensor zero point.

5249-E P-57 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-3-7. Automatic Tool Length Offset Function To measure the tool length of the tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment, follow the procedure indicated below. [Supplement] Before executing automatic tool length offset, make sure that the zero point of the touch sensor has been set. Procedure :

1

Set the VFST (operation mode) in the MDI or automatic mode. For this operation, only the following bits have significance. For other bits “0” may be set.

• Bit 7 (incremental/absolute offset type selection) Set the same value as set in the touch sensor zero point setting operation.

• Bit 3 (X-axis positioning valid/invalid) “0” (X-axis positioning valid) may be set only when PAXI was used to set the zero point in the touch sensor zero point setting operation. If “0” is set although the X-axis zero point has not been set, it could be dangerous since the X-axis is positioned to the machine zero point.

• Bit 0 (automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection selection) Since the operation to be performed is “automatic tool length offset”, “1” should be set here.

2

Mount the tool for which automatic tool length offset is to be executed in the 30° angular attachment and set the angular attachment direction. If the tool is mounted manually, the PH parameter must be specified since the tool number is unknown. The obtained offset data is set as the tool length offset data of the tool number transferred by the PH parameter. The PH parameter does not have to be designated if the tool is mounted using an M code command.

3

Execute the following program after selecting the MDI or automatic mode. CALL OO34 (PLI=Anticipated tool length) (PH=Tool number) When the program is executed, the tool length is measured. The measured tool length data is set as the tool length offset data of the tool number transferred by PH. If no PH parameter is specified, the data is set as the tool length offset data of the active tool number.

[Supplement] If an anticipated tool length is not set, the minimum tool length is used as the anticipated tool length. Therefore, the minimum tool length must be set beforehand for optional parameter (long word) No. 43, as an absolute value in mm units. If the setting for this parameter is inappropriate, the 30° angular attachment may interfere with the sensor unit. Set a value 10 mm longer than the minimum measurable length (determined by the machine specification) as the minimum tool length. If the minimum measurable length is set as the minimum tool length, the 30° angular attachment will strike the sensor unit if the tool fails to contact the sensor.

5249-E P-58 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

Machine operation During the execution of automatic tool length offset for the tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment, the tool moves as indicated below. (1) The Z-axis moves up 1 mm from the actual position or to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. If positioning of the X-axis is valid, X-axis positioning is executed. (2) The spindle is oriented. (3) The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (4) The sensor unit advances. (5) The tool moves to the approach start point (Z-, Y-axis). If the maximum tool length designation is valid, it moves to the set maximum tool length position (Z-, Y-axis). (6) The tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor (Z-, Y-axis). (7) The tool moves to the approach start point (Z-, Y-axis). (8) The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (If PRET ≠ 1) (9) The sensor unit retracts. (If PRET ≠ 1)

3-3-8. Tool Change Position Setting Function When the automatic tool breakage detection cycle detects a tool has been broken, the broken tool can be automatically returned to the magazine by using a subprogram. When a tool is returned to the magazine, it may interfere with a workpiece, depending on the shape of the workpiece. To avoid this, it is necessary to retract the workpiece. The tool change position setting function is used to set the tool change position for this purpose. The spindle is moved to the tool change position by X- and Y-axis movements. Note that whether or not the X-axis moves is determined by the setting for bit 3 of VFST. The X-axis moves only when “0” is set for this bit. Procedure :

1

Move the spindle to the desired tool change position on the Y-axis. If the setting that enables X-axis movements is made, move the X-axis also.

2

Execute the following program after selecting the MDI or automatic mode. CALL OO31 The axes will not move at all even when a program is executed. After the execution of the program, the actual position is set for system work coordinate system No. 2 as the tool change position. The set tool change position data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

5249-E P-59 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-3-9. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Automatic tool breakage detection is executed in the manner indicated below for the tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment. [Supplement] Before executing automatic tool breakage detection, make sure that the zero point of the touch sensor has been set. Procedure :

1

Set the VFST (operation mode) in the MDI or automatic mode. For this operation, only the following bits have significance. For other bits “0” may be set.

• Bit 7 (incremental/absolute offset type selection) Set the same value as set in the touch sensor zero point setting operation.

• Bit 3 (X-axis positioning valid/invalid) “0” (X-axis positioning valid) may be set only when PAXI was used to set the zero point in the touch sensor zero point setting operation. If “0” is set although the X-axis zero point has not been set, it could be dangerous since the X-axis is positioned to the machine zero point.

• Bit 0 (automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection selection) Since the operation to be performed is “automatic tool length offset”, “0” should be set here.

2

Mount the tool for which automatic tool length offset is to be executed in the 30° angular attachment and set the angular attachment direction. If the tool is mounted manually, the PH parameter must be specified since the tool number is unknown. The function compares the measured data to the tool length offset data of the tool offset number transferred by PH to judge breakage of the tool. The PH parameter does not have to be designated if the tool is mounted using an M code command.

3

Execute the following program after selecting the MDI or automatic mode.

CALL OO34 (PLE1=Tool breakage judgement value) (PLE2=Offset value update permissible amount) (PGO=Processing at the occurrence of tool breakage) ME61012R0700300570001

• Tool breakage judgment value (PLE1) If no value is set for PLE1, the judgment value is taken to be 0.1 mm. The tool is judged to be broken if the absolute value of the difference between the preset tool length and the measured tool length is larger than the judgment value set for PLE1.

• Offset value update permissible amount (PLE2) When a value is set for PLE2, the present tool length offset data is updated to the measured tool length assuming that the absolute value of the difference between the preset tool length and the measured tool length is smaller than the judgment value set for PLE1 and larger than the offset value update permissible amount.

5249-E P-60 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

• Processing on occurrence of tool breakage (PGO) If a tool is detected to have been broken while no value is set for PGO, an alarm occurs and the tool breakage detection cycle ends without returning the broken tool to the magazine. If a value is set for PGO to select the processing on occurrence of tool breakage, the specified processing is executed without generating an alarm when tool breakage is detected. PGO = 1: The tool is returned to the magazine without movement to the tool change position. PGO = 2: The tool is returned after positioning to the tool change position. PGO = 3: The tool is not returned to the magazine. Since no alarm occurs if a value is set for PGO, it is necessary to judge tool breakage in a program. For details on judgment of tool breakage in a program, refer to [3-3-10. Judgment for Tool Breakage].

Machine Operation During the execution of the automatic tool breakage detection for the tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment, the tool moves as indicated below. (1) The Z-axis moves up 1 mm from the actual position or to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. If positioning of the X-axis is valid, X-axis positioning is executed. (2) The spindle is oriented. (3) The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (4) The sensor unit advances. (5) The tool moves to the approach start point (Z-, Y-axis). If the maximum tool length designation is valid, it moves to the set maximum tool length position (Z-, Y-axis). (6) The tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor (Z-, Y-axis). (7) The tool is assessed for breakage. (8) The tool moves to the approach start point (Z-, Y-axis). (9) The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (If PRET ≠ 1) (10) The sensor unit retracts. (If PRET ≠ 1) The processing after the detection of tool breakage depends on the setting for PGO.

• PGO = 1: The tool is returned to the magazine without movement to the tool change position.

• PGO = 2: The tool is returned after positioning of the X- and Y-axis to the tool change position.

5249-E P-61 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-3-10. Judgment for Tool Breakage When a spare tool is selected on detection of tool breakage, the machine is not stopped by an alarm even if the breakage of a tool is detected. Therefore, it is necessary to judge whether or not a tool is broken at the end of the automatic tool breakage detection cycle and branch a part program according to the result of the judgment.

• System variable VOK1 VOK1 = 0: The tool is not broken. VOK1 ≠ 0: The tool is broken. System variable VOK1 stores the result of the tool breakage detection cycle executed immediately before its designation.

• System variable VOK2 System variable VOK2 is also used for storing the result of the tool breakage detection cycle. Differing from system variable VOK1, it indicates the occurrence of tool breakage in all detection cycles executed after it has been reset to 0 (VOK2 = 0). If tool breakage is detected even once in these cycles, the value of VOK2 is not 0 (VOK2 ≠ 0).

• VOK1 and VOK2 are not reset by resetting the CNC. [Supplement] The tool number of the tool which has been judged to be broken in a tool breakage detection cycle is registered as a broken tool by the tool management function. To use the same tool number after replacing the broken tool with a new one, it is necessary to reset the registered broken tool status. For the procedure for resetting this status, refer to Tool Management Function in the special specifications of the Operation Manual.

5249-E P-62 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-3-11. Variables Variables used in the subroutines that execute automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection for the 30° angular attachment. PH:

Tool offset number Used to designate a tool offset number if a tool offset number different from the tool number of the active tool is used for automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection.

PAXI:

One byte (8 bits) transfer variable used when the sensor zero point is set. Each bit has the following meaning.

PAXI

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0 ME61012R0700300590001

Bit No.

Description

Bit 0

Sets the X-axis zero point.

Bit 1

Sets the Y-axis zero point.

Bit 2

Sets the Z-axis zero point.

Bit 3

Always set “0”.

Bit 4

Always set “0”.

Bit 5

Always set “0”.

Bit 6

Always set “0”.

Bit 7

Always set “0”.

VFST:

Designates the operation mode. For details refer to [3-3-3. Designating the Operation Mode (VFST)].

PLE1:

Designates the tool breakage judgment value. For details refer to [3-3-9. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection].

PLE2:

Designates the offset value update permissible amount. For details, refer to [3-3-9. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection].

PLI:

Designates the length of the reference tool when setting the touch sensor zero point. Designates the anticipated tool length when measuring the tool length.

PRS:

This is an RS command for multi-point spindle orientation operation.

PRET:

Touch sensor retraction preventive command This is a function to prevent touch sensor retraction at the end of the touch sensor zero point setting, automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection.

PGO:

Designates the processing to be followed on detection of tool breakage. For details, refer to [3-3-9. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection].

PX:

Designates the displacement in the X-axis direction during positioning to the sensor position.

5249-E P-63 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-4.

Operation of Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection with 45° Angular Attachments (Option) (1) Automatic Tool Length Offset Function The automatic tool length offset function allows the measurement of tool length offset data for a tool mounted in the 45° angular attachment. Note that this function cannot be used to measure the cutter radius compensation data while a tool is mounted in the 45° angular attachment. (2) Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function The automatic tool breakage detection function allows detection of tool breakage or excessive wear of a tool mounted in the 45° angular attachment. As with the automatic tool length offset function, this automatic tool breakage function is unable check breakage of a tool in the radius direction.

3-4-1. Operation Flow of Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function Measuring the tool length offset value of the reference tool mounted in the vertical spindle ↓ Measuring the tool length offset value of the reference tool mounted in the 45° angular attachment ↓ Setting the relative offset data between the reference tools (VSTOH[20]) ↓ Setting the Z-axis lower limit position data ↓ Setting the zero point of the 45° angular attachment touch sensor ↓ Measuring the tool length offset data for a tool mounted in the 45° angular attachment . . . Check the breakage of a tool mounted in the 45° angular attachment . . .

5249-E P-64 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-4-2. Relative Offset Data between Reference Tools (VSTOH[20]) To use the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function with an angular attachment other than a 90° angular attachment (30°, 45°, 60°), a special referent tool, called reference tool B, is used to measure the attachment compensation data. Differing from the conventionally used reference tool - called reference tool A - which has a cylindrical shape, reference tool B has a ball-shaped nose. When setting the touch sensor zero point, the sensor zero point in the vertical and horizontal directions is usually determined by the length of reference tool A, which is determined by the specification code (Bit 7 of specification code No. 24). When setting the angular attachment touch sensor zero point, however, reference tool B is used to set the zero point. This means the accurate length of the reference tool must be known beforehand. The value used to calculate the length of reference tool B based on the length of reference tool A is called the “relative offset data between reference tools”. If a value is set for PLI, explained in [3-4-5. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point], setting the “relative offset data between reference tools” is not necessary. The relative offset data between reference tools can be obtained easily by following the procedure indicated below. Procedure :

1

Mount reference tool B in the vertical spindle and read the Z-axis coordinate value by bringing it into contact with the reference block. Assume the read Z-axis coordinate value to be “B”.

2

Mount reference tool A in the vertical spindle and read the Z-axis coordinate value by bringing it into contact with the reference block. Assume the read Z-axis coordinate value to be “A”.

3

Calculate the relative offset data between reference tools using the following formula.

Relative offset data between reference tools = Length of reference tool B (coordinate value B) - Length of reference tool A (coordinate value A) ME61012R0700300620001

5249-E P-65 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-4-3. Designating the Operation Mode (VFST) Use system variable “VFST” to designate the basic operation modes for automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection operation for a 45° angular attachment. VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance.

VFST

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0 ME61012R0700300630001

Bit No.

Setting

Description

0

Automatic tool breakage detection cycle

1

Automatic tool length offset cycle

Bit 1

0

Always set “0”.

Bit 2

0

Always set “0”.

0

Moves the X-axis when positioning a reference tool at the touch sensor position. If this setting is made although the zero point of the touch sensor and the X-axis has not been set, this will cause very dangerous situation since positioning is made to the machine zero point in this case.

1

Does not move the X-axis when positioning a reference tool at the touch sensor position.

Bit 4

0

Always set “0”.

Bit 5

0

Always set “0”.

Bit 6

0

Always set “0”.

0

Designates the relative offset type.

1

Designates the absolute offset type.

Bit 0

Bit 3

Bit 7

[Supplement] Pay attention to the setting of system variable VFST since it is also used for the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection functions for a vertical tool, B/C-axis attachment, extension attachment and 90° angular attachment. Although the operation mode is backed up in the CNC memory, you are recommended to set the mode for each execution of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection functions since the setting is also used for other applications as described above.

5249-E P-66 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-4-4. Setting the Z-axis Lower Limit Position (OO32) When the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle is executed, a tool must be brought into contact with the touch sensor at the right angle. Therefore, the tool is positioned in the direction in which the touch sensor is at the right angle before executing these cycles with the 45° angular attachment tool. The point where the tool is positioned is called the “approach start position”. The position where the Y-axis should be retracted to avoid interference with a workpiece before positioning to the approach start position is called the Z-axis lower limit position. For details on the approach start position, refer to [3-4-5. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point]. The Z-axis lower limit position is also used as the spindle retraction position for sensor unit advance/ retract operation for models such as MCR-B II in which the sensor unit can interfere with the spindle during sensor unit advance/retract operation. Note that the set Z-axis lower limit position is used for the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function of the MCM horizontal tool and the B/C-axis attachment, 90° angular attachment and 30° angular attachment. Therefore, if these specifications are used in combination, set the Z-axis lower limit position with care. Procedure :

1

Move the Y-axis to the position where the Z-axis lower limit position is to be set. In this operation, the Z- and X-axis may be at any position.

2

At this position, execute the following program after selecting the MDI or automatic mode. CALLOO32 When this program is executed, the axes do not move. After the execution of the program, the actual position of the Z-axis is stored in system work coordinate system No. 9 as the Z-axis lower limit position. The set value can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

5249-E P-67 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-4-5. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point Before executing the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function using the 45° angular attachment, it is necessary to set the zero point of the touch sensor. Follow the procedure indicated below to set the touch sensor zero point. Procedure :

1

Set the VFST (operation mode) in the MDI or automatic mode. For this operation, only bit 7 (incremental/absolute offset type selection) has significance. For other bits “0” may be set.

2

Execute M144 (sensor unit advance) in the MDI or automatic mode. Pay attention to the execution of M144 since the sensor unit may interfere with the spindle on some models.

3

Mount reference tool B to the 45° angular attachment and orient the attachment.

4

Position the tool approximately 10 mm away from the touch sensor so that it will contact the touch sensor at the right angle when it is moved in the tool length direction.

5

Select the MDI or automatic mode and execute the following program. CALL OO87 PAXI=#07H After the execution of the program above, the touch sensor zero point coordinate values (X, Y, Z) are set using the designation for PAXI. For details of PAXI designation, refer to [3-4-11. Variables]. Note the relative offset data between the reference tools (VSTOH[20]) is used since PLI is not designated.

[Supplement] If PLI is designated, the value to be transferred differs depending on the tool length offset type (VFST setting). For the absolute offset type, set the length of reference tool B from the gauge line to PLI. In the case of the relative offset type, set the relative length of reference tool B in reference to reference tool A. For details on the relative offset data between the reference tools, refer to [3-4-2. Relative Offset Data between Reference Tools (VSTOH [20])]. How the reference tool moves during the execution of the program is explained in [3-4-6. Reference Tool Movements during Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting]. The result is fed back as the zero point data to system work coordinate system No. 21. The set zero point data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

5249-E P-68 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-4-6. Reference Tool Movements during Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting During the execution of the touch sensor zero point setting for a 45° angular attachment, the reference tool moves as indicated below.

Machine operation (1) The reference tool moves to the approach start point (Y- and Z-axis). The approach start point is calculated on a line extended from the 45° angular attachment touch sensor in the tool length direction. The following two positions are calculated on the extended line: the position where the Z-axis is at the travel limit in the positive direction and the position where the Y-axis is at the lower end limit position of the Z-axis. Of these two positions, the position that is closer to the touch sensor is taken as the approach start point. Since the sensor position has not been measured at the start of touch sensor zero point setting, the position 10 mm ahead of the point where the tool was moved in step 4) of the operation described in [3-4-5. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point] is regarded as the 45° angular attachment touch sensor position. (2) The spindle is oriented. (3) The reference tool moves the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (4) The sensor unit retracts. (5) The sensor unit advances. (6) The reference tool moves to the approach start point (Y-axis). (7) The reference tool is brought into contact with the sensor (Z- and Y-axis). (8) The reference tool moves to the approach start point (Z- and Y-axis). (9) The reference tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (If PRET ≠ 1) (10) The sensor unit retracts. (If PRET ≠ 1) This completes the setting of the touch sensor zero point.

5249-E P-69 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-4-7. Automatic Tool Length Offset Function To measure the tool length of the tool mounted in the 45° angular attachment, follow the procedure indicated below. [Supplement] Before executing automatic tool length offset, make sure that the zero point of the touch sensor has been set. Procedure :

1

Set the VFST (operation mode) in the MDI or automatic mode. For this operation, only the following bits have significance. For other bits “0” may be set.

• Bit 7 (incremental/absolute offset type selection) Set the same value as set in the touch sensor zero point setting operation.

• Bit 3 (X-axis positioning valid/invalid) “0” (X-axis positioning valid) may be set only when PAXI was used to set the zero point in the touch sensor zero point setting operation. If “0” is set although the X-axis zero point has not been set, it could be dangerous since the X-axis is positioned to the machine zero point.

• Bit 0 (automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection selection) Since the operation to be performed is “automatic tool length offset”, “1” should be set here.

2

Mount the tool for which automatic tool length offset is to be executed in the 45° angular attachment and set the angular attachment direction. If the tool is mounted manually, the PH parameter must be specified since the tool number is unknown. The obtained offset data is set as the tool length offset data of the tool number transferred by the PH parameter. The PH parameter does not have to be designated if the tool is mounted using an M code command.

3

Execute the following program after selecting the MDI or automatic mode. CALL OO87 (PLI=Anticipated tool length) (PH=Tool number) When the program is executed, the tool length is measured. The measured tool length data is set as the tool length offset data of the tool number transferred by PH. If no PH parameter is specified, the data is set as the tool length offset data of the active tool number.

[Supplement] If an anticipated tool length is not set, the minimum tool length is used as the anticipated tool length. Therefore, the minimum tool length must be set beforehand for optional parameter (long word) No. 43, as an absolute value in mm units. If the setting for this parameter is inappropriate, the 45° angular attachment may interfere with the sensor unit. Set a value 10 mm longer than the minimum measurable length (determined by the machine specification) as the minimum tool length. If the minimum measurable length is set as the minimum tool length, the 45° angular attachment will strike the sensor unit if the tool fails to contact the sensor.

5249-E P-70 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

Machine operation During the execution of automatic tool length offset for the tool mounted in the 45° angular attachment, the tool moves as indicated below. (1) The Z-axis moves up 1 mm from the actual position or to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. If positioning of the X-axis is valid, X-axis positioning is executed. (2) The spindle is oriented. (3) The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (4) The sensor unit advances. (5) The tool moves to the approach start point (Z-, Y-axis). If the maximum tool length designation is valid, it moves to the set maximum tool length position (Z-, Y-axis). (6) The tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor (Z-, Y-axis). (7) The tool moves to the approach start point (Z-, Y-axis). (8) The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (If PRET ≠ 1) (9) The sensor unit retracts. (If PRET ≠ 1)

3-4-8. Tool Change Position Setting Function When the automatic tool breakage detection cycle detects a tool has been broken, the broken tool can be automatically returned to the magazine by using a subprogram. When a tool is returned to the magazine, it may interfere with a workpiece, depending on the shape of the workpiece. To avoid this, it is necessary to retract the workpiece. The tool change position setting function is used to set the tool change position for this purpose. The spindle is moved to the tool change position by X- and Y-axis movements. Note that whether or not the X-axis moves is determined by the setting for bit 3 of VFST. The X-axis moves only when “0” is set for this bit. Procedure :

1

Move the spindle to the desired tool change position on the Y-axis. If the setting that enables X-axis movements is made, move the X-axis also.

2

Execute the following program after selecting the MDI or automatic mode. CALL OO31 The axes will not move at all even when a program is executed. After the execution of the program, the actual position is set for system work coordinate system No. 2 as the tool change position. The set tool change position data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

5249-E P-71 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-4-9. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Automatic tool breakage detection is executed in the manner indicated below for the tool mounted in the 45° angular attachment. [Supplement] Before executing automatic tool breakage detection, make sure that the zero point of the touch sensor has been set. Procedure :

1

Set the VFST (operation mode) in the MDI or automatic mode. For this operation, only the following bits have significance. For other bits “0” may be set.

• Bit 7 (incremental/absolute offset type selection) Set the same value as set in the touch sensor zero point setting operation.

• Bit 3 (X-axis positioning valid/invalid) “0” (X-axis positioning valid) may be set only when PAXI was used to set the zero point in the touch sensor zero point setting operation. If “0” is set although the X-axis zero point has not been set, it could be dangerous since the X-axis is positioned to the machine zero point.

• Bit 0 (automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection selection) Since the operation to be performed is “automatic tool length offset”, “0” should be set here.

2

Mount the tool for which automatic tool length offset is to be executed in the 45° angular attachment and set the angular attachment direction. If the tool is mounted manually, the PH parameter must be specified since the tool number is unknown. The function compares the measured data to the tool length offset data of the tool offset number transferred by PH to judge breakage of the tool. The PH parameter does not have to be designated if the tool is mounted using an M code command.

3

Execute the following program after selecting the MDI or automatic mode.

CALL OO87 (PLE1=Tool breakage judgement value) (PLE2=Offset value update permissible amount) (PGO=Processing at the occurrence of tool breakage) ME61012R0700300690001

• Tool breakage judgment value (PLE1) If no value is set for PLE1, the judgment value is taken to be 0.1 mm. The tool is judged to be broken if the absolute value of the difference between the preset tool length and the measured tool length is larger than the judgment value set for PLE1.

• Offset value update permissible amount (PLE2) When a value is set for PLE2, the present tool length offset data is updated to the measured tool length assuming that the absolute value of the difference between the preset tool length and the measured tool length is smaller than the judgment value set for PLE1 and larger than the offset value update permissible amount.

5249-E P-72 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

• Processing on occurrence of tool breakage (PGO) If a tool is detected to have been broken while no value is set for PGO, an alarm occurs and the tool breakage detection cycle ends without returning the broken tool to the magazine. If a value is set for PGO to select the processing on occurrence of tool breakage, the specified processing is executed without generating an alarm when tool breakage is detected. PGO = 1: The tool is returned to the magazine without movement to the tool change position. PGO = 2: The tool is returned after positioning to the tool change position. PGO = 3: The tool is not returned to the magazine. Since no alarm occurs if a value is set for PGO, it is necessary to judge tool breakage in a program. For details on judgment of tool breakage in a program, refer to [3-4-10. Judgment for Tool Breakage].

Machine Operation During the execution of the automatic tool breakage detection for the tool mounted in the 45° angular attachment, the tool moves as indicated below. (1) The Z-axis moves up 1 mm from the actual position or to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. If positioning of the X-axis is valid, X-axis positioning is executed. (2) The spindle is oriented. (3) The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (4) The sensor unit advances. (5) The tool moves to the approach start point (Z-, Y-axis). If the maximum tool length designation is valid, it moves to the set maximum tool length position (Z-, Y-axis). (6) The tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor (Z-, Y-axis). (7) The tool is assessed for breakage. (8) The tool moves to the approach start point (Z-, Y-axis). (9) The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (If PRET ≠ 1) (10) The sensor unit retracts. (If PRET ≠ 1) The processing after the detection of tool breakage depends on the setting for PGO.

• PGO = 1: The tool is returned to the magazine without movement to the tool change position.

• PGO = 2: The tool is returned after positioning of the X- and Y-axis to the tool change position.

5249-E P-73 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-4-10. Judgment for Tool Breakage When a spare tool is selected on detection of tool breakage, the machine is not stopped by an alarm even if the breakage of a tool is detected. Therefore, it is necessary to judge whether or not a tool is broken at the end of the automatic tool breakage detection cycle and branch a part program according to the result of the judgment.

• System variable VOK1 VOK1 = 0: The tool is not broken. VOK1 ≠ 0: The tool is broken. System variable VOK1 stores the result of the tool breakage detection cycle executed immediately before its designation.

• System variable VOK2 System variable VOK2 is also used for storing the result of the tool breakage detection cycle. Differing from system variable VOK1, it indicates the occurrence of tool breakage in all detection cycles executed after it has been reset to 0 (VOK2 = 0). If tool breakage is detected even once in these cycles, the value of VOK2 is not 0 (VOK2 ≠ 0).

• VOK1 and VOK2 are not reset by resetting the CNC. [Supplement] The tool number of the tool which has been judged to be broken in a tool breakage detection cycle is registered as a broken tool by the tool management function. To use the same tool number after replacing the broken tool with a new one, it is necessary to reset the registered broken tool status. For the procedure for resetting this status, refer to Tool Management Function in the special specifications of the Operation Manual.

5249-E P-74 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

3-4-11. Variables Variables used in the subroutines that execute automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection for the 45° angular attachment. PH:

Tool offset number Used to designate a tool offset number if a tool offset number different from the tool number of the active tool is used for automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection.

PAXI:

One byte (8 bits) transfer variable used when the sensor zero point is set. Each bit has the following meaning.

PAXI

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0 ME61012R0700300710001

Bit No.

Description

Bit 0

Sets the X-axis zero point.

Bit 1

Sets the Y-axis zero point.

Bit 2

Sets the Z-axis zero point.

Bit 3

Always set “0”.

Bit 4

Always set “0”.

Bit 5

Always set “0”.

Bit 6

Always set “0”.

Bit 7

Always set “0”.

VFST:

Designates the operation mode. For details refer to [3-4-3. Designating the Operation Mode (VFST)].

PLE1:

Designates the tool breakage judgment value. For details refer to [3-4-9. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection].

PLE2:

Designates the offset value update permissible amount. For details, refer to [3-4-9. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection].

PLI:

Designates the length of the reference tool when setting the touch sensor zero point. Designates the anticipated tool length when measuring the tool length.

PRS:

This is an RS command for multi-point spindle orientation operation.

PRET:

Touch sensor retraction preventive command This is a function to prevent touch sensor retraction at the end of the touch sensor zero point setting, automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection.

PGO:

Designates the processing to be followed on detection of tool breakage. For details, refer to [3-4-9. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection].

PX:

Designates the displacement in the X-axis direction during positioning to the sensor position.

5249-E P-75 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

4.

Y-axis Escape Position (MCM-B/MCR-B II/MCR-A/VH-40) During execution of automatic tool length offset (cutter radius compensation) or tool breakage detection on the vertical or horizontal spindle of MCM-B/MCR-B II/MCR-A, the tool may interfere with the touch sensor unit cover. With VH-40, execution of automatic tool length offset or tool breakage detection may also cause interference between the table and the touch sensor unit. In order to prevent such interference, the Y-axis escape cycle should be executed after setting the Yaxis escape position.

4-1.

Setting the Y-axis Escape Position Setting the Y-axis Escape Position for the Vertical Spindle Set the Y-axis escape position for the vertical spindle (includes VH-40) by following the procedure indicated below. Procedure :

1

Move the Y-axis to the desired Y-axis escape position. In this operation, the X- and Z-axis may be at any position.

2

At this position, execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode. CALL OO33 M02 When this program is executed, the axes do not move. After the execution of the program, the actual position of the Y-axis is stored in system work coordinate system No. 12 as the Y-axis escape position. The set value can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

Setting the Y-axis Escape Position for the Horizontal Spindle Set the Y-axis escape position for the vertical spindle by following the procedure indicated below. Procedure :

1

Move the Y-axis to the desired Y-axis escape position. In this operation, the X- and Z-axis may be at any position.

2

At this position, execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode. CALL OO32 M02 When this program is executed, the axes do not move. After the execution of the program, the actual position of the Y-axis is stored in system work coordinate system No. 9 as the Y-axis escape position. The set value can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

5249-E P-76 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION [Supplement] 1) Since system work coordinate systems No. 9 and No. 12 are used exclusively for automatic tool length offset (cutter radius compensation) and automatic tool breakage detection functions, they cannot normally be set or referenced. 2) Set the Y-axis escape position at a position where interference between the tool and the touch sensor unit cover will not occur.

4-2.

Tool Movements during Automatic Tool Length Offset (Cutter Radius Compensation)/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle During automatic tool length offset (cutter radius compensation)/automatic tool breakage detection, the tool moves as indicated below.

Machine operation in the case of vertical machining center (including VH-40) (1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (2) The Y-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the Y-axis escape position (the position set at system work coordinate system No. 12). (3) The spindle is oriented. (4) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back* once and then moves forward. * The sensor unit does not move back if it is already at the retract end position. (5) The X- and Y-axis move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the touch sensor. (6) The tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor according to the selected cycle (automatic tool length offset (cutter radius compensation)/automatic tool breakage detection cycle). (7) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (8) The Y-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the Y-axis escape position (the position set at system work coordinate system No. 12). (9) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back. [Supplement] With the VH-40, since the touch sensor zero point in the Y-axis direction is set at the same position as the Y-axis escape position, only the X-axis moves in step 5).

Machine operation in the case of horizontal machining center (1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (2) The Y-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the Y-axis escape position (the position set at system work coordinate system No. 9). (3) The spindle is oriented.

5249-E P-77 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION (4) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back* once and then moves forward. * The sensor unit does not move back if it is already at the retract end position. (5) The X- and Y-axis move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the touch sensor. (6) The tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor according to the selected cycle (automatic tool length offset (cutter radius compensation)/automatic tool breakage detection cycle). (7) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (8) The Y-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the Y-axis escape position (the position set at system work coordinate system No. 9). (9) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back.

5249-E P-78 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

5.

Interference Prevention Measures for MCV-A/MCV-A II During Execution of the Automatic Tool Length Offset/ Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle This function prevents interference between the touch sensor and the coolant trough, and between the spindle tool and the chip cover, during the execution of the automatic tool length offset (cutter radius compensation)/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for the MCV-A/MCV-A II. To make this function valid, set “1” for CNC optional parameter (bit) No. 36, bit 4.

5-1.

Touch Sensor Operation Interlock A notch is provided in the coolant trough and the touch sensor zero point is set above the notch to prevent interference of the coolant trough with the touch sensor. Touch sensor advance is enabled only at the touch sensor zero point. If the M144 command (touch sensor advance) is executed although the X-axis is not at the touch sensor zero point, the touch sensor does not move and the following alarm occurs. The touch sensor can be advanced only through the notched part. 2437 Alarm B Improper M code 5 The X-axis touch sensor zero point described here is the position set by touch sensor zero point setting in the Z-axis direction and means the X-axis coordinate value in the system work coordinate system No. 1.

5-2.

Measures against Interference during Execution of the Automatic Tool Length Offset/Tool Breakage Detection Cycle In order to avoid interference between the tool and the chip cover, the X-axis touch sensor zero point must be set at the center of the notch provided in the chip cover so that the tool crosses the chip cover through that point.

5249-E P-79 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

5-2-1. Provisional Setting of the X-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point Since the M144 command (touch sensor advance) is invalid unless the X-axis is located at the touch sensor zero point, the provisional X-axis zero point must be set before setting the X-axis touch sensor zero point. Note that this setting is not necessary when adjusting a touch sensor zero point that has already been set. Procedure :

1

Move the X-axis by manual operation to align the touch sensor with the center of the notch in the coolant trough.

2

Select the MDI mode and execute “VFST=**”. For “**” set an appropriate value by referring to [6-3. How to Use Variables]. Here, the operation mode may be either automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection.

3

Select the MDI mode and execute “VSZOX[1]=VRCOX-VMOFX”.

4

Execute M144.

[Supplement] Set the touch sensor zero point in the Z direction by designating “PAXI=7”.

5-2-2. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Before executing the automatic tool length offset or tool breakage detection cycle, set “0” for bit 3 of VFST to enable X-axis movement. VFST setting for the execution of the automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection cycle

• Relative offset Automatic tool length offset: 1 Automatic tool breakage detection: 0

• Absolute offset Automatic tool length offset: #81H Automatic tool breakage detection: #80H This instruction manual specifies that the tool moves to the touch sensor position during the execution of an automatic tool length offset or tool breakage detection cycle in the following sequence: Z-axis upper limit → Y-axis touch sensor position → X-axis touch sensor position. In this order of tool movements, however, the tool will interfere with the chip cover. The setting indicated above changes the order to: Z-axis upper limit → Z-axis touch sensor position → Y-axis touch sensor position. Similarly, if “PGO = 2” is designated, the order of tool movements to the tool change position (the position set by the execution of OO31), where the tool moves after the detection of tool breakage, is changed to: Z-axis upper limit → Y-axis tool change position → X-axis tool change position.

5249-E P-80 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

6.

Variables Used in Subprograms The basic command format of the automatic tool length offset function and the automatic tool breakage detection function was explained in the previous subsections. In this subsection, the variables necessary to make effective use of these functions are described.

6-1.

Table of Subprograms and Variables Subprogram Name

Setting of Z-axis touch sensor zero point

OO30

Variables for which a Variables for which a Numerical Value Should be Numerical Value Must be Set Set as Needed PAXI: =3 =4 =7 VFST:

PLI: Setting of X- and Yaxis zero points Setting of Z-axis zero point PRS: Setting of X-, Y- and Z-axis zero points PRET: Operation mode =1 PH: PD:

Setting of Y-axis touch sensor zero point

OO30

PAXI: =#17H VFST: PLI:

PY:

Setting of tool change position (Not necessary for MC-H)

OO31

None

PRS: Setting of X-, Y- and Z-axis zero points Operation mode Accurate tool length of reference tool used in setting the zero point Accurate cutter radius of reference tool used in setting the zero point

PRET: =1 PH: PD:

None

Variable which Must not be Used

Accurate tool length of reference tool used in setting the zero point Spindle orientation angle Sensor does not retract. Tool length offset number Cutter radius compensation number

None

Spindle orientation angle

None

Sensor does not retract. Tool length offset number Cutter radius compensation number

None

5249-E P-81 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION Subprogram Name Automatic tool length offset

OO30

Variables for which a Variables for which a Numerical Value Should be Numerical Value Must be Set Set as Needed VFST: PY:

PLI: Operation mode Approximate disPX: placement of tool nose in the Y-axis direction from the center of the spindle (i.e., cutter radius) Always set when executing Y-axis automatic tool offset PY:

PFA:

PF1: PF2: PRS: PRET: =1 PH: PD:

Anticipated tool length Approximate displacement of tool nose in the X-axis direction from the center of the spindle+/- values are possible. Approximate displacement of tool nose in the Y-axis direction from the center of the spindle Feedrate for the movement from the sensor to undertravel point, PUDT (safety distance) Skip feedrate for the first contact detection cycle Skip feedrate for the second contact detection cycle Spindle orientation angle Sensor does not retract. Tool length offset number Cutter radius compensation number

Variable which Must not be Used PAXI

5249-E P-82 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION Subprogram Name Automatic tool breakage detection

OO30

Variables for which a Variables for which a Numerical Value Should be Numerical Value Must be Set Set as Needed VFST: PY:

PX: Operation mode Approximate displacement of the tool nose in the Y-axis direction from the center of the spindle (i.e., cutter radius) PY: Always set when executing Y-axis automatic tool breakage detection

PLE1: PLEY: PLE2: PGO: PRS: PRET: =1 PH: PD: PFA:

PF1: PF2:

Approximate displacement of the tool nose in the X-axis direction from the center of the spindle +/- values are possible. Approximate displacement of the tool nose in the Y-axis direction from the center of the spindle +/- values are possible. Z-axis direction tool breakage judgment value Y-axis direction tool breakage judgment value Offset value update permissible amount Processing on occurrence of tool breakage Spindle orientation angle Sensor does not retract. Tool length offset number Cutter radius compensation number Feedrate for the movement from the sensor to the undertravel point, PUDT (safety distance) Skip feedrate for the first contact detection cycle Skip feedrate for the second contact detection cycle

Variable which Must not be Used PAXI

5249-E P-83 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

6-2.

Table of Subprograms and Variables (MCM Horizontal Tools) Subprogram Name

Setting of tool length direction touch sensor zero point (Y-axis)

OO30

Variables for which a Variables for which a Numerical Value Should be Numerical Value Must be Set Set as Needed PAXI: =#23H =#24H =#27H VFST:

PLI: Setting of X- and Yaxis zero points Setting of Z-axis zero point Setting of X-, Y- and Z-axis zero points Operation mode

PRS: PRET: =1 PH: PD:

Setting of tool radius direction touch sensor zero point (Z-axis)

OO30

PAXI =#47H VFST: PLI:

PZ:

Z-axis lower limit setting

OO32

None

PRS: Setting of X-, Y- and Z-axis zero points Operation mode Accurate tool length of reference tool used in setting the zero point Accurate cutter radius of reference tool used in setting the zero point

PRET: =1 PH: PD:

None

Accurate tool length of reference tool used in setting the zero point Spindle orientation angle

Variable which Must not be Used None

Sensor does not retract. Tool length offset number Cutter radius compensation number Spindle orientation angle

None

Sensor does not retract. Tool length offset number Cutter radius compensation number

None

5249-E P-84 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION Subprogram Name Automatic tool length offset

OO30

Variables for which a Variables for which a Numerical Value Should be Numerical Value Must be Set Set as Needed VFST: PZ:

PLI: Operation mode Approximate disPX: placement of tool nose in the tool radius direction (Zaxis direction) Always set when executing automatic PZ: tool length offset in the tool radius direction PFA:

PF1: PF2: PRS: PRET: =1 PH: PD:

Anticipated tool length Approximate displacement of tool nose in the X-axis direction from the center of the spindle Approximate displacement of tool nose in the Z-axis direction from the center of the spindle Feedrate for the movement from the sensor to the undertravel point, PUDT (safety distance) Skip feedrate for the first contact detection cycle Skip feedrate for the second contact detection cycle Spindle orientation angle Sensor does not retract. Tool length offset number Cutter radius compensation number

Variable which Must not be Used PAXI

5249-E P-85 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION Subprogram Name Automatic tool breakage detection

OO30

Variables for which a Variables for which a Numerical Value Should be Numerical Value Must be Set Set as Needed VFST: PZ:

PX: Operation mode Approximate displacement of tool nose in the tool radius direction (ZPZ: axis direction) Always set when executing automatic tool length offset in the tool radius direction PLE1:

PLEZ:

PLE2: PGO: PRS: PRET: =1 PH: PD: PFA:

PF1: PF2:

Approximate displacement of tool nose in the X-axis direction from the center of the spindle Approximate displacement of tool nose in the Z-axis direction from the center of the spindle Tool length direction (Y-axis direction) tool breakage judgment value Tool radius direction (Z-axis direction) tool breakage judgment value Offset value update permissible amount Processing on occurrence of tool breakage Spindle orientation angle Sensor does not retract. Tool length offset number Cutter radius compensation number Feedrate for the movement from the sensor to the undertravel point, PUDT (safety distance) Skip feedrate for the first contact detection cycle Skip feedrate for the second contact detection cycle

Variable which Must not be Used PAXI

5249-E P-86 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

6-3.

How to Use Variables The following describes how the variables given in the tables in [6-1. Table of Subprograms and Variables] and [6-2. Table of Subprograms and Variables (MCM Horizontal Tools)] are used. Note the numerical values must be in the units presently in use. (1) VFST (V FIRST)

• VFST sets the basic operation mode for automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection cycles.

• Since the system variable VFST is backed up in the CNC memory, it only has to be designated once: it does not have to be set each time OO30 is called.

• The automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection cycles can be executed even in the same part program. In this case, set “1” for bit 0 of VFST when executing an automatic tool length offset cycle. To execute an automatic tool breakage detection cycle, set “0” for bit 0 of VFST.

• VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance. VFST

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0 ME61012R0700300830001

Bit No.

Setting

Description

0

Automatic tool breakage detection cycle

1

Automatic tool length offset cycle

1

Executes an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the tool radius direction.

1

Executes an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the Y-axis direction after the execution of an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the Z-axis direction. To execute an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle only in the Z-axis direction, set “0” for both Bit 1 and Bit 2.

Bit 3

1

Does not move the X-axis when positioning a reference tool at the touch sensor position. Set “1” for Bit 3 with machine models such as MCV, MCM and MCR in which the touch sensor is installed independently of the X-axis movement.

Bit 4

0

Always set “0”.

Bit 5

0

Always set “0”.

0

Does not execute an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for MCM horizontal tools.

1

Executes an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for MCM horizontal tools.

0

Designates the relative offset type.

1

Designates the absolute offset type.

Bit 0 Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 6

Bit 7

5249-E P-87 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION (2) PLE1 (P LENGTH ERR 1)

• This indicates the tool breakage judgement value and must be set as an absolute value. • A tool is judged to have been broken if: PLE1 < | (Preset tool length offset data) - (Measured tool length) |

• If PLE1 is not set when executing a tool breakage detection cycle, 0.1 mm is automatically set for PLE1 in the subprogram. (3) PLE2 (P LENGTH ERR 2)

• This indicates the permissible offset update value and must be set as an absolute value. • If tool breakage is not detected in a tool breakage detection cycle and the following condition is satisfied, the tool length offset data is updated according to the measured tool length. PLE2 < | (Preset tool length offset data) - (Measured tool length) | < PLE1

• As the tool length offset data is updated each time the cycle is executed, it must be carefully attended to in reference to the occurrence of tool breakage. When PLE2 is not set, the tool length offset data is not updated. (4) PLEY (P LENGTH ERROR Y-AXIS)

• This indicates the tool breakage judgement value in the Y-axis direction and must be set as an absolute value.

• A tool is judged to have been broken if: PLEY < | (Preset cutter radius compensation data) - (Measured cutter radius) |

• If PLE2 is not set when executing a tool breakage detection cycle, 0.1 mm is automatically set for PLEY in the subprogram. (5) PAXI

• This designates the axis for which the touch sensor zero point is set. • PAXI consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance. PAXI

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0 ME61012R0700300830002

5249-E P-88 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION Bit No. Bit 0

Description Sets the X-axis zero point.

Bit 1

Sets the Y-axis zero point.

Bit 2

Sets the Z-axis zero point.

Bit 3

Always set “0”.

Bit 4

0: Sets the zero point of the tool length direction touch sensor for a vertical tool. 1: Sets the zero point of the tool radius direction touch sensor for a vertical tool.

Bit 5

Sets the zero point of the tool length direction touch sensor for a horizontal tool.

Bit 6

Sets the zero point of the tool radius direction touch sensor for a horizontal tool.

Bit 7

Always set “0”.

Setting value of PAXI Sensor Direction Axis Name

Vertical Tool

MCM Horizontal Tool

Length Direc- Radius Direc- Length Direc- Radius Direction Sensor tion Sensor tion Sensor tion Sensor

Setting of X- and Y-axis zero points

3

(#13H)

#23H

(#43H)

Setting of Z-axis zero point

4

(#14H)

#24H

(#44H)

Setting of X-, Y- and Z-axis zero points

7

#17H

#27H

#47H

(6) PX

• This indicates an approximate displacement of the tool nose from the center of the tool (spindle) in the X-axis direction. Designation of plus and minus values is possible. When PX is not set, “PX = 0” is automatically set in a subprogram.

• When the X- and Y-axis move to the center of the touch sensor during automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the tool is positioned PX away from the center of the touch sensor so that the tool nose is aligned with the center of the touch sensor.

• Since the touch sensor is installed close to the travel limit, pay attention to the setting of PX in reference to the travel limit. (7) PY This indicates an approximate displacement of the tool nose from the center of the tool (spindle) in the Y-axis direction. For other details, refer to the explanation for “PX”. When setting the Y-axis zero point, an accurate cutter radius (displacement of the tool nose in the Y-axis direction) of the reference tool used for zero point setting must be set for PY.

5249-E P-89 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION (8) PZ This indicates an approximate displacement of the tool nose from the center of the tool (spindle) in the Z-axis direction. For other details, refer to the explanation for “PX”. (9) PLI

• When setting the touch sensor zero point Set the reference tool length for PLI.

• Relative offset type Set the length of the reference tool used for touch sensor zero point setting in relation to the length of the tool used for setting the zero point of the work coordinate system. When no setting is made, it is automatically assumed that “PLI = 0”.

• Absolute offset type Set the length of the reference tool used for touch sensor zero point setting from the tool nose surface. When no setting is made, it is automatically assumed that “PLI = 150 mm” or “PLI = 200 mm”. Which of the values is used is determined by the machine model.

• When executing the automatic tool length offset cycle Set the anticipated tool length for PLI.

• Relative offset type Set the relative length of the tool in reference to the reference tool (200 mm or 150 mm). This corresponds to dimension “a” (Tool length - Reference tool length) in the illustration below.

• Absolute offset type Set the length of the tool between the spindle nose (gauge line) and the tool nose. This corresponds to dimension “b” in the illustration below.

Reference tool

a

b

Spindle nose surface

ME61012R0700300830003

When the tool set in the spindle moves toward the touch sensor, it advances to an imaginary position 10 mm beyond the position where it would come into contact with the touch sensor. If PLI is not set, the minimum tool length set for CNC optional parameter (long word) No. 43 is taken as the tool length.

5249-E P-90 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION (10) PFA/PF1/PF2 These designate the approach or skip feedrate for tool movements toward the sensor.

• PFA: Feedrate for the movement from the sensor to the undertravel point, PUDT (safety distance)

• PF1: Skip feedrate for the first contact detection cycle • PF2: Skip feedrate for the second contact detection cycle PFA without PLI (anticipated tool length)

Override valid

• When PFA command is not designated: F=PF1 (automatic tool length offset) F4000 (automatic tool breakage detection)

• When PFA command is designated: F=PF1 (automatic tool length offset) F=PFA (automatic tool breakage detection) PFA with PLI (anticipated tool length)

Override valid

• When PFA command is not designated: F=PF1 (automatic tool length offset) F4000 (automatic tool breakage detection)

• When PFA command is designated: F=PFA Skip feedrate for the first contact Override valid detection cycle • When PF1 command is not designated: F2000

• When PF1 command is designated: F=PF1 Skip feedrate for the second contact detection cycle

Override invalid

• When PF2 command is not designated: F1000

• When PF2 command is designated: F=PF2 (11) PGO(P GO) This determines the processing to be followed after the detection of tool breakage. Selection is possible from “alarm-stop” and “spare tool selection”.

• When PGO is not set: When a tool breakage is detected during the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the CNC stops in the alarm state after the completion of the automatic tool breakage detection cycle.

• When the setting is “PGO = 1”: When a tool breakage is detected during the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the broken tool is returned to the magazine after the automatic tool breakage detection cycle is completed. Then, the execution part program is continued. With MC-V and double-column machining centers, the tool change cycle is executed at the X, Y coordinate positions where the cycle has been executed; therefore, do not set “PGO = 1” for these models.

5249-E P-91 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

• When the setting is “PGO = 2”: This setting is not allowed for MC-H. With MC-H, do not set PGO as “2”. If tool breakage is detected during the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the X- and Y-axis move to the preset tool change position (Y-axis moves first and then the X-axis) after the completion of the tool breakage detection cycle. Then, the broken tool is returned to the magazine and the execution of the part program is continued. The tool change position must be set beforehand by executing the tool change position setting cycle.

• When the setting is “PGO = 3”: Even when tool breakage is detected during the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the part program is executed continuously after the automatic tool breakage detection cycle.

• When the setting is “PGO=11” (for BC-axis attachment only) The machine operates in the same way as described in the setting of “PGO =1.” Set “PGO=11” when the machine operation based on the setting of “PGO=1” is necessary for BC-axis attachment.

• When the setting is “PGO=12” (for BC-axis attachment only) The machine operates in the same way as described in the setting of “PGO =2.” Set “PGO=12” when the machine operation based on the setting of “PGO=2” is necessary for BC-axis attachment. If the setting for PGO is “1”, “2”, “3”, “11” or “12”, regardless of whether or not the broken tool is returned to the magazine, the CNC does not stop even if tool breakage is detected and a part program continues to be executed after the completion of the tool breakage detection cycle. Therefore, it is necessary to judge if the tool is broken or not in a part program and follow the necessary processing if a tool is found to have been broken. The result of the tool breakage detection cycle is set for system variable VOK1. VOK1 = 0: Tool has not been broken. VOK1 ≠ 0: Tool has been broken. If a measurement impossible alarm occurs, whatever setting is made for PGO, the CNC is alarm-stopped after the automatic tool breakage cycle is completed.

CAUTION 1) Setting “PGO = 1” is not allowed with MC-V and double-column machining centers. This setting can cause interference between the tool or the tool change arm and the workpiece if a tool change cycle starts after an automatic tool breakage detection cycle. 2) Setting “PGO = 2” is not allowed for MC-H. This setting can cause interference between the tool or the spindle and the workpiece in Y- or X-axis movement that follows an automatic tool breakage detection cycle.

5249-E P-92 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION (12) PRS (P RS) When using a special tool, a boring bar for example, the tool bit can fail to contact the touch sensor if the spindle is orient stopped at the preset position. In such cases, it is necessary to index the spindle to the desired angular position. PRS is used to set the desired spindle index angle for such cases. Example:In the case of the tool shown below, set “270” for PRS to index the spindle to allow tool bit to contact the touch sensor.

Tool

Y+

Y-

Sensor ME61012R0700300830004

Execute “CALL OO30 PRS = 270”

Y+

Y-

ME61012R0700300830005

[Supplement] Spindle orientation is automatically executed at the travel end of the Z-axis in the positive direction. (13) PRET (P RETRACT) With the retract type touch sensor, the sensor retracts after the completion of a cycle. If “1” is set for this variable, the cycle completes with the sensor at the advanced position. (14) PH/PD

• Offset data (tool length offset data, cutter radius compensation data) are usually set and referenced for the offset number identical to the actual tool number. By setting PH and/or PD, the offset data can be set for the desired offset number. PH: Tool length offset number (default: actual tool number) PD: Cutter radius compensation number (default: PH number)

• Setting range: 1 to The number of tool data sets

5249-E P-93 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION [Supplement] Even when only cutter radius compensation is executed, it is necessary to set both PH and PD since the tool length offset data is also referenced. (15) VLTL (Maximum tool length) The maximum tool length VLTL, used for the automatic tool offset and automatic tool breakage detection cycles, is added to the system parameters. The operational step 4) in Fig. 1-1 Cycle Time Reduction Function on page 29 becomes valid according to the setting for this parameter:

• Optional parameter (bit) No. 36, bit 3 1: Valid 0: Invalid (initial setting)

• Optional parameter (long ward) No. 44: Max. tool length data For the maximum tool length, set the maximum tool length among the tools that will be used. Setting range: 0 to 999 Unit: mm Initial setting: 0 (may be changed) [Supplement] Because the initial setting for the maximum tool length is “0”, an appropriate value must be set for VLTL. (16) PUDT (Undertravel distance (Safety clearance)) When a tool is moved towards the sensor, its feedrate is switched from a high speed to a low speed. The position where the feedrate is switched is set for this variable in terms of the distance from the sensor to the tool nose. See Fig. 1-1 Cycle Time Reduction Function on page 29. Designate this variable when calling the subprogram. If PUDT is not set, the following value is regarded as the undertravel distance.

• Automatic tool length offset cycle Both PLI and PFA are designated: 50 mm Either PLI or PFA is not designated: 10 mm

• Automatic tool breakage detection cycle Undertravel distance: 5 mm (17) POVT (Overtravel distance (Sensor damaging prevention distance)) This is provided to prevent breakage of the sensor if the sensor fails to function when the tool contacts it. Set the distance from the assumed sensor contact position to the position where axis feed should stop if the sensor fails to operate. Designate this variable when calling the subprogram. If POVT is not set, “10 mm” is automatically set for it.

5249-E P-94 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION (18) PNOR This is to switch whether to enable or disable the command M19, which is to enable or disable spindle orientation and indexing to multiple reference points. Value of PNOR

Spindle orientation / indexing to multiple reference points

1

Disable (Do not execute M19)

Other than 1 (or no value is specified)

Enable (Execute M19)

When a CALL command is executed for OO30 (automatic tool offset/breakage detection) Specify the whether to enable or disable spindle orientation and indexing to multiple reference points with the above argument PNOR OO30 (Automatic tool offset/breakage detection). Spindle orientation and indexing to multiple reference points are enabled unless otherwise specified with PNOR. M19 is disabled for the following six patterns in OO30 when PNOR is set to 1.

• Reference point setting for Z-axis sensor on the vertical spindle • Reference point setting for Y-axis sensor on the vertical spindle • Reference point setting in the longitude direction for the horizontal spindle • Reference point setting in the radius direction for the horizontal spindle • Tool offset/breakage detection for vertical spindle • Tool offset/breakage detection for horizontal spindle Example: CALL OO30 PAXI=7 PNOR=1 Spindle orientation and indexing to multiple reference point are disabled on the X, Y, and Z-axis for reference point setting in the longitude direction for the vertical spindle

7.

Cautions on Operation (1) Because the sensor will not work properly if its zero point is not set, be sure to set the sensor zero point by executing the sensor zero point setting cycle when the machine is installed. For MCM, the zero point setting cycle must be executed for the horizontal spindle touch sensor.

• The sensor zero point is set for system work coordinate system No. 1 (Z-axis sensor) and system work coordinate system No. 4 (Y-axis sensor).

• System work coordinate systems No. 1 and No. 4 are exclusive to automating specifications and can neither be set by parameter setting nor referenced.

• System work coordinate systems No. 1 and No. 4 can only be checked by displaying the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window in the GAUGING RESULT display screen. (2) When setting “PGO = 2 (PGO = 12)” with MC-V or a double-column machining center, make sure that the tool change position setting cycle has been executed. The tool change position for the automatic tool breakage detection cycle is set for system work coordinate system No. 2. System work coordinate system No. 2 is exclusive to automating specifications and can neither be set by parameter setting nor referenced.

5249-E P-95 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION (3) An emergency stop limit switch is built into the system to protect the touch sensors. This limit switch stops axis movement if a sensor is pushed in too far. If this happens, the emergency stop limit indicating lamp in the control panel lights up. To release the emergency stop condition, select the manual mode, set the emergency stop limit release switch to valid, and retract the sensor by moving the axis with the pulse handle in the direction in which the limit switch is released. (4) Do not call out the automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection subprogram while there is a remaining shift amount in manual interruption operation or while the machine is still in the mirror image mode. If a subprogram call is attempted, a “measuring impossible” alarm occurs. (5) As the automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection functions are used in combination with the tool management function, the operator must become fully acquainted with the tool management function by reading its manual thoroughly before using these functions. (6) The explanations in this manual relate to tools that have the cutting nose at the front edge, such as drills, taps and reamers. For tools whose cutting edge is off the center of the spindle, like boring bars, variables PRS and PX or PY must be set in accordance with the tool nose offset direction. (7) The automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection functions cannot be used for tools whose tool holder comes into contact with the touch sensor or touch sensor unit before the tool nose does. (8) Numerical values must be assigned to subprograms in the presently used unit system. Note that the real number unit system must not be used. (9) The cutter radius compensation mode and the local coordinate system are cancelled when an automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection subprogram is executed and, once cancelled, they are not restored after the completion of the subprogram. (10) Call automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection subprograms in a work coordinate system. An alarm occurs if a subprogram is called in the machine coordinate system. Note that a work coordinate system cannot be altered during the execution of an automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection subprogram. (11) Do not use the user area as the area for storing programs, work coordinate systems, tool offset data and common variables, automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection subprograms. (12) The allowable number of nesting levels of subroutines in an automatic tool length offset or tool breakage detection subprogram is two. This means that the maximum allowable nesting level is six when these functions are executed. (13) Manual advance/retraction operation of the tool breakage detection unit (touch sensor) With MCM and MCR, the touch sensor can be manually moved forwards and backwards. a.

Set the CNC operation panel mode selecting key-lock type switch to ON to enable independent manual operation.

b.

Set the selector switch to FORWARDS.

c.

Press the CYCLE START button. The cover will open and the touch sensor will move forward when the CYCLE START button is released.

d.

Set the selector switch to BACKWARDS.

5249-E P-96 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION e.

Press the CYCLE START button. The touch sensor will move backward and the cover will close when the CYCLE START button is released.

f.

Set the CNC operation panel mode selecting key-lock type switch to OFF to disable independent manual operation.

(14) An alarm usually occurs if the actual tool number is “0” when a tool length offset or cutter radius compensation cycle is executed. Therefore, you are recommended to carry out a tool change in the MDl or automatic mode in this case. (15) The following parameter is to switch the retract position for the tool to be retracted during tool length offset and tool breakage detection program. NC optional parameter bit No. 37 bit 4 Description

Tool retract position

Enable command G00 which exceeds travel end limit

Current position +1 mm (0.04 in.)

Raise an alarm if a command G00 which exceeds travel end limit is specified. Limit* -5 mm (0.20 in.) (*) Limit that is currently valid including programmable limit, B-axis rotation control (optional) The following shows the cycles that include tool retraction. OO30 ・

Reference point setting cycle in the longitude direction for the vertical spindle

・

Reference point setting cycle in the radius direction for OO30 PAXI=#12H VFST=#80H the vertical spindle

・

Tool length offset/breakage detection cycle for vertical spindle

・

Tool length offset/breakage detection cycle for horizonOO30 PAT=1 tal spindle

・ Z-axis retraction upon tool breakage alarm

OO30 PAXI=4

OO30

VFST=#80H

VFST=#80H VFST=#C0H

OO30

VFST=#80H

OO34

VFST=#80H

OO87

VFST=#80H

OO34 (30° AT gauging) ・

Tool length offset/breakage detection cycle for vertical spindle

OO87 (45° AT gauging) ・

Tool length offset/breakage detection cycle for vertical spindle

5249-E P-97 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

8.

Program Examples

8-1.

Automatic Tool Length Offset • Relative offset type T2

T6

PY=30 (1.18) Drill

Boring bar ME61012R0700300850001

N1 T2 N2 M6 N3 T6 N4 CALL OO30 VFST=1 (PLI=40) (PF1=1000)

N5 M6 N6 T5 N7 CALL OO30 PY=30

Tool length offset cycle for T2 PLI: Anticipated tool length (relative length) in reference to the standard tool PF1: First approach feedrate

Tool length offset cycle for T6 PY: Tool nose offset amount from the spindle center (Y direction) = 30 mm (1.18 in.)

N8 M6 : : ME61012R0700300850002

5249-E P-98 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

• Absolute offset type N1 T2 N2 M6 N3 T6 N4 CALL OO30 VFST=#81H (PLI=240) (PF1=1500) N5 M6 N6 T5 N7 CALL OO30 PY=30 N8 M6 : :

Tool length offset cycle for T2 PLI: Anticipated tool length (absolute length)

Tool length offset cycle for T6

ME61012R0700300850003

Commands in ( ) may be omitted. It is not necessary to set variable VFST every time a tool length offset cycle is called. As has been explained, the touch sensor zero point must be set before the execution of an automatic tool length offset cycle. For the setting of the touch sensor zero point, select the same offset type (relative or absolute) as the type used for the automatic tool length offset cycle.

5249-E P-99 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

8-2.

Automatic Tool Breakage Detection • Alarm stop T3

PY=30 (1.18) Boring bar ME61012R0700300860001

N1 T1 N2 M6 N3 T3 N4 S300 N5 G81 G56 X40 Y20 Z-30 R3 F80 H1 : : : N12 CALL OO30 VFST=0 (PLE1=0.2)*1 (PLE2=0.05)

N13 M6 N14 T2 N15 G0 X30 Y10

: : N29 CALL OO30 PY=30 (PLE1=0.1)

T1: Drill T3: Boring bar

Tool breakage detection cycle for T1 PLE1: Tool breakage judgment value = 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) PLE2: Offset value update permissible amount = 0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)

If no tool breakage judgment value is set, "0.1 mm (0.004 in.)" is automatically set as the tool breakage judgment value.

Tool breakage detection cycle for T3 PY: Off-center amount of tool nose: 30 mm (1.18 in.)

: : ME61012R0700300860002

When the tool is judged “broken”, i.e., when the measured tool length is smaller than the set tool breakage judgment value, the operation stops in an alarm state on completion of the cycle (Z-axis positioned at travel end in the positive direction).

5249-E P-100 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION *1: Tool length offset data is updated when variable “PLE2” is set. When the tool length measured in the tool breakage detection cycle is 0.051 mm (0.00201 in.) to 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) (the range set by “PLE1” and “PLE2”) shorter than the initial tool length measured in the automatic tool length offset cycle, the tool length offset data is automatically updated based on the tool length measured in the tool breakage detection cycle to compensate for the tool wear amount. When no “PLE2” data is set, the tool length offset data is not updated.

• Automatic spare tool selection (MC-H) T1

T3

PY=30 (1.18) Drill

Boring bar ME61012R0700300860003

5249-E P-101 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

N1 T1 N2 M6 N3 T3 N4 G0 X40 Y10 S300 N5 G56 Z40 H1* M3 : : : N18 CALL OO30 VFST=0 (PLE1=0.1) PGO=1 N19 IF [VOK1 NE 0]N999 N20 M6 N21 T9 N22 G0 X100 Y20 N23 G56 Z20 H3 : : N42 CALL OO30 PY=30 PGO=1

: : N999 M60 Part program for the next workpiece

T1: Drill T3: Boring bar

Tool breakage detection cycle for T1 PLE1: Tool breakage judgment value = 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) Jump to N999 if tool is judged "broken" VOK1: Judgment for tool breakage

Tool breakage detection cycle for T3 PY: Tool nose offset amount from the spindle center = 30 mm (1.18 in.)

Pallet change command If a broken tool is called in this program, a spare tool is automatically selected from the same tool group. At the same time as the spare tool is selected, the tool offset data is rewritten to the offset data of the selected spare tool. The cutter radius compen sation data is rewritten also. ME61012R0700300860004

It is not necessary to set variable VFST every time an automatic tool breakage detection cycle is called. *: HA may be designated instead of H1. For details, refer to special specifications of the Operation Manual.

5249-E P-102 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION

9.

Alarm List Name of Alarm

UNTENDED: gauging impossible (ALARM-B 2305)

Probable Cause At the end of the gauging impossible message, the cause code is displayed.

Refer to the Gauging Impossible Cause Code List and eliminate the cause.

ALARM-B 2305 UNTENDED: gauging impossible ×× ↑ Cause code

UNTENDED: An attempt is made to execute the tool no subprogram function breakage detection cycle although the (ALARM-B 2311) corresponding specification is not supported. UNTENDED: tool breakage (ALARM-B 2309)

Tool breakage is detected in the tool breakage detection cycle.

Direct of subscript (ALARM-B 2231)

Tool number is “0”. PH and/or PD setting is wrong.

UNTENDED: command missing (ALARM-B 2308)

Measures to Take

Check the VFST setting.

When a tool is changed manually, the active tool number must be set.

• The PAT command value is out of the specifiable range (outside the range 1 to 7).

• Wrong PAT command • The PAT command is not designated although “1” is set for VFST, bit 6. Plus travel limit over (ALARM-B 2268)

The value assigned to PLI is too large.

Do not set a value larger than the maximum measurable tool length for PLI. For the allowable maximum length of the tool to be measured, refer to your final machine/control specifications.

The value set for the zero point of the touch sensor is incorrect. The touch sensor zero point has been set in the relative offset type but measurement is executed in the absolute offset type, or the touch sensor zero point has been set in the absolute offset type but measurement is executed in the relative offset type.

Set the touch sensor zero point again. Be sure to use the same offset type (relative/absolute) for the setting and measurement.

5249-E P-103 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION Name of Alarm

Probable Cause

Minus travel limit over (ALARM-B 2269)

Measures to Take

The value set for CNC optional parame- Do not set a value smaller than the miniter (long word) No. 43 (measurable min- mum measurable tool length for CNC imum tool length) is too small. optional parameter (long word) No. 43. For the minimum allowable length of the tool to be measured, refer to your final machine/control specifications. The value assigned to PLI is too small.

Do not specify a value smaller than the minimum measurable tool length for PLI. For the maximum allowable length of the tool to be measured, refer to your final machine/control specifications.

The touch sensor zero point has been set in the relative offset type but measurement is executed in the absolute offset type, or the touch sensor zero point has been set in the absolute offset type but measurement is executed in the relative offset type.

Set the touch sensor zero point again. Be sure to use the same offset type (relative/absolute) for the setting and measurement.

Gauging Impossible Cause Code List Code (HEX)

Probable Cause

Measures to Take

Used Subprograms

1

A maker subprogram is called while Call a maker subprogram after selectthe machine coordinate system (H0) is ing a work coordinate system (G15 H1, selected. for example).

OO10 OO30 OO50

2

The mirror image function is active.

Cancel the mirror image function first.

OO10 OO30 OO50

3

Manual shift amount (total) remains.

Cancel the manual shift amount (total) to zero.

OO10 OO30 OO50

4

In the G11 mode (parallel or rotation shift of a coordinate)

Cancel the G11 mode first.

OO10

5

In the G51 mode (graphics enlargement/reduction)

Cancel the G51 mode first.

OO10

6

T number is zero (0), or no tool is set.

• Specify a T number.

OO30

• Specify the PTLN command. 7

Specified T number or PTLN command is larger than the maximum offset number.

Specify a T number or PTON command within the allowable range.

8

The power to the probe is not on when Check the following: the flash on cycle is attempted. • Is there any obstacle between the receiver head and the probe?

• Is the spindle index angle for the probe correct?

• Does the receiver head flash?

OO30

OO15

5249-E P-104 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION Code (HEX)

Probable Cause

Measures to Take When positioning the Y- and Z-axes, position them within the range of PCHK from the touch sensor zero point.

9

The offset amount of the positioning point for cycle start from the touch sensor zero point is greater than PCHK (only for Y- and Z-axes).

A

The touch probe microcomputer stays Check whether chips are accumulating on. on the proximity switch.

B

Check the touch probe battery. The result of the touch probe test is NG. The touch probe signal cannot be confirmed.

C

The touch probe contacts the workpiece while it is being fed at a rapid approach feedrate (X-axis).

With the FM type touch probe, reception of signals is not correct.

The touch probe fails to contact the workpiece while it is being fed at a middle approach feedrate (X-axis).

When using the FM type touch probe, signal reception is not correct.

Used Subprograms OO30

OO10

OO10

• Gauging cycle start point • PUDT setting

D

OO10

• Gauging cycle start point • POVT setting Check the touch probe battery.

E

The touch probe fails to contact the workpiece while it is being fed at the final approach feedrate (X-axis). When using the FM type touch probe, signal reception is not correct.

F

The proximity switch is not turned on Check if the touch probe has chatalthough the touch probe is brought tered. into contact with a workpiece (X-axis).

10

The touch probe contacts the workpiece while it is being fed at a rapid approach feedrate (Y-axis). When using the FM type touch probe, signal reception is not correct.

Check the following:

The touch probe fails to contact the workpiece while it is being fed at a middle approach feedrate (Y-axis). When using the FM type touch probe, signal reception is not correct.

Check the following:

11

OO10

OO10

OO10

• Gauging cycle start point • PUDT setting OO10

• Gauging cycle start point • POVT setting

12

Check the touch probe battery. The touch probe fails to contact the workpiece while it is being fed at the final approach feedrate (Y-axis). When using the FM type touch probe, signal reception is not correct.

OO10

13

The proximity switch is not turned on although the touch probe is brought into contact with a workpiece (Y-axis).

Check if the touch probe has chattered.

OO10

14

The touch probe contacts the workpiece while it is being fed at a rapid approach feedrate (Z-axis). When using the FM type touch probe, signal reception is not correct.

Check the following:

OO10

• Gauging cycle start point • PUDT setting

5249-E P-105 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION Code (HEX) 15

Probable Cause The touch probe fails to contact the workpiece while it is being fed at a middle approach feedrate (Z-axis). When using the FM type touch probe, signal reception is not correct.

Measures to Take Check the following:

Used Subprograms OO10

• Gauging cycle start point • POVT setting

16

Check the touch probe battery. The touch probe fails to contact the workpiece while it is being fed at the final approach feedrate (Z-axis). When using the FM type touch probe, signal reception is not correct.

OO10

17

The proximity switch is not turned on although the touch probe is brought into contact with a workpiece (Z-axis).

OO10

18

The touch probe contacts the workCheck the following items: piece during the approach to the exter• Start point of the gauging cycle nal diameter in the OD gauging cycle. • Assumed OD value

19

PLH is not designated.

Set tool length offset number for PLH.

1A

PDH is not designated.

Set the cutter radius compensation number for PDH.

1B

In the C-axis gauging cycle, contact is Check the following items: detected during the approach to the • Is start point of the C-axis gauging gauging point. cycle correct?

Check if the touch probe has chattered.

OO10

OO10

• Is PD1 value correct? • Is PG1 value correct? 1C

Touch probe contact is not detected in X-axis direction motion within the range of PUDT and POVT. (contact value error)

OO100

1D

Touch probe contact is not detected in Y-axis direction motion within the range of PUDT and POVT. (contact value error)

OO100

1E

Touch probe contact is not detected in Z-axis direction motion within the range of PUDT and POVT. (contact value error)

OO100

1F

In the touch sensor zero setting cycle for the vertical spindle longitudinal direction, the cutting tool fails to contact the sensor.

Check the start point of the cycle; is it close to the touch sensor (within 10 mm)?

OO30

20

In the touch sensor zero setting cycle Check the start point of the cycle; is it for the vertical spindle radial direction, close to the touch sensor the cutting tool fails to contact the sen- (within 10 mm)? sor.

OO30

21

In the touch sensor zero setting cycle for horizontal spindle longitudinal direction, the cutting tool fails to contact the sensor.

Check the start position of the cycle; is it close to the touch sensor (within 10 mm)?

OO30

5249-E P-106 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION Code (HEX)

Probable Cause

Measures to Take

22

In the automatic tool length offset/ automatic tool breakage detection cycle for the horizontal spindle in the radial direction, the cutting tool fails to contact the sensor.

Check the start point of the cycle; is it close to the touch sensor (within 10 mm)?

23

When the axis moves 0.5 mm in the positive direction from the contact detect point, the probe contact signal has already been on. (X direction)

24

When the axis moves 0.5 mm in the positive direction from the contact detect point, the probe contact signal has already been on. (Y direction)

25

When the axis moves 0.5 mm in the positive direction from the contact detect point, the probe contact signal has already been on. (Z direction)

26

When the axis returns 0.5 mm from the contact position detected after approach (X direction), the value is taken as the coordinate value in the workpiece gauging direction again.

27

When the axis returns 0.5 mm from the contact position detected after approach (Y direction), the value is taken as the coordinate value in the workpiece gauging direction again.

28

When the axis returns 0.5 mm from the contact position detected after approach (Z direction), the value is taken as the coordinate value in the workpiece gauging direction again.

29

Check if the anticipated tool length is In the automatic tool length offset/ correct. (for tool length offset cycle) automatic tool breakage detection cycle for the vertical spindle in the longitudinal direction, the cutting tools fails to contact the sensor.

2B

In the automatic tool length offset/ automatic tool breakage detection cycle for the horizontal spindle in the longitudinal direction, the cutting tool fails to contact the sensor.

Used Subprograms OO30

OO100

Check the following items:

OO30

OO30

• Is the anticipated tool length correct? (for tool length offset cycle)

• Is the cutter radius offset data set? (for tool breakage detection cycle)

2C

In the automatic tool length offset/ automatic tool breakage detection cycle for the vertical spindle in the radial direction, the cutting tool fails to contact the sensor.

Check the following items:

• Is the anticipated cutter radius correct? (for tool length offset cycle)

• Is the cutter radius offset data set? (for tool breakage detection cycle)

OO30

5249-E P-107 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION Code (HEX)

Probable Cause

Measures to Take

2D

In the automatic tool length offset cycle Check if PLI is appropriate. in the X-axis direction (with angular attachment), the cutting tool fails to contact the sensor.

33

In the U-center zero setting cycle, the Check the following items: cutting bit contacts the sensor, or the • Is the sensor zero point set corcontact signal is input, in a sequence rectly? in which the cutting bit should not con• Is the cutting bit free of chips? tact the sensor.

34

In the U-center zero setting cycle, no contact signal is input.

• Is the sensor signal correct? Check the following items:

• Is PD value correct? • Is the sensor signal correctly input to the CNC?

35

In the U-center radius adjusting cycle, Check the following items: the cutting bit contacts the touch sen• Is the command value correct? sor while the Y-axis is being fed in a • Is the sensor signal correctly input sequence in which contact must not be detected. to the CNC?

36

In the U-center radius adjusting cycle, Check the following items: the cutting bit fails to contact the touch • Is the U-axis command too large? sensor. • Is the sensor signal correctly input to the CNC?

37

In the U-center radius adjusting cycle, Check if the sensor signal is correctly the cutting bit fails to contact the touch input to the CNC. sensor in the sequence in which the Uaxis adjusted amount is checked on the Y-axis.

38

Check the following items: In the tool breakage detection cycle, the cutting bit contacts the touch sen• Is the sensor zero point set corsor while the Y-axis is being fed in a rectly? sequence in which contact must not be • Is the sensor signal correctly input detected. to the CNC?

• Is the cutting bit free of chips?

• Is the cutting bit free of chips? 39

Check the following items: In the tool wear compensation cycle, the cutting bit contacts the touch sen• Is the command value correct? sor in a sequence in which the Y-axis • Is the U-center bit free of chips? positioning is executed to a point distanced from the current position by the • Is the sensor signal correctly input compensation amount. to the CNC?

3A

Check if the sensor signal is correctly In the tool wear compensation cycle, the cutting bit fails to contact the touch input to the CNC. sensor in a sequence in which the cutting bit radial position is corrected in the U-axis adjusting cycle.

Used Subprograms OO30

5249-E P-108 SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION Code (HEX)

Probable Cause

Measures to Take

3B

Check if the sensor signal is correctly After the completion of U-axis compensation in the tool wear compensa- input to the CNC. tion cycle, the cutting bit fails to contact the touch sensor in the sequence in which the adjusted amount is checked in the Y-axis movement.

3C

Execute the gauging cycle after indexWhen the gauging cycle is executed ing the swivel head to the M75 (rear) with a touch probe set in the vertical spindle of the MCM, swivel head is not position. in the M75 (rear) position.

3D

In the touch sensor zero setting cycle for the vertical spindle in the longitudinal direction on the MCM, the swivel head is not in the M73 (front) position, or the horizontal spindle is being used.

• Execute the cycle after indexing

In the touch sensor zero setting cycle for the vertical spindle in the radial direction on the MCM, the swivel head is not in the M73 (front) position, or the horizontal spindle is being used.

• Execute the cycle after indexing

In the touch sensor zero setting cycle for the horizontal spindle in the longitudinal direction on the MCM, the swivel head is not in the M76 (right) position, or the horizontal spindle is being used.

• Execute the cycle after indexing

In the touch sensor zero setting cycle for the horizontal spindle in the radial direction on the MCM, the swivel head is not in the M76 (right) position, or the horizontal spindle is being used.

• Execute the cycle after indexing

3E

3F

40

Used Subprograms

OO10

OO30

the swivel head to the M73 (front) position.

• Check if the PAXI data is correct. OO30

the swivel head to the M73 (front) position.

• Check if the PAXI data is correct OO30

the swivel head to the M76 (right) position.

• Check if the PAXI data is correct OO30

the swivel head to the M76 (right) position.

• Check if the PAXI data is correct.

41

Check if the T command is correct. The tool number for the angular attachment is T52 or T53. (For the angular attachment tool, only T51 (90° angular attachment) can be used for tool length offset).

42

The power supply for the optical type touch probe cannot be turned on.

OO16 OO18

43

The power supply for the optical type touch probe cannot be turned off.

OO17 OO19

5249-E P-109 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

SECTION 2 1.

AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

Overview The automatic gauging function automatically checks the dimensions of a workpiece by executing a subprogram. The touch probe with the same shank shape as the cutting tool is mounted in the spindle and brought into contact with the gauging face of the workpiece to read the coordinate values of the contact point. The workpiece dimension is then automatically calculated using these coordinate values. The results of gauging are displayed on the screen. It is also possible to judge if the gauging result is acceptable or not in a part program. It is possible to set the zero offset of any work coordinate system based on the results of gauging. The automatic gauging function is classified into the following two major function types.

• Dimension check function • Automatic zero offset function (includes the dimension check function)

1-1.

Dimension Check Function The following four gauging patterns are provided for the dimension check function. (1) Inner diameter (ID) gauging This function automatically measures the center position and the workpiece inner diameter. The results can be evaluated. (2) Outer diameter (OD) gauging This function automatically measures the center position and the workpiece outer diameter. The results can be evaluated. (3) End face gauging This function automatically measures the end face position in any of the following directions: Xaxis, Y-axis and Z-axis directions. The results can be evaluated. (4) Calculation of the center and distance between two points This function calculates the center and the distance between two points measured in any of the three patterns (1) to (3) described above. Since the results obtained from the gauging cycle (gauging results) are automatically compared with the theoretical values (anticipated values) and the difference calculated to judge whether or not the gauging result is acceptable, this function can be used for the following purposes.

• Controlling the workpiece dimensions • Recognizing the workpiece type (or pallet table) • Confirming the zero point

1-2.

Automatic Zero Offset Function The automatic zero offset function offsets the zero point so that the coordinate values of the position where the dimension check was executed will be the desired coordinate values. In this way, zero offset is possible for any required work coordinate system.

5249-E P-110 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

2.

Operation of the Automatic Gauging Function The following flowchart shows the operating procedure of the automatic gauging function.

Is the machine model MCM?

No

Yes

No

Is the touch probe mounted in the vertical spindle? Yes Setting the zero point of the datum hole

Execute these steps once a week to maintain the accuracy of automatic gauging. In addition to this compensation/offset at regular intervals, you are recommended to execute these procedures when a new touch probe is set in the magazine. Zero point setting of the datum hole is necessary only when a touch probe is mounted in the vertical spindle (horizontal spindle for MC-H).

Checking the ON/OFF state of the touch probe

Executing the radius compensation for the touch probe Executing the length offset for the touch probe

Checking the workpiece dimension

Automatic zero offset

Execute this function for controlling workpiece dimensions, judging workpiece kinds or offsetting the zero point automatically. Execute this function to automatically offset the zero point according to the results of the dimension check function. ME61012R0700400040001

[Supplement] The explanation in this section assumes that the functions are executed in the automatic mode. Therefore, the programs necessary in each step of the operation must be prepared. Use the program edit function to prepare these programs.

5249-E P-111 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

2-1.

Setting the Datum Hole Zero Point The datum hole zero point needs to be set only when mounting a touch probe in the horizontal spindle (in the case of MC-H) or the vertical spindle (in the case of MC-H). If a touch probe is mounted in the horizontal spindle of MCM, zero point setting must not be performed. Procedure :

1

Mount a datum hole block (master ring) that has an accurately measured φ20 mm or larger diameter hole in it.

2

Accurately align the datum hole center with the spindle center using sling gauge or similar tool. Use the pulse handle for this operation.

3

Set the zero point.

4

Select the MDI mode and execute positioning to the zero point at a rapid feedrate. At the zero point, check the measured value again.

5

Move only the Z-axis in the positive (+) direction to remove the sling gauge and mount the touch probe in the spindle.

6

Move the Z-axis in the negative (-) direction to the position where the touch probe ball enters the datum hole.

7

Move the Z-axis so that the touch probe ball enters the datum hole 5 to 7 mm from the datum block upper face.

8

Select the MDI mode and execute the following program. CALL OO21 M02 When this program is executed, the zero point is set so that the actual position of the touch probe will be X=0, Y=0, Z=0 of system work coordinate system No. 3.

5249-E P-112 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION The result of setting can be confirmed by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window in the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The set X, Y and Z values are displayed at X, Y and Z columns of the NO. 3 line.

ME61012R0700400050001

[Supplement] Since system work coordinate system No. 3 is used exclusively for the automatic gauging function, it cannot normally be set or referenced. For the procedure for opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window, refer to SECTION 1 [1-2-2. MSB ZERO ON/OFF Function Key].

5249-E P-113 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

2-2.

Touch Probe Radius Compensation The following describes how the touch probe radius is corrected. To maintain high gauging accuracy, touch probe radius compensation must be executed at least once a week.

2-2-1. Touch Probe Radius Compensation Operation The general operating procedure for touch probe radius compensation is described below. For touch probe radius compensation for the MCM horizontal spindle, refer to [2-2-2. Touch Probe Radius Compensation Operation (MCM Horizontal Spindle)].

CAUTION If the radius compensation cycle for the touch probe is executed before setting the zero point of the datum hole, the machine will operate unpredictably. Execute the touch probe radius compensation cycle only after setting the datum hole zero point. Procedure :

1

Execute the datum hole zero point setting cycle.

2

In the MDI mode, specify “VNCOM[1] = 8” and touch the probe by hand to check if the contact detection signal is correctly turned ON and OFF. The ON/OFF state of the contact detection signal can be checked by displaying the ACTUAL POSITION screen or by observing the indicator lamps on the operation panel.

3

Mount the touch probe in the spindle.

4

Select the automatic mode and execute the following program. CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI=(Datum hole diameter) POVT=3 M02 The command must be specified in the presently selected unit system. When the program is executed, the touch probe automatically enters the datum hole and the radius compensation cycle is executed. The results of the cycle are set for the tool radius compensation number indicated below. Direction System Variable

Radius Compensation Data

X+

VSTOD [1]

X-

VSTOD [2]

Y+

VSTOD [3]

Y-

VSTOD [4]

Z+

-

Z-

VSTOD [5]

5249-E P-114 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION The set data can be checked by opening the MSB TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (VSTOH[N])/MSB CUTR COMP. (VSTOD[N]) pop-up window, shown below.

ME61012R0700400070001

For the procedure for opening the MSB TOOL ON/OFF pop-up window, refer to SECTION 1 [12-3. MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key]. After making sure that the touch probe radius compensation data is set for the tool radius compensation number, proceed to the steps below.

5

Using the hole where the touch probe radius compensation cycle has been executed, execute the ID gauging cycle. For the ID gauging cycle, refer to [2-4. Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Function].

6

On the GAUGING RESULT display screen, compare the anticipated center value with the measured center value to confirm that the difference is less than several micrometers.

7

Remove the touch probe from the spindle and mount the sling gauge instead.

8

Turn the sling gauge at the measured center position and compare the measured center value, sling gauge reading and anticipated center value. Make sure that differences among these three values are less than several micrometers. This completes the touch probe radius compensation operation.

[Supplement] Since cutter radius compensation numbers 1 to 20 for the system are used exclusively for the automatic gauging function, they cannot normally be set or referenced.

5249-E P-115 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

Machine operation During the execution of the touch probe radius compensation cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated below. (1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction. (2) The spindle is oriented. Spindle orientation may be executed after the spindle has rotated a half turn to check the touch probe signal. For details, refer to [6-1. Checking Proximity Switch Operation]. (3) The X- and Y-axis move to the center of the datum hole at a rapid feedrate. (4) The Z-axis moves down at a rapid feedrate until the touch probe ball reaches a point 30 mm away from the datum hole. (5) The Z-axis moves down 30 mm further at a rapid feedrate and the touch probe ball enters the datum hole. (6) Datum hole gauging cycle is executed in the following sequence: X+ direction, X- direction, Y+ direction and Y- direction. (7) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction.

2-2-2. Touch Probe Radius Compensation Operation (MCM Horizontal Spindle) The operating procedure for touch probe radius compensation is described below for the touch probe mounted in the MCM horizontal spindle. For general touch probe radius compensation, refer to [2-3. Touch Probe Length Offset]. Procedure :

1

Mount a datum hole block (master ring) that has an accurately measured φ20 mm or larger diameter hole in it.

2

Accurately align the datum hole center with the spindle center using sling gauge or similar tool. Use the pulse handle for this operation.

3

Set the zero point. To do this, select the zero point setting mode and enter the data using the keyboard.

4

Select the MDI mode and execute positioning to the zero point at a rapid feedrate. At the zero point, check the measured value again.

5

Move only the Z-axis in the positive (+) direction to remove the sling gauge, and mount the touch probe in the spindle. At the POT NO./TOOL NO. TABLE (FIXED ADDRESS) in the TOOL DATE SET screen mode, set HORIZONTAL TOOL USED for ACTUAL TOOL NO.

6

Move the Z-axis in the negative (-) direction to the position where the touch probe ball enters the datum hole.

7

Move the Z-axis so that the touch probe ball enters the datum hole 5 to 7 mm from the datum block upper face.

5249-E P-116 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

8

In the MDI mode, specify “VNCOM[1] = 8” and touch the probe by hand to check if the contact detection signal is correctly turned ON and OFF. The ON/OFF state of the contact detection signal can be checked by displaying the ACTUAL POSITION screen or by observing the indicator lamps on the operation panel.

9

Mount the touch probe in the spindle.

10

Select the automatic mode and execute the following program. CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI=(Datum hole diameter) POVT=3 M02 The command must be specified in the presently selected unit system. When the program is executed, the touch probe automatically enters the datum hole and the radius compensation cycle is executed. [Supplement] To allow the CNC to automatically recognize the direction of the touch probe, the touch probe must be mounted in the spindle in the automatic or MDI mode. The results of the cycle are set for the tool radius compensation number indicated below.

Radius Compensation Data

Direction System Variable M73 (Front)

M74 (Left)

M75 (Rear)

M76 (Right)

X+

-

VSTOD [9]

VSTOH [3]

VSTOD [17]

X-

VSTOH [1]

VSTOD [10]

-

VSTOD [18]

Y+

VSTOD [7]

VSTOH [2]

VSTOD [15]

-

Y-

VSTOD [8]

-

VSTOD [16]

VSTOH [4]

Z+

VSTOD [5]

VSTOD [11]

VSTOD [13]

VSTOD [19]

Z-

VSTOD [6]

VSTOD [12]

VSTOD [14]

VSTOD [20]

5249-E P-117 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION The set data can be checked by opening the MSB TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (VSTOH[N])/MSB CUTR COMP. (VSTOD[N]) pop-up window, shown below.

ME61012R0700400080001

For the procedure for opening the MSB TOOL ON/OFF pop-up window, refer to SECTION 1 [12-3. MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key]. After making sure that the touch probe radius compensation data is set for the tool radius compensation number, proceed to the steps below.

11

Using the hole where the touch probe radius compensation cycle has been executed, execute the ID gauging cycle. For the ID gauging cycle, refer to [2-4. Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Function].

12

On the GAUGING RESULT display screen, compare the anticipated center value with the measured center value to confirm that the difference is less than several micrometers.

13

Remove the touch probe from the spindle and mount the sling gauge instead.

14

Turn the sling gauge at the measured center position and compare the measured center value, sling gauge reading and anticipated center value. Make sure that differences among these three values are less than several micrometers. This completes the touch probe radius compensation operation for the touch probe mounted in the MCM horizontal spindle.

[Supplement] Since cutter radius compensation numbers 1 to 20 for the system are used exclusively used for the automatic gauging function, then cannot normally be set or referenced.

5249-E P-118 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

Machine operation During the execution of the touch probe radius compensation cycle for the touch probe mounted in the MCM horizontal spindle, the touch probe moves as indicated below. (1) The spindle is oriented. Spindle orientation may be executed after the spindle has rotated a half turn to check the touch probe signal. For details, refer to [6-1. Checking Proximity Switch Operation]. (2) The gauging cycle is executed for the datum hole in the sequence indicated below. Touch Probe Direction MCM Horizontal spindle

Gauging Order 1

2

3

4

M73 (Front)

Y+

Y-

Z+

Z-

M74 (Left)

X+

X-

Z+

Z-

M75 (Rear)

Y+

Y-

Z+

Z-

M76 (Right)

X+

X-

Z+

Z-

(3) The Z-axis moves to and stops at the center of the datum hole.

5249-E P-119 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

Touch Probe Length Offset The following describes how the touch probe length is offset. To maintain high gauging accuracy, touch probe length offset must be executed at least once a week.

Reference tool

2-3.

PLI (Approximate length offset data of the touch probe in reference to the reference tool) PEI (Coordinate value of the Z-axis gauging face)

Workpiece

ME61012R0700400090001

The operating procedure for touch probe length offset is described below. Procedure :

1

Position the X-, Y- and Z-axis so that the touch probe comes to the end face where the gauging cycle is to be executed. For this positioning, use a part program (manual or MDI mode operation is also allowed). The distance between the touch probe ball and the gauging face can be any desired distance.

2

Select the automatic mode and execute the following program.

CALL OO10 PMOD=8 PEI=(Z-coordinate value of gauging face) PLI=(Approximate touch probe length offset data) M02 ME61012R0700400090002

When the program is executed, the length offset data of the touch probe is automatically measured. The offset data is calculated so that the result of the gauging cycle executed at the same gauging face will be the value set for PEI and set for system length offset number 5. For MCM, the offset data is set for system length offset numbers 1 to 5 as indicated below Direction No. Tool Length Offset No.

Vertical Tool VSTOH [5]

MCM Horizontal Tool M73 (Front)

M74 (Left)

M75 (Rear)

M76 (Right)

VSTOH [1]

VSTOH [2]

VSTOH [3]

VSTOH [4]

5249-E P-120 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION The set data can be checked by opening the MSB TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (VSTOH[N])/MSB CUTR COMP. (VSTOD[N]) pop-up window, shown below.

ME61012R0700400090003

This completes the touch probe length offset operation. [Supplement] Since cutter radius compensation numbers 1 to 5 for the system are used exclusively for the automatic gauging function, then cannot normally be set or referenced. For the procedure for opening the MSB TOOL ON/OFF pop-up window, refer to SECTION 1 [1-2-2. MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key].

Machine operation During the execution of the touch probe length offset cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated below. (1) The spindle is oriented. Spindle orientation may be executed after the spindle has rotated a half turn to check the touch probe signal. For details, refer to [6-1. Checking Proximity Switch Operation]. (2) The touch probe moves to the gauging face to measure the gauging face. (3) The touch probe moves in the length direction and stops at the previous position. The touch probe does not move in the radius direction for the execution of the touch probe length offset cycle.

5249-E P-121 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

2-4.

Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Function The ID gauging function automatically measures the center position and the diameter of the target hole. This function can evaluate the result of gauging at the same time. The ID gauging procedure is described below. Procedure :

1

Position the touch probe ball at the anticipated center position of the target hole using a part program.

2

Select the automatic mode and execute the following program. CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=(Anticipated hole diameter) M02

3

When this program is executed, the ID gauging cycle is automatically executed. If a touch probe is mounted in the MCM horizontal spindle, the function automatically recognizes the touch probe direction and executes the ID gauging cycle accordingly. [Supplement] To allow the CNC to automatically recognize the touch probe direction, the touch probe must be mounted in the spindle in the automatic or MDI mode. The results of gauging are displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. For the procedure for displaying the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to SECTION 1 [1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging].

ME61012R0700400100001

5249-E P-122 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

4

Retract the touch probe using a part program. This completes the ID gauging operation. Example program

G0 X0 Y0 G56 Z50 H1 M130 GI Z-5 F1000 M131 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=200 G0 Z500 M02

R100

H1: Touch probe tool length offset data ME61012R0700400100002

Machine operation During the execution of the ID gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated below. (1) The spindle is oriented. Spindle orientation may be executed after the spindle has rotated a half turn to check the touch probe signal. For details, refer to [6-1. Checking Proximity Switch Operation]. (2) The function measures the hole ID by moving the touch probe in the following sequence of directions: X+, X-, Y+, Y-, X+ and X-. For the MCM, the order of axis movements depends on the touch probe direction as indicated below.The touch probe stops at the center of the hole obtained as the result of the ID gauging cycle. Gauging Order

Touch Probe Direction

1

2

3

4

5

6

Vertical Spindle

X+

X-

Y+

Y-

X+

X-

M73 (Front)

Y+

Y-

Z+

Z-

Y+

Y-

M74 (Left)

X+

X-

Z+

Z-

X+

X-

M75 (Rear)

Y+

Y-

Z+

Z-

Y+

Y-

M76 (Right)

X+

X-

Z+

Z-

X+

X-

MCM Horizontal spindle

(3) The touch probe stops at the center of the hole obtained as the result of the ID gauging cycle. The touch probe lengthwise direction axis does not move during the execution of the ID gauging cycle.

5249-E P-123 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION [Supplement] 1) When the PMSR command (PMSR=1) is specified, the gauging cycle takes place in the order of 1 to 4 shown in the above table. 2) When the PMTR command (PMTR=1) is specified, the gauging cycle takes place in the order of 1 to 3 shown in the above table. 3) When PMSR and PMTR commands are specified at the same time, the PMTR command takes precedence. 4) Before starting gauging at three points with the PMTR command, bring the probe to the circle center as close as possible in Y direction (Z direction for MCM Horizontal Machining Center). If the probe position in Y direction is far from the circle center, even a distance of several millimeters causes a gauging error of several to more than ten micrometers. For the details of how to set the variables PMSR and PMTR, refer to in (10) PMSR (P MEASURE) and (11) PMTR (P MEASURE THREE) in 5-5-2 “How to Use Variables.”

2-5.

Outer Diameter (OD) Gauging Function The OD gauging function automatically measures the center position and the diameter of a workpiece. This function can evaluate the result of gauging at the same time. The OD gauging procedure is described below. Procedure :

1

Position the touch probe ball to the anticipated center position of the target outer diameter using a part program. In this positioning, move the touch probe ball to a point approximately 10 mm away from the gauging point.

2

Select the automatic mode and execute the following program. CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=(Anticipated outer diameter) *PIN=(Infeed direction feed distance) M02 * PZIN may be used instead of PIN. For argument PIN (PZIN), specify a relative value (a positive incremental value).

5249-E P-124 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

3

When the program is executed, the OD gauging cycle is automatically executed. The results of gauging are displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. For the procedure for displaying the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to SECTION 1 [1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging].

ME61012R0700400110001

10

0

Retract the touch probe using a part program. This completes the OD gauging operation. Example program

R

4

G0 X0 Y0 G56 Z10 H1 CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=200 PZIN=15 G0 Z500 M02 H1: Touch probe tool length offset data

Touch probe PIN(PZIN) In this program, positioning of the Z-axis is executed at a rapid feedrate. ME61012R0700400110002

5249-E P-125 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

Machine operation During the execution of the OD gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated below.

Touch probe a b

PIN(PZIN)

Workpiece OD

c

ME61012R0700400110003

(1) The spindle is oriented. Spindle orientation may be executed after the spindle has rotated a half turn to check the touch probe signal. For details, refer to [6-1. Checking Proximity Switch Operation]. (2) The function measures the hole ID by moving the touch probe in the following sequence of directions: X+, X-, Y+, Y-, X+ and X-. For the MCM, the order of axis movements depends on the touch probe direction as indicated below. Gauging Order

Touch Probe Direction

1

2

3

4

5

6

Vertical Spindle

X+

X-

Y+

Y-

X+

X-

M73 (Front)

Y+

Y-

Z+

Z-

Y+

Y-

M74 (Left)

X+

X-

Z+

Z-

X+

X-

M75 (Rear)

Y+

Y-

Z+

Z-

Y+

Y-

M76 (Right)

X+

X-

Z+

Z-

X+

X-

MCM Horizontal spindle

(3) The touch probe stops at the center obtained as the result of the OD gauging cycle. [Supplement] 1) When the PMSR command (PMSR=1) is specified, the gauging cycle takes place in the order of 1 to 4 shown in the above table. 2) When the PMTR command (PMTR=1) is specified, the gauging cycle takes place in the order of 1 to 3 shown in the above table. 3) When PMSR and PMTR commands are specified at the same time, the PMTR command takes precedence. 4) Before starting gauging at three points with the PMTR command, bring the probe to the circle center as close as possible in Y direction (Z direction for MCM Horizontal Machining Center). If the probe position in Y direction is far from the circle center, even a distance of several millimeters causes a gauging error of several to more than ten micrometers. For the details of how to set the variables PMSR and PMTR, refer to in (10) PMSR (P MEASURE) and (11) PMTR (P MEASURE THREE) in 5-5-2 “How to Use Variables.”

5249-E P-126 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

2-6.

End Face Gauging Cycle The end face gauging cycle automatically measures the end face position in any of the following directions: X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis directions. This function can evaluate the result of gauging at the same time.

2-6-1. X-axis End Face Gauging Operation The X-axis end face gauging procedure is described below. Procedure :

1

Position the touch probe ball near the target X-axis end face using a part program. In this positioning, move the touch probe ball to a point approximately 10 mm away from the gauging point.

2

Select the automatic mode and execute the following program. CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=(Anticipated X-axis end face position) M02 When the program is executed, the direction of X-axis movement is automatically determined and the X-axis end face gauging cycle is then automatically executed. The results of gauging are displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. For the procedure for displaying the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to SECTION 1 [1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging].

ME61012R0700400130001

5249-E P-127 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

3

Retract the touch probe using a part program. This completes the X-axis end face OD gauging operation. Example program

100

Touch probe

PEI

G0 X-120 Y0 G56 Z50 H1 M130 GI Z-5 F1000 M131 CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=100 G0 Z500 M02 H1: Touch probe tool length offset data ME61012R0700400130002

Machine operation During the execution of the X-axis end face gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated below. (1) The spindle is oriented. Spindle orientation may be executed after the spindle has rotated a half turn to check the touch probe signal. For details, refer to [6-1. Checking Proximity Switch Operation]. (2) The X-axis moves toward the target gauging end face and its position is measured. (3) The X-axis returns to and stops at the previously located position. Note that Y- and Z-axis do not move during the X-axis end face gauging cycle.

5249-E P-128 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

2-6-2. Y-axis End Face Gauging Operation The Y-axis end face gauging procedure is described below. Procedure :

1

Position the touch probe ball near the target Y-axis end face using a part program. In this positioning, move the touch probe ball to a point approximately 10 mm away from the gauging point.

2

Select the automatic mode and execute the following program. CALL OO10 PMOD=2 PEI=(Anticipated Y-axis end face position) M02 When the program is executed, the direction of Y-axis movement is automatically determined and the Y-axis end face gauging cycle is then automatically executed. The results of gauging are displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. For the procedure for displaying the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to SECTION 1 [1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging].

ME61012R0700400140001

3

Retract the touch probe using a part program. This completes the Y-axis end face OD gauging operation.

5249-E P-129 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

Machine operation During the execution of the Y-axis end face gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated below. (1) The spindle is oriented. Spindle orientation may be executed after the spindle has rotated a half turn to check the touch probe signal. For details, refer to [6-1. Checking Proximity Switch Operation]. (2) The Y-axis moves toward the target gauging end face and its position is measured. (3) The Y-axis returns to and stops at the previously located position. Note that X- and Z-axis do not move during the Y-axis end face gauging cycle.

5249-E P-130 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

2-6-3. Z-axis End Face Gauging Operation The Z-axis end face gauging procedure is described below. Procedure :

1

Position the touch probe ball near the target Z-axis end face using a part program. In this positioning, move the touch probe ball to a point approximately 10 mm away from the gauging point.

2

Select the automatic mode and execute the following program. CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=(Anticipated Z-axis end face position) M02 When the program is executed, the direction of Z-axis movement is automatically determined and the Z-axis end face gauging cycle is then automatically executed. The results of gauging are displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. For the procedure for displaying the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to SECTION 1 [1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging].

ME61012R0700400150001

3

Retract the touch probe using a part program. This completes the Z-axis end face OD gauging operation.

5249-E P-131 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

Machine operation During the execution of the Z-axis end face gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated below. (1) The spindle is oriented. Spindle orientation may be executed after the spindle has rotated a half turn to check the touch probe signal. For details, refer to [6-1. Checking Proximity Switch Operation]. (2) The Z-axis moves toward the target gauging end face and its position is measured. (3) The Z-axis returns to and stops at the previously located position. Note that X- and Y-axis do not move during the Z-axis end face gauging cycle.

5249-E P-132 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

2-7.

Saving of Gauging Cycle Results The results obtained from the gauging cycle are stored in the CNC memory, and are updated to the new results when the next gauging cycle is executed. This data storage area where the data is updated every time a gauging cycle is executed is called A memory. The CNC memory also has an extra area in which all the results obtained from previous gauging cycles are stored; it can be accessed as required. This data storage area is called B memory. The procedure for transferring the contents in A memory to B memory is explained below. Procedure :

1

Execute a gauging cycle for the first gauging point. The result of the gauging cycle is stored to A memory.

2

Select the automatic mode and execute the following program. This is an example program applicable when the gauging point is on an inner diameter. CALL OO10 PMOD=15 PAXI=3 After the execution of the program, the data in A memory and that in B memory are swapped and the data in A memory is saved in B memory. Axes do not move even if the gauging result data is saved in B memory. The setting for argument PAXI differs depending on the type of gauging cycle. See the table below for this setting.

Gauging Cycle Type

PAXI =

Data Stored in A Memory

3

Center point of X- and Y-axis

5

Center point of X- and Z-axis (Only for MCM horizontal spindle)

6

Center point of Y- and Z-axis (Only for MCM horizontal spindle)

X-axis end face gauging

1

Gauging point on X-axis end face

Y-axis end face gauging

2

Gauging point on Y-axis end face

Z-axis end face gauging

4

Gauging point on Z-axis end face

ID gauging OD gauging

3

Execute a gauging cycle for the next gauging point. The result of the gauging cycle is stored to A memory. Since the previous result of gauging has already been saved in B memory, it is not overwritten by the new result of gauging.

5249-E P-133 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

2-8.

Calculating the Center and Distance between Two Points The center-point/distance (between points) calculation function calculates the center point and the distance between two points, stored in A memory and B memory. The distance is calculated in the X- and Y-axis components, individually. The operating procedure for measuring two points (point 1 and point 2) and calculating the center and the distance between them is described below. Procedure :

1

Execute a gauging cycle at point 1. The results obtained from measurement of point 1 are stored in A memory.

2

Select the automatic mode and execute the following program. This is an example program applicable when the gauging point is on an inner diameter. CALL OO10 PMOD=15 PAXI=3 After the execution of the program, the data in A memory is saved in B memory.

3

Execute a gauging cycle at point 2. The results obtained from measurement of point 2 are stored in A memory.

4

Select the automatic mode and execute the following program. This is an example program applicable when the gauging point is on an inner diameter. CALL OO10 PMOD=14 PAXI=3 For the setting for argument PAXI, refer to the table in 2-7. When the program is executed, the center point and the distance between points 1 and 2 are calculated and stored in A memory. This completes the center-point/distance (between two points) calculating operation. The results of gauging are displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. For the procedure for displaying the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to SECTION 1 [1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging].

ME61012R0700400170001

5249-E P-134 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION [Supplement] Axes do not move during the execution of the center-point/distance (between two points) calculation function. Example program

0

R10

300

Center-point between two points

300

Point 1

0

R15

Point 2

G0 X0 Y0 G56 Z-5 H1 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=200 CALL OO10 PMOD=15 PAXI=3 G0G56 Z10 H1 X300 Y-300 Z-5 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=300 CALL OO10 PMOD=14 PAXI=3 G0 Z500 M02 H1: Touch probe tool length offset data ME61012R0700400170002

5249-E P-135 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

2-9.

Calculating the Center and Distance between Two End Faces The center-point/distance (between end faces) calculation function calculates the center point and the distance between two end faces (distance/center between inner faces, distance/center between outer faces of a projection).

2-9-1. Touch Probe Movements during Gauging of the Distance between Two End Faces (1) Gauging the center-point/distance between inner faces

Skip feed Rapid feed ME61012R0700400190001

(2) Gauging the center-point/distance between outer faces of a projection

ME61012R0700400190002

5249-E P-136 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

2-9-2. Command Format of Center-point/Distance (between End Faces) Gauging Program (1) Gauging cycle for calculating the center-point/distance between inner faces

CALL OO10 PMOD=** PELI=** (PELE=**) (PCE=**) (PGO=*) (PUDT=**) (POVT=**) (VNUM=**) PELI

: Anticipated distance between two end faces

PCE

: Permissible center error

PGO=

1: Touch probe does not stop on occurrence of excessive error alarm. 0: Touch probe stops on occurrence of excessive error alarm.

PMOD= 11: X direction 12: Y direction 13: Z direction PELE

: Permissible distance error

PUDT

: Undertravel distance (safety clearance to the sensor)

POVT

: Overtravel distance (sensor damage prevention distance)

VNUN

: Gauging cycle number

PMOD and PELl must always be designated. ME61012R0700400200001

Variables in ( ) should be designated as needed. (2) Gauging cycle for calculating the center-point/distance between projection outer faces

CALL OO10 PMOD=** PELI=** PIN=** (PELE=**) (PCE=**) (PGO=*) (PUDT=**) (POVT=**) (VNUM=**) PIN:

Infeed direction feed distance ME61012R0700400200002

Other variables: Same as in (1) PMOD, PELI and PIN must always be designated. Variables in ( ) should be designated as needed.

5249-E P-137 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

2-9-3. Gauging Result Display Screen The results of center-point/distance (between end faces) gauging cycle are displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen as shown below. For the procedure for displaying the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to SECTION 1 [1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging].

ME61012R0700400210001

a: EXPECTED CENTER POSITION This indicates the positioning point at the start of the gauging cycle. Coordinate value is displayed only for the gauging axis. b: PERMISSIBLE ERROR (value set for PCE). A value is displayed only when PCE is set. c: MEASURED CENTER POSITION Coordinate value is displayed only for the gauging axis. d: EXPECTED DISTANCE (value set for PELI) A value is displayed only when PELI is set. e: PERMISSIBLE ERROR (value for PELE) A value is displayed only when PELE is set. f: MEASURED DISTANCE Distance (axis component) is displayed only for the gauging axis. g: Result of evaluation “DECISION OK” is displayed if the results of gauging are acceptable. In other cases, alarm contents are displayed.

5249-E P-138 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

2-10. Automatic Zero Offset Function The automatic zero offset function automatically offsets the zero point so that the point measured by the dimension check function will take the desired coordinate values. Zero offset is possible for a desired work coordinate system. Procedure :

1

Execute a dimension check cycle for the point that should be established as the zero point. It is possible to set the center point obtained as the result of center-point/distance calculation function as the zero point.

2

Select the automatic mode and execute the following program. CALL OO20 PHN=(Work coordinate system No. where zero offset is executed) PX=(Coordinate value of X gauging point after the execution of zero offset) PY=(Coordinate value of Y gauging point after the execution of zero offset) PZ=(Coordinate value of Z gauging point after the execution of zero offset)

[Supplement] 1) Specify only the axis (PX, PY or PZ) for which zero offset is required. 2) Do not designate axes in which dimension check cycle has not been executed. 3) Zero offset is not executed unless PHN is designated. An alarm (ALARM-B 2308) occurs. After the execution of the program, the zero point of the work coordinate system specified by PHN is offset so that the coordinate values of the measured point will take the value set for PX, PY and/or PZ. The zero point is not offset for the unspecified axes. The results can be checked by displaying the ZERO OFFSET screen. The axes do not move even when the automatic zero offset is executed. 4) Automatic zero offset is impossible if the CNC is reset after executing the dimension check function. An alarm (ALARM-B 2310) occurs. 5) Execute the automatic zero offset function immediately after executing a gauging cycle (ID, OD, end face) or a center-point/distance calculation cycle. Example program (To set the ID center X=0, Y=0)

300

G0 X0 Y0 G56 Z-5 H1 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=300 CALL OO20 PHN=1 PX=0 PY=0 G0 Z500 M02 H1: Touch probe tool length offset data ME61012R0700400220001

5249-E P-139 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

2-11. Copying the Touch Probe Offset Data The touch probe offset data copying function is valid only for the MCM. This function allows the touch probe length offset/radius compensation data, measured in the vertical spindle, to be used as the touch probe offset data for the horizontal spindle. This function is suitable for operations that require simple operation rather than high accuracy Procedure :

1

Measure the length offset data and radius compensation data of the touch probe by mounting it in the vertical spindle.

2

Select the automatic mode and execute the following program. CALL OO22 M02 After the execution of the program, touch probe offset data set for VSTOH[5] and VSTOD[1] to [4] is set for VSTOH[1] to [4] and VSTOD[5] to [20], where the offset data is set for the individual directions (M73, M74, M75 and M76) of the MCM. The result of setting can be confirmed by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window in the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

ME61012R0700400230001

[Supplement] If touch probe offset data has already been set, the data is updated to the offset data obtained using the touch probe mounted in the vertical spindle.

5249-E P-140 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

3.

Automatic Gauging Function for B-/C-axis, 90° Angular and Extension Attachments (Option) This function executes automatic gauging of the vertical spindle attachment (also referred to as attachment cover), 90° angular attachment, extension attachment, and B-/C-axis attachment mounted in the spindle.

(PAC = 90°) (PAC = 180°)

(PAC = 0°) (PAC = 270°)

Z+ Y+

X+ ME61012R0700400240001

Fig.2-1 Relationship between PAC Angles and X, Y, Z Axes of 90° Angular Attachment

PAC = 90° PAC = 180°

PAC = 0° PAC = 270° PAB Z+ Y+

X+ ME61012R0700400240002

Fig.2-2 Relationship between PAC Angles and X, Y, Z Axes of B-/C-axis Attachment

5249-E P-141 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION [Supplement] 1) PAB index angle should be PAB = 0° or PAB = 90°. 2) The relationships between the items on the ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen and those on the ATTACHMENT SWlVEL COMPENSATION screen are indicated below.

ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen Data for PAC=0 PAB=0 Data for PAC=0 PAB=90 Data for PAC=90 PAB=90 Data for PAC=180 PAB=90 Data for PAC=270 PAB=90

ATTACHMENT SWlVEL COMPENSATION screen H* in LOWER (G185) screen H* in LOWER (G181) screen H* in LOWER (G182) screen H* in LOWER (G183) screen H* in LOWER (G184) screen ME61012R0700400240003

H*: Attachment compensation numbers H1 to H7 If two B-/C-axis attachments are used, set their data for the individual compensation numbers.

5249-E P-142 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

3-1.

Automatic Gauging for 90° Angular Attachment and B-/C-axis Attachment (PAB=90°) The programs for executing the gauging functions are indicated below. (1) Touch probe radius compensation CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI=* PAT=* PAC=* PDI: Datum hole diameter (2) Touch probe length offset CALL OO10 PMOD=8 PEI=* PLI=* PAT=* PAC=* PEI: Z coordinate value of gauging face PLI: Approximate length of touch probe (3) ID gauging CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=* PAT=* PAC=* PDI: Anticipated diameter of target hole (4) OD gauging CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=* PIN=* PAT=* PAC=* PDI: Anticipated outer diameter PIN: Infeed direction feed distance (5) End face gauging (X-axis) CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=* PAT=* PAC=* PEI: Anticipated X-end face position (6) End face gauging (Y-axis) CALL OO10 PMOD=2 PEI=* PAT=* PAC=* PEI: Anticipated Y-end face position (7) End face gauging (Z-axis) CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=* PAT=* PAC=* PEI: Anticipated Z-end face position (8) Additional variables PAT: Attachment swivel compensation No. (1 to 7) PAC: Direction of 90° angular attachment, B-/C-axis attachment (0, 90, 180, 270) [Supplement] 1) The gauging cycle is executed using the vertical spindle if PAT is not specified. 2) The value set for PAC is valid only when PAT is specified. If PAC is not specified, “PAC=0” is assumed. 3) The PAC value must be set meeting the mounting angle of the 90° angular attachment or the B-/C-axis attachment (PAB=90°). 4) There are no other changes in the automatic gauging function.

5249-E P-143 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

3-2.

Automatic Gauging for Extension Attachment and B-/C-axis Attachment (PAB=0°) The programs for executing the gauging functions are indicated below. (1) Touch probe radius compensation CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI=* PAT=* PAV=1 PDI: Datum hole diameter (2) Touch probe length offset CALL OO10 PMOD=8 PEI=* PLI=* PAT=* PAV=1 PEI: Z coordinate value of gauging face PLI: Approximate length of touch probe (3) ID gauging CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=* PAT=* PAV=1 PDI: Anticipated diameter of target hole (4) OD gauging CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=* PIN=* PAT=* PAV=1 PDI: Anticipated outer diameter PIN: Infeed direction feed distance (5) End face gauging (X-axis) CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=* PAT=* PAV=1 PEI: Anticipated X-end face position (6) End face gauging (Y-axis) CALL OO10 PMOD=2 PEI=* PAT=* PAV=1 PEI: Anticipated Y-end face position (7) End face gauging (Z-axis) CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=* PAT=* PAV=1 PEI: Anticipated Z-end face position (8) Additional variables PAT: Attachment swivel compensation No. (1 to 7) PAV: Attachment type (1: Extension attachment / B-/C-axis attachment (PAB=0°), 0: 90° angular attachment / B-/C-axis attachment (PAB=90°)) [Supplement] 1) The gauging cycle is executed using the vertical spindle if PAT is not specified. 2) The value set for PAV is valid only when PAT is specified. If PAV is not specified, “PAV = 0 (90° angular attachment/B-/C-axis attachment (PAB=90°))” is assumed. 3) When a gauging cycle is executed using the extension attachment or B-/C-axis attachment (PAB=0°), always set “PAV = 1”. 4) There are no other changes in the automatic gauging function.

5249-E P-144 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

3-3.

Automatic Gauging for Millac 800 VH and Millac 1000 VH Tools can be gauged when they are in the horizontal or vertical position with Millac 800 VH or Millac 1000 VH. The following section covers automatic gauging for the tool in the horizontal position (A: -90 degree/ B: 90 degree). Automatic gauging for the tool in the vertical position (A: 0 degree/B: 0 degree) is same as the vertical spindle. Refer to the subsection 2. Operation of the Automatic Gauging Function. Make sure to execute tool angle offset for automatic gauging for the tool in the horizontal position (A: -90 degree/B: 90 degree) so that the tool is gauged after offset is compensated.

3-3-1. Gauging a tool with A-axis at - 90 degree for the machine with A and C-axis

A

A

Z

Y ME61012R0700400280001

Specify PAT=1, PAC=270 for the gauging arguments. The followings are the command for various gauging items. (1) Gauging touch probe radius CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI=* PAT=1 PAC=270 PDI: Diameter of datum hole (2) Gauging touch probe length offset CALL OO10 PMOD=8 PEI=* PLI=* PAT=1 PAC=270 PEI: Coordinate value of surface to be gauged PLI: Approximate tool length offset amount for the probe (3) Gauging ID CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=* PAT=1 PAC=270 PDI: Estimated diameter of hole to be gauged

5249-E P-145 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION (4) Gauging OD CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=* PIN=* PAT=1 PAC=270 PDI: Estimated diameter of OD to be gauged PIN: Feed amount (5) Gauging X end face CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=* PAT=1 PAC=270 PEI: Estimated position of X end face (6) Gauging Y end face CALL OO10 PMOD=2 PEI=* PAT=1 PAC=270 PEI: Estimated position of Y end face (7) Gauging Z end face CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=* PAT=1 PAC=270 PEI: Estimated position of Z end face

3-3-2. Gauging a tool with B-axis at 90 degree for the machine with B and C-axis

B

B

Z

X ME61012R0700400290001

Specify PAT=1, PAC=0 for the gauging arguments. The followings are the command for various gauging items. (1) Gauging touch probe radius CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI=* PAT=1 PAC=0 PDI: Diameter of datum hole (2) Gauging touch probe length offset CALL OO10 PMOD=8 PEI=* PLI=* PAT=1 PAC=0 PEI: Coordinate value of surface to be gauged PLI: Approximate tool length offset amount for the probe

5249-E P-146 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION (3) Gauging ID CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=* PAT=1 PAC=0 PDI: Estimated diameter of hole to be gauged (4) Gauging OD CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=* PIN=* PAT=1 PAC=0 PDI: Estimated diameter of OD to be gauged PIN: Feed amount (5) Gauging X end face CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=* PAT=1 PAC=0 PEI: Estimated position of X end face (6) Gauging Y end face CALL OO10 PMOD=2 PEI=* PAT=1 PAC=0 PEI: Estimated position of Y end face (7) Gauging Z end face CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=* PAT=1 PAC=0 PEI: Estimated position of Z end face

5249-E P-147 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

4.

Power ON/OFF Cycle of the Touch Probe This subsection describes the power ON/OFF cycle of the touch probe. The power ON cycle commands are indicated below. (1) MP7 (made by Renishaw) CALL OO16 (2) MP9 (made by Renishaw) CALL OO16 (3) MP10 (made by Renishaw) CALL OO18 (PRS=*) PRS:Specify the spindle index angle. If PRS is not specified, the spindle stops at the orientation position. (4) RMP60 (Renishaw radio transmission system) CALL OO16 PSD=650 (5) The OMI-2T made by Renishaw or a touch probe made by Marposs CALL OO83 The power OFF cycle commands are indicated below. (1) MP7 (made by Renishaw) CALL OO17 (2) MP9 (made by Renishaw) Power is turned off in approximately 3 minutes after power OFF. (3) MP10 (made by Renishaw) CALL OO19 (PRS=*) PRS:Specify the spindle index angle. If PRS is not specified, the spindle stops at the orientation position. (4) RMP60 (Renishaw radio transmission system) CALL OO17 PSD=650 (5) The OMI-2T made by Renishaw or a touch probe made by Marposs CALL OO84

5249-E P-148 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

4-1.

Power ON/OFF Cycle Operation

4-1-1. Power ON Cycle Operation • OO16 [PSD=*] (MP7/MP9/RMP60) Machine operation a.

At the present position, the spindle rotates at the speed specified with PSD. If no PSD command is specified, the spindle rotates at 500 min-1. Note that nothing happens if the power is already ON.

b.

After a dwell for 1.5 seconds, the NC stops the spindle. After another dwell for 3 seconds, the NC checks if the power is turned ON. If the power is OFF, the NC waits until a dwell for 7 seconds ends and performs spindle rotation and stop again. If the power is still OFF, the NC generates the following alarm and stops the machine on the spot. 2305 ALARM-B UNTENDED: gauging impossible 42

c.

This completes the power ON cycle.

• OO18 (MP10/OMP60/RMP60) Machine operation a.

The spindle stops at the specified index position or orientation position, then an M code (M127) is output internally. Note that nothing happens if the power is already ON.

b.

After a dwell for 1.5 seconds, the NC checks if the power is turned ON. If the power is OFF, the NC waits for a dwell of 5 seconds and outputs the M code command again for a dwell of 1.5 seconds. If the power is still OFF, the NC generates the following alarm and stops the machine on the spot. 2305 ALARM-B UNTENDED: gauging impossible 42

c.

This completes the power ON cycle.

• OO83 (The OMI-2T or a touch probe made by Marposs) Machine operation a.

The spindle stops at the specified index position or orientation position, then an M code (M127) is output internally. Note that nothing happens if the power is already ON.

b.

After a dwell for 5 seconds, the NC checks if the power is turned ON. If the power is OFF, the NC waits for a dwell of 5 seconds and outputs the M code command again for a dwell of 5 seconds. If the power is still OFF, the NC generates the following alarm and stops the machine on the spot. 2305 ALARM-B UNTENDED: gauging impossible 42

c.

This completes the power ON cycle.

5249-E P-149 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

4-1-2. Power OFF Cycle Operation • OO17 [PSD=*] (MP7/RMP60) Machine operation a.

At the present position, the spindle rotates at the speed specified with PSD. If no PSD command is specified, the spindle rotates at 500 min-1. Note that nothing happens if the power is already OFF.

b.

After a dwell for 1.5 seconds, the NC stops the spindle. After another dwell for 3 seconds, the NC checks if the power is turned OFF. If the power is ON, the NC waits until a dwell for 7 seconds ends and performs spindle rotation and stop again. If the power is still ON, the NC generates the following alarm and stops the machine on the spot. 2305 ALARM-B UNTENDED: gauging impossible 43

c.

This completes the power OFF cycle.

• OO19 (MP10/OMP60/RMP60) Machine operation a.

The spindle stops at the specified index position or orientation position, then an M code (M127) is output internally. Note that nothing happens if the power is already OFF.

b.

After a dwell for 1.5 seconds, the NC checks if the power is turned OFF. If the power is ON, the NC waits for a dwell of 5 seconds and outputs the M code command again for a dwell of 1.5 seconds. If the power is still ON, the NC generates the following alarm and stops the machine on the spot. 2305 ALARM-B UNTENDED: gauging impossible 43

c.

This completes the power OFF cycle.

• OO84 (The OMI-2T or a touch probe made by Marposs) Machine operation a.

The spindle stops at the specified index position or orientation position, then an M code (M367) is output internally. Note that nothing happens if the power is already OFF.

b.

After a dwell for 5 seconds, the NC checks if the power is turned OFF. If the power is ON, the NC waits for a dwell of 5 seconds and outputs the M code command again for a dwell of 5 seconds. If the power is still ON, the NC generates the following alarm and stops the machine on the spot. 2305 ALARM-B UNTENDED: gauging impossible 43

c.

This completes the power OFF cycle.

5249-E P-150 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION [Supplement] When subprogram OO16 or OO17 is executed, the spindle speed command (S command) value is changed to the speed of PSD (or 500 min-1 if no command is given.) Therefore, the required spindle speed must be specified to start the spindle after the execution of OO16 or OO17. The value range for PSD command in OO16 and OO17 commands is same with that for spindle speed command. Specify the PSD command for the rotation speed that may not damage the touch probe.

5249-E P-151 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

5.

Details The foregoing subsections described the basic operating procedure for using the automatic gauging functions. This subsection gives detailed information on the automatic gauging functions.

5-1.

Touch Probe Movements Touch probe movements are described in detail below, taking gauging for an inner diameter as an example.

(3)'

(3)

(2)' (2)

(1) (6)'

(5)

(6)

(1)'

(5)'

(4)

: Cutting feedrate : Rapid feedrate

(4)'

ME61012R0700400340001

Touch probe movements in the ID gauging cycle consist of six passes (1) to (6), as shown in the illustration above. Each of movements (1) to (6) may be regarded as a single gauging cycle on an end face. Therefore, touch probe movements are explained in detail for a single end face gauging cycle.

PUDT POVT (1) (2)

Position A

Position C

Position B (2)' (3) (3)'

: Cutting feedrate : Rapid feedrate

Anticipated end face position ME61012R0700400340002

5249-E P-152 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

Machine operation (1) The present position of the touch probe when subprogram OO10 is called is stored in the CNC memory as position A. (2) The position distanced from the anticipated position of the end face to be measured by the amount set for PUDT is calculated. This position is taken as position B. If PUDT is not set when subprogram OO10 is called, PUDT is automatically set as 10 mm. (3) If position A is already closer to the anticipated position of the end face to be measured than position B, then movement 4) is skipped and movement 5) is executed. (4) The touch probe advances at a rapid approach speed to position B. If the actual position differs excessively from the anticipated position of the end face to be measured, the touch probe will come into contact with the end face to be measured during the rapid approach movement. If this happens, the touch probe returns to position A at a rapid feedrate and stops there with the gauging impossible error in effect. If the touch probe stops during its advance due to signal reception error (for FM type touch probe), it returns to position A at a rapid feedrate and then advances toward position B once again. If it stops again during this second advance due to signal reception error, it returns to position A at a rapid feedrate and stops there with the gauging impossible error in effect. (5) The function calculates the position beyond the anticipated position of the end face to be measured by the amount set for POVT. This position is taken as position C. If POVT is not set when subprogram OO10 is called, “POVT = 10 mm” is assumed. (6) The touch probe advances at a rapid approach speed to position C. When it comes into contact with the end face to be measured during this advance, it stops at that position. If the actual position differs excessively from the anticipated position of the end face to be measured, the touch probe will fail to come into contact with the end face to be measured even after it has reached position C. If this happens, the touch probe returns to position A at a rapid feedrate and stops there with the gauging impossible error in effect. If the touch probe stops during its advance due to signal reception error (for FM type touch probe), it returns to position B at a rapid feedrate and then advances toward position C once again. If it stops again during this second advance due to signal reception error, it returns to position A at a rapid feedrate and stops there with the gauging impossible error in effect. (7) The touch probe returns at a rapid feedrate to a position 0.5 mm away from the contact detected position. (8) The touch probe advances at a slow approach speed to a position 1 mm beyond the contact detected position on the end face. If the touch probe comes into contact with the end face to be measured again while it is advancing, it comes to a stop immediately. If the touch probe stops during its advance due to signal reception error (for FM type touch probe), it returns to the position 0.5 mm away from the contact detected position at a rapid feedrate. After that it advances toward the end face to be measured once again. If it stops again during this second advance due to signal reception error, it returns to position A at a rapid feedrate and stops there with the gauging impossible error in effect. (9) The touch probe returns to position A at a rapid feedrate.

5249-E P-153 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION [Supplement] 1) The position where the touch probe came into contact with the end face to be measured is the position where the limit switch inside the touch probe was activated. Therefore, the actual position of the ball of the touch probe is 0.1 to 0.2 mm beyond the position where it has come into contact with the end face to be measured. 2) When the gauging cycle has been completed, the touch probe comes to a stop at the center of the hole on which measurement was carried out in the case of ID / OD gauging cycles. 3) For POVT and PUDT, set a value larger than 3 mm.

5249-E P-154 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

5-2.

Approach Speed to the Workpiece The approach speed at which the touch probe moves toward a workpiece is described below.

Touch probe

(1)

(2)

(3) Workpiece ME61012R0700400350001

(1) First approach speed The first approach speed is the axis feedrate at which the touch probe moves to the point “safety clearance” away from the anticipated gauging point. This feedrate is specified as PF1=** when calling a subroutine. The feed override function is valid for this feedrate.

• Approach speed to the workpiece when PF1 is specified X/Y direction: PF1 value Z direction: 1/2 PF1 value

• Approach speed to the workpiece when PF1 is not specified X/Y direction: F4000 Z direction: F2000 (2) Second approach speed The second approach speed represents the axis feedrate at which the touch probe moves from the first approach point to the point where it comes into contact with the workpiece. This feedrate is specified as PF2=** when calling a subroutine. The feed override function is valid for this feedrate.

• Approach speed to the workpiece when PF2 is specified X/Y/Z direction: PF2 value

• Approach speed to the workpiece when PF2 is not specified X/Y/Z direction: F1000

5249-E P-155 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION (3) Third approach speed The third approach speed is the axis feedrate at which the touch probe moves from the point 0.5 mm away from the contact detected position to the position where the touch probe comes into contact with the workpiece again. This speed can be specified with PF=3** for calling a sub routine. The override function is invalid for this speed. - Approach speed to the workpiece when the PF3 command is issued X-, Y-, or Z-axis direction: PF3 value - Approach speed to the workpiece when no PF3 command is issued X-, Y-, or Z-axis direction: F100 An example of OD gauging cycle (CALL O10 PMOD=6)

(1) (8) (7) (2)

(6) (5) (4)

(3)

(9)

G00

(16)

G31

(14) (15) (13)

(10)

(12) (11) ME61012R0700400350002

[Supplement] When the PTCH command (PTCH=1) is issued, the probe touches the workpiece only once. In this operation, the sensor performs only the first and the second approach by skipping the second approach. To set the approach speed with the PTCH command, specify PF3=**. Depending on the PUDT value (safety distance), designation of PTCH command may prolong the gauging time. Note that the gauging accuracy decreases if the PF3 value is too large.

5249-E P-156 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

5-3.

Dwell Time in Work Gauging This subsection explains the dwell time used when the touch probe comes into contact with the workpiece. The dwell occurs in the following three cases: (1) At the 1st touch by the touch probe (2) At 0.5-mm retraction of the touch probe after the 1st touch (3) At the 2nd touch by the touch probe These three times of dwells can be set with the command PDWL=** in calling a subroutine.

Touch probe

(1)

(2) (3) Workpiece ME61012R0700400360001

The setting unit is second. Without PDWL command, all the dwells are set to 0.5 second. [Supplement] The above three dwell times cannot be set independently.

5-4.

Reducing Time before Movement of Touch Probe There is a time lag after the sub program OO10 is called until the touch probe starts moving toward the workpiece. (The time lag depends on the specifications, but usually 0.8 to 1.5 seconds.) To reduce this time lag, specify PQIK=1 when calling a sub routine. When specified, the time lag is reduced and the touch probe starts moving a little earlier. [Supplement] Note that there are following restrictions on use of PQIK=1. • In manual interruption, X, Y, Z-axis shift amount (total) are all cancelled.

• The command is usable only when the probe direction is the same with the vertical spindle. • The command is usable only for an FM type or optical probe. • The variable unit setting (0.001 mm or 0.0001 inch) to be transferred to MSB becomes invalid. (NC optional parameter bit No. 36, bit 0)

5249-E P-157 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

5-5.

Variables Used in Subprograms In this subsection, the variables necessary to make effective use of the automatic gauging functions are described

5-5-1. Table of Subprograms and Variables

Subprogram Name

Variables for which Variables for which Numerical Value Should be Numerical Value Must be Set Set as Needed

Variable which Must not be Used

Datum Hole Zero Point Setting

OO21

None

VNUM:

Gauging cycle number

None

Touch Probe Radius Compensation

OO10

PMOD= 9 VNUM: PDI: Datum hole diameter PUDT: POVT: PTCH: =1 PQIK: =1

Gauging cycle number Undertravel distance Overtravel distance

None

VNUM: PDWL: PF1: PF2: PF3: Touch Probe Length Offset

OO10

PMOD= 8 Z-coordinate value PEI: of datum Z-end face Approximate touch PLI: probe length offset data

VNUM: PUDT: POVT: PTCH: =1 PQIK: =1 VNUM: PDWL: PF1: PF2: PF3:

Probe single touch Time reduction before axis movement Gauging cycle number Dwell time 1st approach speed 2nd approach speed 3rd approach speed Gauging cycle number Undertravel distance Overtravel distance Probe single touch Time reduction before axis movement Gauging cycle number Dwell time 1st approach speed 2nd approach speed 3rd approach speed

None

5249-E P-158 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION Subprogram Name Inner Diameter Gauging

OO10

Variables for which Variables for which Numerical Value Should be Numerical Value Must be Set Set as Needed PMOD= 7 PDI: Anticipated hole diameter

PDE: PCE: PGO: =1

PUDT: POVT: PTCH: =1 PMSR: =1 PMTR =1 PQIK =1 VNUM: PDWL: PF1: PF2: PF3:

Permissible diameter error Permissible hole center position error Does not cause alarm stop on occurrence of excessive error Undertravel distance Overtravel distance Probe single touch Second gauging not executed 3-point gauging Time reduction before axis movement Gauging cycle number Dwell time 1st approach speed 2nd approach speed 3rd approach speed

Variable which Must not be Used None

5249-E P-159 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION Subprogram Name Outer Diameter Gauging

OO10

Variables for which Variables for which Numerical Value Should be Numerical Value Must be Set Set as Needed PDE: PMOD= 6 Anticipated boss PDI: PCE: diameter Infeed direction feed PIN: PGO: distance (PZIN) =1

PUDT: POVT: PTCH: =1 PMSR: =1 PMTR =1 PQIK =1 VNUM: PDWL: PF1: PF2: PF3: End face gauging (X-axis)

OO10

PMOD= 1 PEI: Anticipated X-end face position

PEE: PGO: =1

PUDT: POVT: PTCH: =1 PQIK =1 VNUM: PDWL: PF1: PF2: PF3:

Permissible diameter error Permissible center position error

Variable which Must not be Used None

Does not cause alarm stop on occurrence of excessive error Undertravel distance Overtravel distance Probe single touch Second gauging not executed 3-point gauging Time reduction before axis movement Gauging cycle number Dwell time 1st approach speed 2nd approach speed 3rd approach speed Permissible error of X-end face position Does not cause alarm stop on occurrence excessive error Undertravel distance Overtravel distance Probe single touch Time reduction before axis movement Gauging cycle number Dwell time 1st approach speed 2nd approach speed 3rd approach speed

None

5249-E P-160 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION Subprogram Name End face gauging (Y-axis)

OO10

Variables for which Variables for which Numerical Value Should be Numerical Value Must be Set Set as Needed PMOD= 2 PEI: Anticipated Y-end face position

PEE: PGO: =1

PUDT: POVT: PTCH: =1 PQIK =1 VNUM: PDWL: PF1: PF2: PF3: End face gauging (Z-axis)

OO10

PMOD= 3 PEI: Anticipated Z-end face position

PEE: PGO: =1

PUDT: POVT: PTCH: =1 PQIK =1 VNUM: PDWL: PF1: PF2: PF3:

Permissible error of Y-end face position

Variable which Must not be Used None

Does not cause alarm stop on occurrence of excessive error Undertravel distance Overtravel distance Probe single touch Time reduction before axis movement Gauging cycle number Dwell time 1st approach speed 2nd approach speed 3rd approach speed Permissible error of Z-end face position Does not cause alarm stop on occurrence of excessive error Undertravel distance Overtravel distance Probe single touch Time reduction before axis movement Gauging cycle number Dwell time 1st approach speed 2nd approach speed 3rd approach speed

None

5249-E P-161 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION Subprogram Name Gauging cycle for calculating the center-point/ distance between inner faces

OO10

Variables for which Variables for which Numerical Value Should be Numerical Value Must be Set Set as Needed PMOD: =11 =12 =13 PELI:

PCE: X direction Y direction Z direction Anticipated distance between two end faces

PGO: =1

PELE: PUDT: POVT: PTCH: =1 PQIK =1 VNUM: PDWL: PF1: PF2: PF3: Gauging cycle for calculating the center-point/ distance between outer faces

OO10

PMOD: =11 =12 =13 PELI: PIN:

PCE: X direction PGO: Y direction =1 Z direction Anticipated distance between two end faces Movement in longitu- PELE: dinal direction PUDT: POVT: PTCH: =1 PQIK =1 VNUM: PDWL: PF1: PF2: PF3:

Permissible center error Does not cause alarm stop on occurrence of excessive error. Permissible distance error Undertravel distance Overtravel distance Probe single touch Time reduction before axis movement Gauging cycle number Dwell time 1st approach speed 2nd approach speed 3rd approach speed Permissible center error Does not cause alarm stop on occurrence of excessive error. Permissible distance error Undertravel distance Overtravel distance Probe single touch Time reduction before axis movement Gauging cycle number Dwell time 1st approach speed 2nd approach speed 3rd approach speed

Variable which Must not be Used

5249-E P-162 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION Subprogram Name

Variables for which Variables for which Numerical Value Should be Numerical Value Must be Set Set as Needed

Saving the gauging result data

OO10

PMOD= 15 PAXI: Saving the X-axis =1 data Saving the Y-axis =2 data Saving the X-/Y-axis =3 data Saving the Z-axis =4 data Saving the X-/Z-axis =5 data Saving the Y-/Z-axis =6 data Saving the X-/Y-/Z=7 axis data

Gauging cycle for calculating the center-point/ distance between two points

OO10

PMOD= 14 PAXI: Calculation on the =1 X-axis Calculation on the =2 Y-axis Calculation on the =3 X-/Y-axis Calculation on the =4 Z-axis Calculation on the =5 X-/Z-axis Calculation on the =6 Y-/Z-axis Calculation on the =7 X-/Y-/Z-axis

PE: PXCI: PXCE: PXLI: PXLE: PYCI: PYCE: PYLI: PYLE: PZCI: PZCE: PZLI: PZLE: PGO: =1

Permissible error Anticipated center position - X Permissible center position error - X Anticipated distance - X-X Permissible distance error - X-X Anticipated center position - Y Permissible center position error - Y Anticipated distance - Y-Y Permissible distance error - Y-Y Anticipated center position - Z Permissible center position error - Z Anticipated distance - Z-Z Permissible distance error - Z-Z Does not cause alarm stop on occurrence of excessive error.

Variable which Must not be Used

None

5249-E P-163 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION Subprogram Name Automatic zero offset

OO20

Variables for which Variables for which Numerical Value Should be Numerical Value Must be Set Set as Needed PHN: PX: PY: PZ:

Coordinate system number for which zero point is offset X coordinate value after zero offset Y coordinate value after zero offset Z coordinate value after zero offset

Variable which Must not be Used None

5-5-2. How to Use Variables (1) PMOD (P MODE) Designates the automatic gauging mode. PMOD Setting

Gauging Mode

1

End face gauging cycle (X-axis)

2

End face gauging cycle (Y-axis)

3

End face gauging cycle (Z-axis)

6

OD gauging cycle

7

ID gauging cycle

8

Touch probe length offset

9

Touch probe radius compensation

14

Calculation of center and distance between two points

15

Saving of the measurement results

(2) PDI (P DIAMETER IDEAL VALUE) Sets the anticipated diameter in the ID/OD gauging cycles. (3) PDE (P DIAMETER ERROR LIMIT) Sets the permissible error of the diameter for the ID/OD gauging cycles as an absolute value. The hole dia. error over alarm occurs if: PDE < | PDl - (Actual measured value of the diameter) | The value obtained from the measurement in the X-axis direction is used as the actual measured value. With the horizontal spindle of the MCM, the value measured in either the X- or Y- axis direction is used as the actual measured value. The measured diameter is not evaluated if PDE is not set. In this case, the result of judgment is always OK. (4) PCE (P CENTER ERROR LIMIT) Sets the permissible error of the center position of a circle as an absolute value for ID/OD gauging cycles. The X-axis permissible error, the Y-axis permissible error and Z-axis permissible error cannot be set individually. The excessive off-center alarm occurs when, PCE < | (Anticipated center of X-axis) - (Actual measured center of X-axis) | PCE < | (Anticipated center of Y-axis) - (Actual measured center of Y-axis) | PCE < | (anticipated center of Z-axis) - (actual measured center of Z-axis) | (for MCM horizontal spindle)

5249-E P-164 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION The anticipated centers of the X-, Y- and Z-axis are the actual positions of the X-, Y- and Z-axis when the ID/OD gauging subprograms are called during the execution of a part program. Error in the measured center position is not evaluated if PCE is not set. (5) PIN (P IN)/PZIN (P Z IN) Sets the Z-axis direction infeed distance as a relative value (positive incremental amount) for the OD gauging cycle (6) PEI (P EDGE IDEAL VALUE) Sets the end face position of the gauging target for the X-, Y- and Z-axis end face gauging cycles and the touch probe length offset cycle. (7) PEE (P EDGE ERROR LIMIT) Sets the permissible error of the end face position for an end face gauging cycle. The excessive off-center alarm occurs when, PEE< | PEI - (Actual measured value of end face) | Error in the measured end face position is not evaluated if PEE is not set. (8) PUDT (P UNDER TRAVEL) Sets the undertravel distance as an absolute value. During the execution of a gauging cycle, the touch probe moves to a position a certain amount away from the anticipated contact detection position at a fast feedrate. This amount is set using PUDT. If no value is set for PUDT, the undertravel distance is automatically set at 10 mm. The gauging impossible alarm occurs when the touch probe comes into contact with the workpiece while it is advancing at a fast feedrate up to this position. If an occurrence of this error is suspected, PUDT should be set. Usually, set a value larger than 3 mm. For the designation of PUDT, see examples 1 to 4. (9) POVT (P OVER TRAVEL) Sets the overtravel distance as absolute values. During the execution of a gauging cycle, the touch probe moves to a position PUDT away from the anticipated contact detection position at a fast feedrate. After this positioning, the touch probe moves to a position a certain amount beyond the anticipated contact detection position at a medium-fast feedrate. This amount is set using POVT. If no value is set for POVT, the overtravel distance is automatically set at 10 mm. The gauging impossible alarm occurs when the touch probe fails to contact the workpiece even on reaching the position determined by POVT. If an occurrence of this error is suspected, POVT should be set. For the designation of POVT, see examples 1 to 4.

CAUTION Since the touch probe stops when it comes into contact with the workpiece, setting a large value for POVT will generally not cause a problem. However, it could cause the touch probe unit to strike the workpiece if a contact signal is not output due to the failure of the touch probe itself. When an axis movement command larger than the touch probe stylus stroke is set, the touch probe will be damaged if the contact signal is not output due to the failure of the touch probe itself. Therefore, do not set an unnecessarily large value for POVT. Example 1: PUDT and POVT not designated If PUDT and POVT are not designated, 10 mm is automatically set as the undertravel and overtravel distance. Example program: CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=40

5249-E P-165 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

Anticipated position

Actual position

X30

X40

X43

X50

Touch probe stops if contact signal is not output. PUDT=10

POVT=10 ME61012R0700400400001

Example 2: Only POVT designated Example program: CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=40 POVT=2

X30

X35

X40

X42 Touch probe stops if contact signal is not output.

PUDT=10

POVT=2 7mm

Set so that this distance is smaller than the allowable over-stroke of the touch probe. ME61012R0700400400002

Example 3 Only PUDT designated (PUDT = 15) Example program: CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=40 PUDT=15

X25

X30

X40

X50

Touch probe stops if contact signal is not output. PUDT=15

POVT=10 ME61012R0700400400003

[Supplement] Determine the PUDT value taking into consideration the allowable over-stroke of the touch probe. Example 4: Both POVT and PUDT designated (POVT = 5, PUDT = 15) Example program: CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=40 POVT=5

5249-E P-166 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

X25

X35

X40

X45

Touch probe stops if contact signal is not output. PUDT=15

POVT=5 ME61012R0700400400004

(10) PMSR (P MEASURE) Usually, contact detection is executed two times in the X-axis direction when an ID/OD gauging cycle is executed. If “PMSR = 1” is set, however, the second contact detection cycle is not executed. When the touch probe is set in the horizontal spindle of MCM, the second contact detection cycle in the X or Y-axis direction is not executed. (11) PMTR (P MEASURE THREE) When PMTR=1 is specified in ID or OD gauging cycle, the system measures the diameter only by gauging at X+, X-, and Y+ points. (For MCM Horizontal Machining Center, the system measures the diameter only by gauging at Y+, Y-, Z+ points or X+, X-, Z+ points.) Although the gauging time with the PMTR command is shorter that with the PMSR command, there is a little tendency to cause a gauging error. (12) PTCH (P TOUCH) Usually the touch probe touches the workpiece twice (second approach and third approach). If PTCH=1 is specified, however, the probe touches the workpiece only once (third approach) to measure the diameter. To set the approach speed for this gauging, specify PF3=**. [Supplement] Depending on the PUDT value, designation of PTCH command may prolong the gauging time. Note that the gauging accuracy decreases if the PF3 value is too large. (13) PQIK (P QUICK) There is a time lag after the sub program OO10 is called until the touch probe starts moving toward the workpiece. This time lag can be a little reduced by specifying PQIK=1. [Supplement] Note that there are following restrictions on use of PQIK=1. • In manual interruption, X, Y, Z-axis shift amount (total) are all cancelled.

• The command is usable only when the probe direction is the same with the vertical spindle. • The command is usable only for an FM type or optical probe. • The variable unit setting (0.001 mm or 0.0001 inch) to be transferred to MSB becomes invalid. (NC optional parameter bit No. 36, bit 0) (14) PDWL (P DWELL) Set the dwell time in seconds used when the touch probe comes into contact with the workpiece. The dwell is needed in the following three cases: - At the 1st touch by the touch probe - At 0.5-mm retraction of the touch probe after the 1st touch

5249-E P-167 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION - At the 2nd touch by the touch probe These three times of dwells can be set with the command PDWL=** in calling a subroutine. Without PDWL command, all the dwells are set to 0.5 second. [Supplement] The above three dwell times cannot be set independently. (15) PGO (P GO)

• When “PGO = 1” is set, an alarm does not occur if the results obtained from the gauging cycle exceed the permissible range. When “PGO = 1” is set, judge the results of gauging (OK/NG) in a part program by reading system variable VOK1 after the completion of an automatic gauging subprogram. “VOK1 = 0” when the result is OK.

• Another system variable, VOK2, is also used for storing the result of the gauging cycle. Differing from system variable VOK1, which holds the result of the dimension check cycle executed immediately before its designation, VOK2 indicates, if “VOK2 ≠ 0”, an occurrence that the result of any one of dimension check cycles has exceeded the permissible error in all of the dimension check cycles executed after VOK2 has been reset to 0 (VOK2 = 0).

• In the case of the gauging impossible alarm, zero offset impossible alarm, command missing error alarm or no subprogram function alarm, the CNC is alarm-stopped even if “PGO = 1” is set. When PGO is not set, the CNC is alarm-stopped when the gauging cycle results have exceeded the permissible error also.

Program example with "PGO = 1" setting . . N24 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=80 PDE=0.05 PGO=1.......... ID gauging N25 IF [VOK1 EQ 0] N29 ........................................................ Jumps to N29 if the result is OK. N26 IF [VC930 GT 80000] N100.............................................. Jumps to N100 if the diameter is greater than φ80.05 mm. N27 M0 N28 GOTO N18 ....................................................................... Re-machining N29 M6 N30 T10 N31 G0 X140 Y0 . . ME61012R0700400400005

With the program above, the diameter of the hole finished by boring operation is measured (N24). If the hole diameter is within a specified range (φ79.95 to φ80.05 mm), the machining cycle is continued. If the diameter is larger than φ80.05 mm, the workpiece is determined defective and the machining cycle is halted. If the diameter is smaller than φ79.95 mm, execution of the program is interrupted by the M0 command in N27. This allows the operator to adjust the boring bit, to carry out the boring cycle on the same hole again. (16) VNUM (V NUM BER) Sets the gauging cycle number (range: 0 to 9999). Before the execution of an ID/OD gauging cycle, touch probe length offset, or touch probe radius compensation cycle, the present VNUM value is increased by “1” and the new number is printed as the gauging cycle number

5249-E P-168 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION Once designated, VNUM is automatically increased by “1” at each execution of a gauging cycle to be printed. When the gauging cycle number increases one by one and reaches 10000, the counter is reset and “0” is printed. Then, the number increases one by one from “0” in the same way as explained above. (17) PAXI (P AXIS) Sets the target axes for saving the gauging cycle results or for calculating the center and distance between two points. PAXI Setting

Target Axes

1

X-axis

2

Y-axis

3

X- and Y-axis

4

Z-axis

5

X- and Z-axis

6

Y- and Z-axis

7

X-, Y- and Z-axis

(18) PHN (P H NUMBER) Sets the work coordinate system number for which zero offset is executed using the automatic zero offset function. When PHN is not set, this results in a command missing alarm. (19) PX, PY, PZ These variables set the coordinate values that the actual position should take after offsetting of the zero point by the automatic zero offset function. Set the coordinate value only for the axes on which zero offset is required. For the undesignated axes, the zero offset data remains unchanged. Example:

The procedure for offsetting the zero point of work coordinate system No. 2 so that the center of an inner diameter will have the coordinate values X = 10, Y = 50 is described below.

- Execute the ID gauging cycle. - Execute the following program. CALL OO20 PHN=2 PX=10 PY=50 (20) PXCI (P X CENTER IDEAL VALUE)/PYCI (P Y CENTER IDEAL VALUE) /PZCI (P Z CENTER IDEAL VALUE) These variables set the anticipated values of the center between two points (X-X, Y-Y, Z-Z) in the calculation of the center/distance between two points. When these values are not set, the center position obtained as the result of a gauging cycle result is not evaluated. (21) PXCE (P X CENTER ERROR LIMIT)/PYCE (P Y CENTER ERROR LIMIT) /PZCE (P Z CENTER ERROR LIMIT) These variables set the permissible errors in the position of the center between two points (X-X, Y-Y, Z-Z) in the calculation of the center/distance between two points. Designate absolute values. When these values are not set, the center position obtained as the result of a gauging cycle is not evaluated. (22) PXLI (P X LENGTH IDEAL VALUE)/PYLI (P Y LENGTH IDEAL VALUE) /PZLI (P Z LENGTH IDEAL VALUE)

5249-E P-169 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION These variables set the anticipated distances between two points (X-X, Y-Y, Z-Z) in the calculation of the center/distance between two points. When these values are not set, the distance between two points obtained as the results of a gauging cycle result is not evaluated. (23) PXLE (P X LENGTH ERROR LIMIT)/PYLE (P Y LENGTH ERROR LIMIT) /PZLE (P Z LENGTH ERROR LIMIT) These variables set the permissible errors in the distances between two points (X-X, Y-Y, Z-Z) in the calculation of the center/distance between two points. Designate absolute values. When these values are not set, the distance between two points obtained as the results of a gauging cycle result is not evaluated. (24) PE (P ERROR) For the designation of the cycle to calculate the center/distance between two points, if the same value is assigned to permissible error values of the center position and the distance, variable PE can replace the designation of PXCE, PYCE, PZCE, PXLE, PYLE and PZLE. The following two programs have the same effect. PXCE=0.01 PYCE=0.01 PZCE=0.01 PXLE=0.01 PYLE=0.01 PZLE=0.01 PE=0.01 Note that PE is given priority over PXCE, PYCE, PZCE, PXLE, PYLE and PZLE. Therefore, take care when using PE with other variables. If the setting is, for example, as indicated below PE=0.01 PZCE=0.02 PZLE=0.03 it is the same as PE=0.01 PZCE=0.01 PZLE=0.01 (25) PELI (P EDGE LENGTH IDEAL VALUE) Sets the anticipated distance between two faces. (26) PELE (P EDGE LENGTH ERROR LIMIT) Sets the permissible error between the distance set for PELI and the actual measured value.

5249-E P-170 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

5-5-3. Common Variables for Storing Gauging Cycle Results After the execution of an automatic gauging cycle, the obtained results can be checked by displaying the GAUGING RESULTS screen. In addition to this check, the results can be used in a part program to control program flow and other processing since they are stored in the common variables indicated below. Type of Gauging Cycle

Common Common Type of Gauging Cycle Variable Variable

ID gauging: Center (X)

VS29

Data saving: X-axis data

VS26

ID gauging: Center (Y)

VS28

Data saving: Y-axis data

VS25

ID gauging: ID

VS30

Data saving: Z-axis data

VS24

OD gauging: Center (X)

VS29

Center between two points (X)

VS29

OD gauging: Center (Y)

VS28

Center between two points (Y)

VS28

OD gauging: OD

VS30

Center between two points (Z)

VS27

Type of Gauging Cycle End face gauging: Xaxis data End face gauging: Yaxis data End face gauging: Zaxis data

—

Common Variable VS29 VS28 VS27

—

Note that referencing of the common variables indicated above is not allowed in the usual common variable reference method. To use the data stored in these common variables, move it to other common variables that can be referenced. To reference the end face gauging result in the X-axis direction, move the data to VC1, for example, by specifying “VC1 = VS29”, then read common variable VC1 in a part program. [Supplement] When the CNC is reset or the operation mode is changed to manual after the execution of a gauging cycle, the data obtained in this gauging cycle is cleared. In this case, it is necessary to execute the gauging cycle again.

5249-E P-171 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

6.

Touch Probe Safety Measures

6-1.

Checking Proximity Switch Operation The touch probe signal is transmitted by the proximity switch. However, when chips adhere to the proximity switch, the touch probe signal may not be transmitted. To check if the proximity switch is operating correctly, the following sequence is executed when an automatic gauging cycle is executed.

Machine operation (1) The touch probe signal is checked when an automatic gauging cycle subprogram OO10 is called. (2) If the signal is not output, the Z-axis moves to the travel end in the positive (+) direction and the spindle starts rotating to remove chips. (3) If the output of the signal is not confirmed even after the check above is repeated several times, the operation is stopped by the gauging impossible alarm. If the output of the signal is confirmed, the axes move to the gauging cycle start point at a rapid feedrate. [Supplement] 1) When the touch probe is set in the spindle manually, carry out this operation to confirm that the signal is transmitted even if the proximity switch seems to be functioning correctly. 2) When the touch probe is set in the spindle manually, always orient the spindle before calling an automatic gauging cycle subprogram. 3) With the FM type touch probe, operations of the proximity switch are not checked.

5249-E P-172 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

6-2.

Replacing the Touch Probe Battery The FM type touch probe has a battery incorporated in its body. If a gauging cycle is executed while the battery voltage is low, the touch probe fails to function normally and the gauging cycle impossible alarm occurs. (1) Checking the Battery Press the battery ON switch halfway with the touch probe detached from the spindle. The low battery voltage indicating LED should light in this condition. If it is not lit, replace the battery. If the low battery voltage indicating LED is blinking while the touch probe is set in the spindle, replace the battery soon. (2) Replacing the Battery To replace the battery, follow the procedure indicated below. Take care not to bend the antenna and battery holder while replacing the battery.

Battery ON switch

Cover

Battery and holder Cover clamp nut Stylus

Transmission antenna

Low battery voltage indicating LED There are two types of battery ON switch. ME61012R0700400430001

Procedure :

1

Remove the cover clamp nut and the cover. The battery incorporated in the touch probe body will be exposed.

2

Remove the battery from the battery holder.

3

Disconnect the battery connector and replace the battery with a new one.

[Supplement] 1) Battery type: Type OO6P (9 V, 2 pcs.) 2) Battery life: Approx. 40 hours in continuous use 3) You are recommended to remove the battery from the touch probe unit and store it properly when the touch probe is not used.

5249-E P-173 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

7.

Supplementary Information Supplementary information relating to the automatic gauging function is given below. Before using this function, make sure you fully understand the information below. (1) All commands for programs are given in units of 1 mm or 0.001 mm. Commands should be given in the unit presently selected. Commands cannot be given in units of 0.01 mm. (2) Cutter radius compensation mode cancel command (G40) is executed in an automatic gauging cycle subprogram. Note that S commands may be changed due to the execution of an automatic gauging cycle subprogram. (3) Do not call an automatic gauging cycle subprogram while a shift amount in a manual intervention operation remains. If an automatic gauging cycle subprogram is called in this state, the gauging impossible alarm occurs. (4) The work coordinate system cannot be changed during the execution of an automatic gauging cycle subprogram. (5) The user area for tape storage length, number of work coordinate sets, number of tool offset sets, and common variables is not used in execution of an automatic gauging cycle subprogram. (6) Do not execute an automatic gauging/automatic zero offset cycle while using a local coordinate system or the graphics enlarge/reduction mode. (7) The permissible nesting level of subroutines during the execution of an automatic gauging subprogram is two. Accordingly, nesting of the maximum of six levels is possible only when the automatic gauging function is called. (8) Do not call an automatic gauging subprogram in the machine coordinate system (H0). (9) As with other tools, you are recommended to set the same number as the touch probe tool number for VSTOH[5] as the tool offset number. This facilitates program and other checking since the touch probe length offset data can be checked in the same way as for other tools. (10) When setting a value for POVT, the restrictions indicated below apply. When a 100% feed override is set, the feedrate is F1000. Example 1st Approach Speed (Feed Override Setting)

Min. POVT Setting

F1000 (100%)

2 mm

F1500 (150%)

3 mm

F2000 (200%)

4 mm

[Supplement] The minimum value of POVT varies within a range of 2 to 5 mm depending on the servo characteristics. (11) The diameter of holes or bosses to be measured must be larger than φ20 mm.

5249-E P-174 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION (12) With MCM series machining centers, index the swivel head to the rear position (M75) when setting the touch probe in the vertical spindle. If the touch probe is set in the vertical spindle with the swivel head at a position other than the rear position, an alarm occurs (UNTENDED: gauging impossible 3C). Note that the automatic or MDI mode must be selected when mounting the touch probe in the vertical spindle. (13) With MCM series machining centers, never execute the zero point setting cycle (OO21) for the datum hole with the horizontal spindle. (14) The direction of touch probe mounting in the spindle is determined by the machine model. Therefore, pay attention to the direction when manually mounting the touch probe in the spindle. (15) To check the touch probe function, follow the steps indicated below. a.

After entering “VNCOM[1] = 8” in the MDI mode, press the CYCLE START button.

b.

Manually move the touch probe right and left.

c.

The characters “touch probe” on the screen (position display screen) are highlighted if the touch probe is operating correctly. The data at VNCOM[1] is reset to “0” when the CNC is reset or the operation mode is changed to manual. In this state, the displayed characters do not change even when the touch probe is moved.

CAUTION If the touch probe is manually set in the horizontal spindle of an MCM series machining center to execute the touch probe radius compensation cycle, always set the horizontal spindle tool command on the TOOL DATA SET screen. Otherwise, the Z-axis will move and the touch probe will be broken.

5249-E P-175 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

8.

Program Examples Examples of programs for using the automatic gauging function are described below. These examples may be used for reference when making your own programs.

8-1.

ID Gauging . . N36 T1......................................................................................... (T1: Touch probe) N37 M6 N38 T17 N39 G0 X250 Y190.....................................................................Positioning at approximate center of the hole to be measured N40 G56 Z-10 H1....................................................................... Inserting the touch probe ball into the hole (H1: Tool offset number of the touch probe) N41 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=50 (PDE=0.1 PCE=0.05)........ (PDI: Anticipated ID) (PDE: Permissible ID error) (PCE: Permissible center position error) . . Executes the ID gauging cycle . . N42 G0 Z300.............................................................................. After the completion of the gauging cycle, the touch probe ball remains in the hole. Move the touch probe in the Z+ direction. . . ME61012R0700400460001

Touch probe

(X,Y)=250.190

PDI=50 ME61012R0700400460002

Variables PDE and PCE, specified in parentheses ( ) may be omitted. If they are not specified, however, the errors are not evaluated.

5249-E P-176 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

8-2.

OD Gauging . . N62 T1......................................................................... (T1: Touch probe) N63 M6 N64 T12 N65 G0 X310 Y210 ..................................................... Positioning at approximate center of the boss (OD) to be measured N66 G56 Z40 H1.......................................................... Positioning of Z-axis at a point 10 to several tens of mm above the gauging point (see the illustration below.) N67 CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=50 PZIN=30 (PDE=0.1 PCE=0.05)............ Executing the OD gauging cycle (PDI: Anticipated OD) (PZIN: Z-direction infeed amount) (PDE: Permissible OD error) (PCE: Permissible center position error) . . ME61012R0700400470001

Positioning point before start of gauging cycle Positioning of Z-axis at the gauging level Workpiece to be measured Touch probe

PZIN = 30 mm PDI = 50 mm

For PZIN, set the distance (Z-axis) from the positioning point level to the gauging level. ME61012R0700400470002

Variables PDE and PCE, specified in parentheses ( ) may be omitted. If they are not specified, however, the errors are not evaluated. After the completion of the gauging cycle, the touch probe stops at the center of the measured OD (Z-axis retracts to the positioning point).

5249-E P-177 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

8-3.

End Face Gauging on Z-axis . . N95 T1.............................................................................. (T1: Touch probe) N96 M6 N97 T4 N98 G0 X-25 Y60 N99 G56 Z80 H1

Positioning at a point 10 to several tens mm away from the Z-end face to be measured

N100 CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=35 (PEE=0.1).............. (PEI: Anticipated end face position) (PEE: Permissible error) N101 G0 Z300 . . ME61012R0700400480001

Position the touch probe ball at a point 10 to several tens of mm away from the target end face. After the completion of the gauging cycle, the touch probe returns to the point where the first positioning was completed.

PEI = 35 mm ME61012R0700400480002

Variable PEE, specified in parentheses ( ) may be omitted. If this variable is not specified, however, the error is not evaluated.

5249-E P-178 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

8-4.

Distance between End Faces (X-axis direction) . . N242 G0 X-20 Y60 N243 G56 Z-10 H1

Positioning at a point 10 to several tens of mm away from one of the target end faces (end face A)

N244 CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=0 ........................... End face gauging cycle on end face A N245 CALL OO10 PMOD=15 PAXI=1......................... Storing the result of gauging in B memory N246 G0 Z300 N247 X90 N248 G56 Z-10 H1

Positioning at a point 10 to several tens of mm away from the other target end face (end face B)

N249 CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=70 .......................... End face gauging cycle on end face B N250 CALL OO10 PMOD=14 PAXI=1 (PXCI=35 PXCE=0.05 PXLI=70 PXLE=0.05)............ Distance calculation cycle (PXCI: Anticipated center position) (PXCE: Permissible center position error) (PXLI: Anticipated distance between end faces) (PXLE: Permissible error of distance between end faces) N251 G0 Z300 . . N250 CALL OO10 PMOD=14...................................... No axis moves during the execution of the distance calculation cycle ME61012R0700400490001

End face A

End face B PXCI = 35

10 to Several tens of mm

PXCI = 70

10 to Several tens of mm

Program zero ME61012R0700400490002

Variables specified in parentheses ( ) may be omitted. If they are not specified, however, errors are not evaluated. When measuring the center and the distance between two points, the commands to store the first gauging data in B memory are necessary (Example: N245 CALL OO10 PMOD=15).

5249-E P-179 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION If these commands are not specified, the result of the first gauging cycle is overwritten by the result of the next gauging cycle. For details on how to save the gauging result data refer to [2-7. Saving of Gauging Cycle Results].

8-5.

Automatic Zero Offset . . N412 G0 X40 Y50 N413 G56 Z-40 H1 N414 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=45 (PCE=0.03 PDE=0.05).. ID gauging cycle N415 CALL OO20 PHN=5 PX=0 PY=0.................................... For coordinate system No. 5, the zero point (X = 0, Y = 0) is established at the hole center obtained by executing the ID gauging cycle. (PHN: Coordinate system No.) N416 G0 Z300 N417 X60 Y60 N418 G56 Z-20 H1 N419 CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=-30 (PEE=0.05)...................End face gauging cycle on Z- axis N420 CALL OO20 PHN=5 PZ=0.............................................. For the coordinate system No. 5, the zero point (Z = 0) is established at the end face position obtained by executing the end face gauging cycle (Z-axis). N421 G0 Z300 ME61012R0700400500001

The zero point of coordinate system No. 5 is set at the hole center and the end face (face A). Face A

30 Program zero ME61012R0700400500002

On execution of sequences N415 and N420, no axis moves. Execute the automatic zero offset cycle immediately after the execution of a gauging cycle (ID/OD gauging cycle, end face gauging cycle, center/distance between two points calculation cycle). Since an alarm occurs and zero offset is not executed if PHN is not set, always set it.

5249-E P-180 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

8-6.

Example Program for MCM Horizontal Spindle 4-M20

φ100 2-10 DRILL

φ75

4-M6 Z

X

Y ME61012R0700400510001

5249-E P-181 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

. . N1 G15 H1......................................................... Selecting work coordinate system No. 1 N2 G0 X-500 Y800 G56 H1 N3 T1................................................................. T1: Touch probe N4 M6 N5 T10 .............................................................. T10: φ17.5 drill N6 G0 X0 Y0...................................................... Moving the X- and Y-axis to the anticipated center of the φ100 mm hole N7 Z-5 H1.......................................................... Moving the touch probe ball into the hole (H1: Touch probe length offset data) N8 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=100 POVT=3.... ID gauging cycle at φ100 mm hole (PDI: Anticipated hole diameter) (POVT: Overtravel distance) N9 CALL OO20 PX=0 PY=0 PHN=1................. Zero offset according to the gauging results (PX: X coordinate value after zero offset) (PY: Y coordinate value after zero offset) (PHN: Coordinate system No.) N10 G0 Z100 N11 X75 N12 G56 Z30 H1............................................... Positioning of the Z-axis near the end face (Z-axis) N13 CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=0 POVT=3

End face gauging cycle (Z-axis) (PEI: Anticipated end face position)

N14 CALL OO20 PZ=0 PHN=1......................... Zero offset according to the gauging results (PZ: Z coordinate value after zero offset) N15 G0 Z400 N16 X500 Y800 N17 M6 N18 T11............................................................. T11: M20 tap N19 NCYL G81 G56 R5 Z-58 F90 S450 H10.... Part program for machining at the workpiece upper face ME61012R0700400510002

5249-E P-182 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

. . N49 G0 Z400 N50 X500 Y800 N51 M67 N52 M77 N53 T15 N54 G0 Y0 M75 ................................................ M75: Indexing the swivel head to the rear position N55 G54 X-500 H1 N56 Z-170 ........................................................ Moving the Y- and Z-axis to the anticipated center of the φ75 mm hole N57 X-270 ........................................................ Moving the touch probe ball into the hole N58 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=75.................. ID gauging cycle at φ75 mm hole N59 CALL OO20 PY=0 PZ=0 PHN=2 .............. Zero offset according to the gauging results N60 G0 X-400 N61 Y60 N62 G54 X-300 H1............................................ Positioning of the X-axis near the end face (X-axis) N63 CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=-280 .............. End face gauging cycle (X-axis) N64 CALL OO20 PX=0 PHN=2 ....................... Zero offset according to the gauging results N65 G0 X-400 . . Normal part program . . ME61012R0700400510003

5249-E P-183 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

9.

Examples of Gauging Result Display (1) Result of ID gauging

ME61012R0700400520001

(2) Result of OD gauging

ME61012R0700400520002

5249-E P-184 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION (3) Result of end face gauging (X-axis)

ME61012R0700400520003

(4) Result of end face gauging (Y-axis)

ME61012R0700400520004

5249-E P-185 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION (5) Result of end face gauging (Z-axis)

ME61012R0700400520005

(6) Result of calculation of the center/distance between two points

ME61012R0700400520006

5249-E P-186 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

10.

Alarm List

10-1. Alarm List Name of Alarm

Probable Cause

Measures to Take

UNTENDED: gauging impossible (ALARM-B 2305)

At the end of the gauging impossible Refer to the Gauging Impossible message, the cause code is disCause Code Chart and eliminate the played. cause.

UNTENDED: no subprogram function (ALARM-B 2311)

Although there is no automatic zero offset specification, an attempt was made to call the automatic zero offset subprogram.

UNTENDED: command missing (ALARM-B 2308)

An undefined number was set for variable PMOD.

Check the value set at PMOD.

There is no PDI setting for ID/OD gauging cycle, or for touch probe radius compensation cycle.

For the ID/OD gauging cycle, set an anticipated diameter for PDI. For the touch probe radius compensation cycle, set an accurate ID for PDI.

"ALARM-B 2305 UNTENDED: gauging impossible ××" ↑ Cause code —

There is no PHN setting in automatic Set the work coordinate system numzero offset commands. ber for which zero offset is to be executed for PHN. There is no PEI setting for the end face gauging cycle (X, Y or Z), or for the touch probe length offset cycle.

For the end face gauging cycle, set an anticipated end face position for PEl. For the touch probe tool length offset cycle, set accurate Z end face position data for PEI.

UNTENDED: hole dia. error over (ALARM-B 2306)

The difference between the anticipated diameter and the actual diameter obtained as the result of ID/OD gauging cycle has exceeded the permissible error (PDE).

—

UNTENDED: off centerline (ALARM-B 2307)

The difference between the anticipated center position and the actual center position obtained as the result of the ID/OD gauging cycle has exceeded the permissible error (PCE).

—

The difference between the anticipated end face position and the actual end face position obtained as the result of the end face gauging cycle (X, Y, Z) has exceeded the permissible error (PEE).

—

5249-E P-187 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION Probable Cause

Measures to Take

UNTENDED: center distance error over (ALARM-B 2312)

Name of Alarm

The difference between the anticipated value (center position and distance between two points) and the actual value obtained as the results of the gauging and calculation cycle has exceeded the permissible error.

—

UNTENDED: zero offset impossible (ALARM-B 2310)

Since the results of the dimension check executed immediately before the automatic zero offset function were NG, zero offsetting is impossible.

—

Touch probe battery (ALARM-D 4223)

Automatic zero offset is executed although a dimension check is not executed.

Automatic zero offset is possible only after a dimension check has been executed.

Automatic zero offset is executed after pressing the RESET button following the execution of a dimension check.

If the RESET button is pressed after executing the dimension check, the results of the gauging cycle are cleared and thus the automatic zero offset is impossible. In this case, the dimension check must be executed again.

Replace the battery. The battery incorporated in the Kuroda touch probe has expired. The life expiration signal is turned on. I/O check No. 22 Bit 7 (MX-V series) ON (green): Abnormal OFF: Normal The input bit position varies according to the machine model. For the bit position, refer to the wiring diagram.

5249-E P-188 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION

10-2. Gauging Impossible Cause Code Chart (Alarm B 2305) Code (HEX)

Probable Cause

Measures to Take

Used Subprograms

1

A maker subprogram is called while Call a maker subprogram after selectthe machine coordinate system (H0) is ing a work coordinate system (G15 H1, selected for example).

OO10 OO30

2

The mirror image function is active.

Cancel the mirror image function first.

OO10 OO30

3

Manual shift amount (total) remains.

Cancel the manual shift amount (total) to zero.

OO10 OO30

4

In the G11 mode (parallel or rotation shift of a coordinate)

Cancel the G11 mode first.

OO10

5

In the G51 mode (graphics enlargement/reduction)

Cancel the G51 mode first.

OO10

6

T number is zero (0), or no tool is set.

• Specify a T number.

OO30

• Specify the PTLN command. 7

Specified T number or PTLN command is larger than the maximum offset number.

Specify a T number or PTLN command within the allowable range.

OO30

8

The power to the probe is not on when Check the following: the flash on cycle is attempted. • Is there any obstacle between the receiver head and the probe?

OO15

• Is the spindle index angle for the probe correct?

• Does the receiver head flash? When positioning the Y and Z axes, position them within the range of PCHK from the touch sensor zero point.

9

The offset amount of the positioning point for cycle start from the touch sensor zero point is greater than PCHK (only for Y and Z axes).

A

The touch probe microcomputer stays Check whether chips are accumulating on. on the proximity switch.

B

Check the touch probe battery. The result of the touch probe test is NG. The touch probe signal cannot be confirmed.

C

The touch probe contacts the workpiece while it is being fed at a rapid approach feedrate (X-axis).

With the FM type touch probe, reception of signals is not correct.

OO30

OO10

OO10

• Gauging cycle start point • PUDT setting

D

The touch probe fails to contact the workpiece while it is being fed at a middle approach feedrate (X-axis).

When using the FM type touch probe, signal reception is not correct.

• Gauging cycle start point • POVT setting

OO10

5249-E P-189 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION Code (HEX)

Probable Cause

Measures to Take Check the touch probe battery.

E

The touch probe fails to contact the workpiece while it is being fed at the final approach feedrate (X-axis). When using the FM type touch probe, signal reception is not correct.

F

The proximity switch is not turned on Check if the touch probe has chatalthough the touch probe is brought tered. into contact with a workpiece (X-axis).

10

The touch probe contacts the workpiece while it is being fed at a rapid approach feedrate (Y-axis). When using the FM type touch probe, signal reception is not correct.

Check the following:

The touch probe fails to contact the workpiece while it is being fed at a middle approach feedrate (Y-axis). When using the FM type touch probe, signal reception is not correct.

Check the following:

11

Used Subprograms OO10

OO10

OO10

• Gauging cycle start point • PUDT setting OO10

• Gauging cycle start point • POVT setting

12

Check the touch probe battery. The touch probe fails to contact the workpiece while it is being fed at the final approach feedrate (Y-axis). When using the FM type touch probe, signal reception is not correct.

OO10

13

The proximity switch is not turned on Check if the touch probe has chatalthough the touch probe is brought tered. into contact with a workpiece (X-axis).

OO10

14

The touch probe contacts the workpiece while it is being fed at a rapid approach feedrate (Z-axis). When using the FM type touch probe, signal reception is not correct.

Check the following:

The touch probe fails to contact the workpiece while it is being fed at a middle approach feedrate (Z-axis). When using the FM type touch probe, signal reception is not correct.

Check the following:

15

OO10

• Gauging cycle start point • PUDT setting OO10

• Gauging cycle start point • POVT setting

16

Check the touch probe battery. The touch probe fails to contact the workpiece while it is being fed at the final approach feedrate (Z-axis). When using the FM type touch probe, signal reception is not correct.

OO10

17

The proximity switch is not turned on although the touch probe is brought into contact with a workpiece (Z-axis).

OO10

18

The touch probe contacts the workCheck the following items: piece during the approach to the exter• Start point of the gauging cycle nal diameter in the OD gauging cycle. • Assumed OD value

Check if the touch probe has chattered.

19

PLH is not designated.

Set tool length offset number for PLH.

1A

PDH is not designated.

Set the cutter radius compensation number for PDH.

OO10

5249-E P-190 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION Code (HEX) 1B

Probable Cause

Measures to Take

In the C-axis gauging cycle, contact is Check the following items: detected during the approach to the • Is start point of the C-axis gauging gauging point. cycle correct?

Used Subprograms OO10

• Is PDl value correct? • Is PGI value correct? 1C

Touch probe contact is not detected in X-axis direction motion within the range of PUDT and POVT. (contact value error)

OO100

1D

Touch probe contact is not detected in Y-axis direction motion within the range of PUDT and POVT. (contact value error)

OO100

1E

Touch probe contact is not detected in Z-axis direction motion within the range of PUDT and POVT. (contact value error)

OO100

1F

In the touch sensor zero setting cycle for the vertical spindle longitudinal direction, the cutting tool fails to contact the sensor.

Check the start point of the cycle; is it close to the touch sensor (within 10 mm)?

OO30

20

In the touch sensor zero setting cycle Check the start point of the cycle; is it for the vertical spindle radial direction, close to the touch sensor the cutting tool fails to contact the sen- (within 10 mm)? sor.

OO30

21

In the touch sensor zero setting cycle for horizontal spindle longitudinal direction, the cutting tool fails to contact the sensor.

Check the start position of the cycle; is it close to the touch sensor (within 10 mm)?

OO30

22

In the automatic tool length offset/ automatic tool breakage detection cycle for the horizontal spindle in the radial direction, the cutting tool fails to contact the sensor.

Check the start point of the cycle; is it close to the touch sensor (within 10 mm)?

OO30

23

When the axis moves 0.5 mm in the positive direction from the contact detect point, the probe contact signal has already been on. (X direction)

24

When the axis moves 0.5 mm in the positive direction from the contact detect point, the probe contact signal has already been on. (Y direction)

25

When the axis moves 0.5 mm in the positive direction from the contact detect point, the probe contact signal has already been on. (Z direction)

OO100

5249-E P-191 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION Code (HEX)

Probable Cause

Measures to Take

Used Subprograms

26

When the axis returns 0.5 mm from the contact position detected after approach (X direction), the value is taken as the coordinate value in the workpiece gauging direction again.

27

When the axis returns 0.5 mm from the contact position detected after approach (Y direction), the value is taken as the coordinate value in the workpiece gauging direction again.

28

When the axis returns 0.5 mm from the contact position detected after approach (Z direction), the value is taken as the coordinate value in the workpiece gauging direction again.

29

Check if the anticipated tool length is In the automatic tool length offset/ correct. (for tool length offset cycle) automatic tool breakage detection cycle for the vertical spindle in the longitudinal direction, the cutting tools fails to contact the sensor.

OO30

2A

Check the following items: In the automatic tool length offset/ automatic tool breakage detection • Is the anticipated tool length corcycle for the vertical spindle in the rect? (for tool length offset cycle) radial direction, the cutting tools fails to • Is the cutter radius offset data set? contact the sensor. (for tool breakage detection cycle)

OO30

2B

In the automatic tool length offset/ automatic tool breakage detection cycle for the horizontal spindle in the longitudinal direction, the cutting tool fails to contact the sensor.

Check the following items:

OO30

• Is the anticipated tool length correct? (for tool length offset cycle)

• Is the cutter radius offset data set? (for tool breakage detection cycle)

2C

In the automatic tool length offset/ automatic tool breakage detection cycle for the vertical spindle in the radial direction, the cutting tool fails to contact the sensor.

Check the following items:

OO30

• Is the anticipated cutter radius correct? (for tool length offset cycle)

• Is the cutter radius offset data set? (for tool breakage detection cycle)

2D

In the automatic tool length offset cycle Check if PLI is appropriate. in the X-axis direction (with angular attachment), the cutting tool fails to contact the sensor.

33

In the U-center zero setting cycle, the Check the following items: cutting bit contacts the sensor, or the • Is the sensor zero point set corcontact signal is input, in a sequence rectly? in which the cutting bit should not con• Is the cutting bit free of chips? tact the sensor.

• Is the sensor signal correct?

OO30

5249-E P-192 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION Code (HEX) 34

Probable Cause In the U-center zero setting cycle, no contact signal is input.

Measures to Take

Used Subprograms

Check the following items:

• Is PD value correct? • Is the sensor signal correctly input to the CNC?

35

In the U-center radius adjusting cycle, Check the following items: the cutting bit contacts the touch sen• Is the command value correct? sor while the Y-axis is being fed in a • Is the sensor signal correctly input sequence in which contact must not be detected. to the CNC?

36

In the U-center radius adjusting cycle, Check the following items: the cutting bit fails to contact the touch • Is the U-axis command too large? sensor. • Is the sensor signal correctly input to the CNC?

37

In the U-center radius adjusting cycle, Check if the sensor signal is correctly the cutting bit fails to contact the touch input to the CNC. sensor in the sequence in which the Uaxis adjusted amount is checked on the Y-axis.

38

Check the following items: In the tool breakage detection cycle, the cutting bit contacts the touch sen• Is the sensor zero point set corsor while the Y-axis is being fed in a rectly? sequence in which contact must not be • Is the sensor signal correctly input detected. to the CNC?

• Is the cutting bit free of chips?

• Is the cutting bit free of chips? 39

Check the following items: In the tool wear compensation cycle, the cutting bit contacts the touch sen• Is the command value correct? sor in a sequence in which the Y-axis • Is the U-center bit free of chips? positioning is executed to a point distanced from the current position by the • Is the sensor signal correctly input compensation amount. to the CNC?

3A

Check if the sensor signal is correctly In the tool wear compensation cycle, the cutting bit fails to contact the touch input to the CNC. sensor in a sequence in which the cutting bit radial position is corrected in the U-axis adjusting cycle.

3B

Check if the sensor signal is correctly After the completion of U-axis compensation in the tool wear compensa- input to the CNC. tion cycle, the cutting bit fails to contact the touch sensor in the sequence in which the adjusted amount is checked in the Y-axis movement.

3C

Execute the gauging cycle after indexWhen the gauging cycle is executed ing the swivel head to the M75 (rear) with a touch probe set in the vertical spindle of the MCM, swivel head is not position. in the M75 (rear) position.

OO10

5249-E P-193 SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION Code (HEX) 3D

3E

3F

40

Probable Cause

Measures to Take

Used Subprograms

In the touch sensor zero setting cycle for the vertical spindle in the longitudinal direction on the MCM, the swivel head is not in the M73 (front) position, or the horizontal spindle is being used.

• Execute the cycle after indexing

OO30

In the touch sensor zero setting cycle for the vertical spindle in the radial direction on the MCM, the swivel head is not in the M73 (front) position, or the horizontal spindle is being used.

• Execute the cycle after indexing

In the touch sensor zero setting cycle for the horizontal spindle in the longitudinal direction on the MCM, the swivel head is not in the M76 (right) position, or the horizontal spindle is being used.

• Execute the cycle after indexing

In the touch sensor zero setting cycle for the horizontal spindle in the radial direction on the MCM, the swivel head is not in the M76 (right) position, or the horizontal spindle is being used.

• Execute the cycle after indexing

the swivel head to the M73 (front) position.

• Check if the PAXI data is correct. OO30

the swivel head to the M73 (front) position.

• Check if the PAXI data is correct OO30

the swivel head to the M76 (right) position.

• Check if the PAXI data is correct OO30

the swivel head to the M76 (right) position.

• Check if the PAXI data is correct.

41

Check if the T command is correct. The tool number for the angular attachment is T52 or T53. (For the angular attachment tool, only T51 (90° angular attachment) can be used for tool length offset).

42

The power supply for the optical type touch probe cannot be turned on.

OO16 OO18

43

The power supply for the optical type touch probe cannot be turned off.

OO17 OO19

5249-E P-194 SECTION 3 GAUGING DATA OUTPUT TO FILE

SECTION 3 1.

GAUGING DATA OUTPUT TO FILE

Outline The print statement has been used to output the data and character strings of the variables to the panel CRT. In addition to these output operations, this function allows output of the variables data to a file (MD1:A.MDF).

2.

Parameters

2-1.

NC Optional Parameter Bit No.

bit

Description

16

3

If a print command is issued while the file is accessed in the program operation mode or MD1: does not have enough free area, an alarm C will occur.

Alarm C “3237”

Alarm D “4262”

32

5

The print function outputs data to a file (A.MDF) regardless of the variable data (VPRT) for designating the displaying device.

Does

Does not

5249-E P-195 SECTION 3 GAUGING DATA OUTPUT TO FILE

3.

Designation of Displaying Device The displaying device designation signal is output with a variable VPRT as shown in the table below. Unit of variables data Output device

Minimum unit system

Standard unit system

Not output

VPRT = 0

VPRT = 4

Output to the panel CRT

VPRT = 2

VPRT = 6

Output to the panel CRT

VPRT = 3

VPRT = 7

Output to a file

VPRT = 8

VPRT = 12

Output to a file

VPRT = 9

VPRT = 13

Output to the panel CRT and a file

VPRT = 10

VPRT = 14

Output to the panel CRT and a file

VPRT = 11

VPRT = 15

Note 1 : If a checkmark is set at the checkbox of the NC optional parameter (bit) No. 32 bit 5, data is output to the file (MD1:A.MDF), regardless of the variable (VPRT) for designating the displaying device. Note 2 : The gauging data obtained by execution of an MSB is not output to a file even when the relevant value is set at the variable VPRT. It is output only when a checkmark is set at the NC optional parameter (bit) No.32, bit 5. Note 3 : For the output in minimum unit system or standard unit system, refer to the explanation about the print command of the floating-point variable described in 4-1, *3.

4.

Print Command The value or the character string of the specified variable is output to the panel CRT or a file according to the variable (VPRT) for designating the displaying device. If a variable or a character string is omitted, only a line is fed. The area used to display the variable data and character string are already divided and allocated to each system variable used. If a space is used as a delimiter, the variable data or character string is displayed immediately after the previously printed data without line feed. Command format

Sample statement

1)

PRINT [ ---]

2)

LPRINT [ ---]

3)

SPRINT [ ---] PRINT “ABC”

When the command 1) is specified, the specified variable data and the character strings are displayed with normal characters. When the command 2) is specified, they are displayed with enlarged characters. When the command 3) is specified, they are displayed with normal characters without line feed. Note 1: Even if the LPRINT command (enlarged display) is given, characters are not displayed enlarged on the CRT panel or in an output file but are displayed in the normal size.

5249-E P-196 SECTION 3 GAUGING DATA OUTPUT TO FILE

4-1.

System Variables for Printing

Range

Output example

VINTG Integer type variable [Sample statement] PRINT VINTG

-99999999 to 99999999

“ -99999999” [12 digits]

VNUM [Sample statement] PRINT VNUM

-999 to 999

“NO. 9” [7 digits]

VOK1 [Sample statement] PRINT VOK1

0 to 5, 10 to 15

Normal chars (Enlarged chars) “ ” VOK1=0 (VOK1=10) “ OK” VOK1=1 (VOK1=11) “+OK” VOK1=2 (VOK1=12) “+NG” VOK1=3 (VOK1=13) “-NG” VOK1=4 (VOK1=14) “ NG” VOK1=5 (VOK1=15) [3 digits]

VOK2 [Sample statement] PRINT VOK2

1, 2

“TOTAL OK” VOK2=1 “TOTAL NG” VOK2=2 [8 digits]

VC**, VPRT Floating-point variable [Sample statement] PRINT VC1

-99999999 to 999999999 (Max 8 digits)

In millimeters “ -99999.999” In inches “ -9999.9999” [12 digits]

“--------” Character string [Sample statement] PRINT “ABC”

Max number of characters: 80 “ABC”

#----H Characters displayed in hexadecimal [Sample statement] PRINT #B1B2B3B4H

Max number of characters: 4

“aiue”

*1

: If the variable is EMPTY, a blank “

*2

: For the floating-point variable, the displayed data varies depending on weather the minimum unit system is selected or the standard one is selected for the VPRT that designates the displaying device (see item 3. Designation of Displaying Device).

” is output.

Unit

Description of floating-point variable

Output example

Standard unit system VPRT=4 to 7

Metric

VC**=12.34

12.340

Inch

VC**=12.34

12.3400

Minimum unit system VPRT=0 to 3

Metric

VC**=12.34

0.012

Inch

VC**=12.34

0.0012

*

*3

When a checkmark is set at the checkbox of the NC optional parameter bit No. 3, bit 0, the inch unit system is selected. If not, metric is selected. The data, which can be displayed in minimum unit system, may exceed 8 digits if converted into the standard unit system. In that case, the following indication appears: “ +OVER FLOW” or “ -OVER FLOW” : Only the following codes are output to a file (MD1:A.MDF): space ! ” # $ % & ’ ( ) _* + , - . / 0 to 9 : ; < = > ? @ A to Z [ \ ] a to z { | } The other codes are replaced with “?”.

5249-E P-197 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

SECTION 4

MANUAL GAUGING

1.

Overview

1-1.

Specifications The manual gauging function is used to set the zero point, tool length offset data, etc., using a touch probe or a touch sensor. Differing from the automatic gauging and automatic tool length offset functions, the manual gauging function sets the data in an interactive operation using comments displayed on the screen and also specially provided switches. Therefore, the operator does not have to learn special gauging function programs. This function allows you easy and quick data setting without referring to the programming manual, and can be used effectively in the following cases:

• Setting the zero point or the tool length offset data for machining a one-of-a-kind workpiece • Setting the zero point or the tool length offset data for machining the first workpiece, and beginning production from the next workpiece, using the set data.

• Setting the zero point or the tool offset data when performing machining jobs by interrupting lot production using the same part program.

5249-E P-198 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

1-2.

Overview of Manual Gauging Functions The following is an outline of the manual gauging functions. General configuration of manual gauging functions is shown in [1-3. List of Display Screens].

1-2-1. Work Gauging Function The work gauging function measures the workpiece length, hole diameter, center position, etc. using a touch probe, and executes zero offset. Zero offset is automatically executed after the completion of a gauging cycle. To execute only measurement, skip the zero offset process. This work gauging function provides the following gauging patterns. Choose the appropriate pattern according to the shape of the target to be measured. (1) End face (X, Y, Z) (2) Center of ID (3) Center of OD (4) Center between two internal faces (5) Center between two external faces (6) Inclination and corner

ME61012R0700700030001

[Supplement] Refer to [3-1. Preparation for Work Gauging/Tool Length Gauging Cycles] for the preparation necessary before starting a work gauging cycle.

5249-E P-199 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

1-2-2. Tool Length Gauging Function The tool length gauging function measures the tool length using a touch sensor and executes tool offset according to the result of gauging. Use a reference tool, or a tool of whose length from the gauge line to the tool nose is known, as a gauge.

ME61012R0700700040001

Either of the following two types of tool offset is executed.

• Relative offset type The difference between the measured length and the length of the tool used as the gauge is taken as the tool length offset data.

Reference tool

L

"L" is registered as the tool length offset data. ME61012R0700700040002

• Absolute offset type The length from the gauge line to the tool nose is taken as the tool length offset data.

Gauge line

L "L" is registered as the tool length offset data. ME61012R0700700040003

5249-E P-200 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING [Supplement] Refer to [3-1. Preparation for Work Gauging/Tool Length Gauging Cycles] for the preparation necessary before starting a tool length gauging cycle.

1-2-3. Cutter Radius Gauging Function The cutter radius gauging function measures the radius of a tool with a touch sensor oriented horizontally, and executes cutter radius compensation according to the result of gauging. Use a reference tool or a tool whose radius is known as a gauge.

ME61012R0700700050001

[Supplement] Refer to [3-2. Preparation for Cutter Radius Compensation Cycle] for the preparation necessary before starting a cutter radius gauging cycle.

5249-E P-201 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

1-2-4. Gauging Preparation Function The gauging preparation function is provided to perform the preparatory steps required for the work gauging, tool length gauging or cutter radius gauging function. Execute this gauging preparation function before starting a manual gauging cycle.

ME61012R0700700060001

• Preparation for starting a work gauging cycle Before starting a work gauging cycle, set the length offset data and the radius compensation data (in the four directions X+, X-, Y+ and Y-) of the touch probe. After selecting “A. PREPARATION OF WORK GAUGING/TOOL LENGTH GAUGING”, execute the preparation functions in the order indicated below. a.

A-1. REFERENCE SURFACE SET (REF TOOL)

b.

A-2. TOUCH PROBE LENGTH OFFSET

c.

A-3. TOUCH PROBE RADIUS COMP

[Supplement] 1) Once length offset and radius compensation have been executed for the touch probe, they do not need to be executed every time a work gauging cycle is executed. Execute them from time to time as needed. 2) After a feeler has been replaced or a feeler strikes a workpiece or other object, touch probe length offset/radius compensation must always be executed. 3) To obtain high accuracy in the work gauging operation, the run-out of the touch probe must be minimized.

• Preparation for starting a tool length gauging cycle Before starting a tool length gauging cycle, select “A. PREPARATION OF WORK GAUGING/ TOOL LENGTH GAUGING” then execute “A-1. REFERENCE SURFACE SET (REF TOOL)”.

• Preparation for starting a cutter radius gauging cycle Before starting a cutter radius gauging cycle, select “B. PREPARATION OF CUTTER RADIUS GAUGING” then execute “B-1. REF POS SET FOR CUTTER RADIUS COMP”.

End Face (X, Y, Z) ID Center

Reference Position Setting for Cutter Radius Compensation

Inclination and Corner

Gauging Preparation Menu

Touch Probe Radius Compensation

Center between Two Internal Faces

Cutter Radius Gauging

Touch Probe Length Offset

Center between Two External Faces

Tool Length Gauging

Reference Face Setting (Reference Tool)

OD Center

Work Gauging Menu

1-3.

Manual Gauging Menu

5249-E P-202 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

List of Display Screens The screens used for manual gauging operation and configuration of them are shown below.

ME61012R0700700070001

5249-E P-203 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

2.

Basic Operation Since manual gauging is executed in the manual operation mode, all manual operations, such as rapid feed, jog feed, and pulse handle feed, are permitted during the execution of a gauging cycle. When moving an axis to a position close to the target, move it at a rapid feedrate, and for the detection of contact of the touch probe or touch sensor, move the axis using the pulse handle. The desired manual gauging function can be selected from the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen. Display the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen by following the procedure indicated below, then perform the desired function. Procedure :

1

Select the manual mode.

2

Press function key [F1] (MANUAL GAUGING). The operation mode changes to the manual gauging mode and the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen is displayed.

[Supplement] If function key [F1] MANUAL GAUGING is not displayed, press the [EXTENSION] key so that the MANUAL GAUGING function is assigned to [F1].

ME61012R0700700080001

5249-E P-204 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

3.

Preparation for Gauging The gauging preparation function is provided to perform the preparatory steps required for a work gauging, tool length gauging or cutter radius gauging function. Execute this function before starting a manual gauging cycle by following the procedure indicated below.

3-1.

Preparation for Work Gauging/Tool Length Gauging Cycles Procedure :

1

Prepare a touch sensor, touch probe, master ring and sling gauge.

2

Mount the touch sensor and the master ring on the table.

3

Select the manual operation mode. The screen shown below will be displayed.

ME61012R0700700100001

5249-E P-205 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

4

Press function key [F1] (MANUAL GAUGING). The MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen, shown below, will be displayed.

ME61012R0700700100002

5

Press function key [F4] (GAUGING PREPAR). The GAUGING PREPARATION menu screen, shown below, will be displayed.

ME61012R0700700100003

[Supplement] The comment “MOVE CURSOR AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON” is displayed on a menu screen. When this comment is displayed, the desired item can be selected by using the cursor and the WRITE key as well as by function key operation.

5249-E P-206 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

6

Press function key [F1] (WORK/TOOL LEN). The A-1. REFERENCE SURFACE SET (REF TOOL) screen, shown below, will be displayed.

ME61012R0700700100004

7

Move the table to a position where ATC operation will not cause interference.

8

Move the cursor to “NXT TOOL”, input the tool number of the reference tool and press the WRITE key.

9

Press the 1 CYCLE START key on the ATC operation panel to mount the reference tool in the spindle.

10

Bring the reference tool into contact with the touch sensor by operating the pulse handle. Feed the reference tool with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact. The touch sensor red LED lights when the reference tool contacts the touch sensor.

Reference tool

Red LED (lit)

Touch sensor ME61012R0700700100005

Execute zero offset at this position to store the touch sensor position. System zero offset No. 10 is used exclusively for registering the touch sensor position and not used in an ordinary program.

5249-E P-207 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

11

Move the cursor to “ZERO OFFSET X” and the following comment is displayed. “WRITE A 0”

ME61012R0700700100006

12

Input “0” as instructed by the comment. The zero offset data X is rewritten and the X coordinate value of ACT POSIT changes to “0”. The cursor automatically moves to “ZERO OFFSET Y”.

13

Input “0” for Y also. The Y coordinate value of ACT POSIT changes to “0” and the cursor automatically moves to “ZERO OFFSET Z”. The following comment is displayed when the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET Z”. “WRITE A 0 FOR A REL OFST OR WRITE THE REF TOOL-1 FOR A ABS OFST.”

14

Input “0” and press the WRITE key. The zero offset data displayed on the screen is automatically rewritten and the Z coordinate value of ACT POSIT changes to “0”. The preparatory steps for tool length gauging are now complete. For a work gauging cycle, proceed to the following after pressing function key [F7] (NEXT). [Supplement] If the absolute offset type is selected, the distance between the gauge line and the tool nose is written. In this case, the written value is set for the coordinate value of ACT POSIT.

15

Move the reference tool away from the touch sensor by operating the pulse handle then move the table to a position where ATC operation will not cause interference.

5249-E P-208 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

16

With the A-1. REFERENCE SURFACE SET (REF TOOL) screen displayed, press function key [F7] (NEXT). The A-2. TOUCH PROBE LENGTH OFFSET screen, shown below, will be displayed. Tool length offset No. 21 is exclusively used for storing the touch probe length offset data.

ME61012R0700700100007

17

Move the cursor to “NEXT TOOL” and the following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE NEXT GAUGING TOOL NUMBER AND START ATC 1 CYCLE”

18

Input the tool number of the touch probe as instructed by the comment.

19

Press the 1 CYCLE START key on the ATC operation panel to mount the touch probe to the spindle. The “NEXT TOOL” column now shows NONE.

20

The cursor automatically moves to “TOOL LENGTH OFFSET” and the following comment is displayed on the screen. “PRESS WRITE BUTTON”

21

Bring the touch probe into contact with the touch sensor by operating the pulse handle. Feed the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact. The red LED of both the touch sensor and the touch probe lights when the touch probe contacts the touch sensor.

22

At the contact position, press the WRITE key. The tool length offset data is rewritten. This completes the length offset operation for the touch probe. Press function key [F7] (NEXT) to execute the touch probe radius compensation.

5249-E P-209 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

23

In the state the A-2. TOUCH PROBE LENGTH OFFSET screen is displayed, press function key [F7] (NEXT). The A-3. TOUCH PROBE RADIUS COMP screen, shown below, is displayed with the following comment. “FIND THE REF RING CENTER AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON AT THAT POS”

ME61012R0700700100008

24

Move the cursor to “REF RING DIA”, and the following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE DIAMETER OF THE REFERENCE RING”

25

Input the diameter of the master ring and press the WRITE key. The cursor moves to “REF POSITION X” and the following comment is displayed. “FIND THE REF RING CENTER AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON AT THAT POS”

26

Manually remove the touch probe from the spindle and mount the sling gauge.

27

Bring the sling gauge into contact with the master ring by operating the pulse handle. Align the spindle center with the master ring center by turning the spindle.

Sling gauge Master ring Table ME61012R0700700100009

28

While the spindle center is aligned with the master ring center, make sure that the cursor is on “REF RING CENTER X” and press the WRITE key.

5249-E P-210 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

29

Move the cursor to “REF RING CENTER Y” and press the WRITE key. The ACT POSIT data of X and Y will be “X0” and “Y0”. Note that the Z-axis coordinate value may not be set.

30

Manually remove the sling gauge from the spindle and mount the touch probe.

31

Manually orient the spindle.

32

Manually move the touch probe into the master ring approximately 7 mm by operating the pulse handle, then move it into the X+ side (position 1 in the guide diagram) to make it contact the master ring. Be sure to select the “x1” multiplication ratio to bring the touch probe into contact with the master ring. The red LED of the touch probe lights when contact is detected.

33

Move the cursor to “RAD COMP 1 (+X Ds21)” and press the WRITE key.

34

Repeat the same steps for “RAD COMP 2”, “RAD COMP 3” and “RAD COMP 4”. Note that the ACT POSIT data must be “0” when setting the touch probe radius compensation data as indicated below. ACT POSIT Y = 0 for setting “RAD COMP 1 (+X)” and “RAD COMP 2 (-X)” ACT POSIT X = 0 for setting “RAD COMP 3 (+Y)” and “RAD COMP 4 (-Y)”

35

When the compensation data is displayed for all of “RAD COMP 1 (+X)” to “RAD COMP 4 (Y)”, check the displayed data. Preferably, mutual differences should be within 0.03 mm. This completes the touch probe radius compensation operation.

36

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the GAUGING PREPARATION screen.

37

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen.

5249-E P-211 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

3-2.

Preparation for Cutter Radius Compensation Cycle Procedure :

1

With the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen is displayed, press function key [F2] (CUTTER RADIUS). For the procedure to display the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen, refer to [3-1. Preparation for Work Gauging/Tool Length Gauging Cycles]. The B-1. REF POS SET FOR CUTTER RADIUS COMP screen, shown below, will be displayed.

ME61012R0700700110001

2

After moving the cursor to “REF TOOL DIA”, input the diameter of the reference tool and press the WRITE key. The cursor moves to “REF POSITION X” and the following comment is displayed. “MAKE A TOUCH AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON”

3

Manually orient the spindle.

4

Bring the reference tool into contact with the touch sensor by operating the pulse handle. Feed the reference tool with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact. The touch sensor red LED lights when the reference tool contacts the touch sensor.

5

At the position where contact is detected, press the WRITE key. The data at “REF POSITION X” is rewritten and the X coordinate value of ACT POSIT changes to “0”. The cursor moves to “REF POSITION Y”.

6

Press the WRITE key. The data at “REF POSITION Y” is rewritten and the Y coordinate value of ACT POSIT changes to “0”. The cursor moves to “REF POSITION Z”.

5249-E P-212 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

7

Press the WRITE key. The data at “REF POSITION Z” is rewritten and the Z coordinate value of ACT POSIT changes to “0”. This completes the preparation for cutter radius gauging operation.

8

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the GAUGING PREPARATION screen.

9

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen.

5249-E P-213 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

4.

Work Gauging

4-1.

End Face Gauging (X, Y, Z) End face gauging is used for setting the zero point at the end face. Procedure :

1

With the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen displayed, press function key [F1] (WORK GAUGING). For the procedure to display the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen, refer to [2. Basic Operation]. The WORK GAUGING menu screen, shown below, will be displayed.

ME61012R0700700120001

[Supplement] The comment “MOVE CURSOR AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON” is displayed on a menu screen. When this comment is displayed, the desired item can be selected by using the cursor and the WRITE key as well as by function key operation.

5249-E P-214 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

2

Press function key [F1] (X,Y,Z END FACE). The WORK GAUGING 1. X,Y,Z END FACE screen, shown below, is displayed.

ME61012R0700700120002

The cursor moves to “AXIS SELECT” and the following comment is displayed. “SELECT AXIS BY CURSOR AND PRESS ENTER KEY”

3

Move the cursor to an axis position (+X, -X, +Y, -Y, -Z) as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key to select an axis. The axis name of the selected axis is displayed for “AXIS SELECT” and the cursor moves to “END FACE POS”.

ME61012R0700700120003

5249-E P-215 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING For “ZERO OFFSET NO.” and the “H” number of ACT POSIT, the currently valid zero offset number is displayed. In the example screen above, “H1” is displayed for both items. [Supplement] To execute only a gauging cycle without zero offset, select the zero offset number for which the gauging cycle is to be executed in the MDI mode and perform a manual gauging operation. The following comment is displayed. “TOUCH THE END FACE AND PRESS ENTER KEY”

4

Bring the touch probe into contact with the end face to be measured as instructed by the comment. For this operation, use the pulse handle. Feed the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact. The touch probe red LED lights when it contacts the end face.

5

At the position where contact is detected, press the WRITE key. The end face position in the presently selected coordinate system is displayed and the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET NO.”

ME61012R0700700120004

The following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM THE FORMS THE ZERO OFFSET”

5249-E P-216 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

6

Input the work coordinate system number as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key. The data for all of “END FACE POS”, “ZERO OFFSET”, and “SCT POS” is changed to the data in the selected work coordinate system. When “ZERO OFFSET NO.” is written, the cursor moves to the “ZERO OFFSET” data position.

ME61012R0700700120005

The following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE POSITION OF THE NEW COORDINATE”

5249-E P-217 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

7

Input the end face position data (X, Y, Z) in the new work coordinate system, as instructed by the comment, and press the WRITE key. To set the end face position to “0”, input “0”, and to set the end face position to “-50”, input “50”. The set end face position (X, Y, Z) is displayed at “END FACE POS” on the screen and the ZERO OFFSET data is automatically rewritten. The cursor returns to “AXIS SELECT”.

ME61012R0700700120006

8

To execute the same gauging cycle for other axes, repeat steps 3) to 7) for the desired axes.

9

After finishing gauging for all desired axes, press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the WORK GAUGING menu screen.

10

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen.

5249-E P-218 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

4-2.

I.D. Center Gauging I.D center gauging is used to set the zero point at the center of an I.D. This function calculates the center of the specified I.D. by bringing the touch probe into contact with four points on the I.D. Procedure :

1

With the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen displayed, press function key [F1] (WORK GAUGING). For the procedure to display the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen, refer to [2. Basic Operation]. The WORK GAUGING menu screen, shown below, will be displayed.

ME61012R0700700130001

[Supplement] The comment “MOVE CURSOR AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON” is displayed on a menu screen. When this comment is displayed, the desired item can be selected by using the cursor and the WRITE key as well as by function key operation.

5249-E P-219 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

2

Press function key [F2] (I.D. CENTER). The WORK GAUGING 2. I.D. CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed.

ME61012R0700700130002

The cursor is positioned on “TOUCH POS 1” with the following comment displayed on the screen. “POS. TOUCH PROBE TO AROUND THE CENTER TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 1 TO MOVE X AXIS & PRESS ENTER KEY”

3

Position the touch probe near contact position 1 (position 1 in the guide diagram) and bring it into contact with the I.D. at position 1 as instructed by the comment. Use the pulse handle to move the touch probe for contact detection. Move the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact. The touch probe red LED lights when contact is detected.

4

Press the WRITE key. The coordinate values of the contact position in the presently selected coordinate system are displayed. The cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 2” and The following comment is displayed on the screen. “TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 2 TO MOVE X AXIS & PRESS ENTER KEY”

5

Position the touch probe near contact position 2 (position 2 in the guide diagram) by moving it only in the X-axis direction, and bring it into contact with the I.D. at position 2 as instructed by the comment. Use the pulse handle to move the touch probe for contact detection. Move the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect contact. The touch probe red LED lights when contact is detected. If the Y-axis is moved during this positioning, an alarm occurs and the following alarm message is displayed. 4244 there axis not indicated has been moved This alarm is automatically cleared when the Y-axis coordinate value in the machine coordinate system agrees with the Y data of TOUCH POS 1.

5249-E P-220 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

6

Press the WRITE key. The coordinate values of the contact position in the presently selected coordinate system are displayed. The cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 3” and the following comment is displayed on the screen. “TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 1 TO MOVE X AXIS & PRESS ENTER KEY TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 3 TO MOVE Y AXIS & PRESS ENTER KEY”

7

Position the touch probe near contact position 3 (position 3 in the guide diagram) and bring it into contact with the I.D. at position 3 as instructed by the comment. Use the pulse handle to move the touch probe for contact detection. Move the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact. The touch probe red LED lights when contact is detected.

8

Press the WRITE key. The coordinate values of the contact position in the presently selected coordinate system are displayed. The cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 4” and the following comment is displayed on the screen. “TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 4 TO MOVE Y AXIS & PRESS ENTER KEY”

9

Position the touch probe near contact position 4 (position 4 in the guide diagram) by moving it only in the Y-axis direction, and bring it into contact with the I.D. at position 4 as instructed by the comment. Use the pulse handle to move the touch probe for contact detection. Move the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact. The touch probe red LED lights when contact is detected. If the X-axis is moved during this positioning, an alarm occurs and the following alarm message is displayed. 4244 there axis not indicated has been moved This alarm is automatically cleared when the X-axis coordinate value in the machine coordinate system agrees with the Y data of TOUCH POS 3.

10

Press the WRITE key. The coordinate values of the contact position, in the presently selected coordinate system, are displayed. The cursor moves to “CENTER POS/RAD”.

ME61012R0700700130003

5249-E P-221 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

11

With the cursor on “CENTER POS/RAD”, press the WRITE key. The data is automatically displayed as shown below and the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET NO.”.

ME61012R0700700130004

When the cursor comes to “ZERO OFFSET NO.”, The following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM THE FORMS THE ZERO OFFSET”

12

Input the work coordinate system number as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key. The data of “TOUCH POS”, “CENTER POS/RAD”, “ZERO OFFSET” and “ACT POSIT”, with the exception of “D”, is updated to the coordinate values in the set coordinate system.

ME61012R0700700130005

5249-E P-222 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING When the data is set for “ZERO OFFSET NO.”, the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET X” and the following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE POSITION OF THE NEW COORDINATE”

13

Input the X and Y coordinate values of the I.D. center in the new coordinate system and press the WRITE key. The set I.D. center coordinate values, X and Y, are displayed at “CENTER POS” and the data of “TOUCH POS”, “ZERO OFFSET” and “ACT POSIT” are updated accordingly. The cursor automatically returns to “TOUCH POS.1”.

ME61012R0700700130006

This completes the I.D center gauging operation.

14

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the WORK GAUGING menu screen.

15

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen.

5249-E P-223 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

4-3.

O.D. Center Gauging O.D. center gauging is used to set the zero point at the center of an I.D. This function calculates the center of the specified I.D. by bringing the touch probe into contact with four points on the I.D. Procedure :

1

With the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen displayed, press function key [F1] (WORK GAUGING). For the procedure to display the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen, refer to [2. Basic Operation]. The WORK GAUGING menu screen, shown below, will be displayed.

ME61012R0700700140001

[Supplement] The comment “MOVE CURSOR AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON” is displayed on a menu screen. When this comment is displayed, the desired item can be selected by using the cursor and the WRITE key as well as by function key operation.

5249-E P-224 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

2

Press function key [F3] (O.D. CENTER). The WORK GAUGING 3. O.D. CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed.

ME61012R0700700140002

The cursor is positioned on “TOUCH POS 1” with the following comment displayed on the screen. “FEED THE TOUCH PROBE CLOSE TO THE WORKPIECE POSITION1 TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 1 TO MOVE X AXIS & PRESS ENTER KEY”

3

Position the touch probe near contact position 1 (position 1 in the guide diagram) and bring it into contact with the I.D. at position 1 as instructed by the comment. Use the pulse handle to move the touch probe for contact detection. Move the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact. The touch probe red LED lights when contact is detected.

4

Press the WRITE key. The coordinate values of the contact position in the presently selected coordinate system are displayed. The cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 2” and The following comment is displayed on the screen. “POS. TOUCH PROBE TO AROUND 2 SHOWN IN DRAWING TO MOVE Z & X AXIS TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 2 TO MOVE X AXIS & PRESS ENTER KEY”

5

Position the touch probe near contact position 2 (position 2 in the guide diagram) by moving it only in the X- and Z-axis direction and bring it into contact with the O.D. at position 2 by moving it only in the X-axis direction as instructed by the comment. Use the pulse handle to move the touch probe for contact detection. Move the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact. The touch probe red LED lights when contact is detected. If the Y-axis is moved during this positioning, an alarm occurs and the following alarm message is displayed. 4244 there axis not indicated has been moved This alarm is automatically cleared when the Y-axis coordinate value in the machine coordinate system agrees with the Y data of TOUCH POS 1.

5249-E P-225 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

6

Press the WRITE key. The coordinate values of the contact position in the presently selected coordinate system are displayed. The cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 3” and the following comment is displayed on the screen. “TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 3 TO MOVE X AXIS & PRESS ENTER KEY TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 3 TO MOVE Y AXIS & PRESS ENTER KEY”

7

Position the touch probe near contact position 3 (position 3 in the guide diagram) and bring it into contact with the I.D. at position 3 as instructed by the comment. Use the pulse handle to move the touch probe for contact detection. Move the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact. The touch probe red LED lights when contact is detected.

8

Press the WRITE key. The coordinate values of the contact position in the presently selected coordinate system are displayed. The cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 4” and the following comment is displayed on the screen. “POS. TOUCH PROBE TO AROUND 4 SHOWN IN DRAWING TO MOVE Z & Y AXIS TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 4 TO MOVE Y AXIS & PRESS ENTER KEY”

9

Position the touch probe near contact position 4 (position 4 in the guide diagram) by moving it only in the Y- and Z-axis direction and bring it into contact with the O.D. at position 4 by moving it only in the Y-axis direction as instructed by the comment. Use the pulse handle to move the touch probe for contact detection. Move the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact. The touch probe red LED lights when contact is detected. If the X-axis is moved during this positioning, an alarm occurs and the following alarm message is displayed. 4244 there axis not indicated has been moved This alarm is automatically cleared when the X-axis coordinate value in the machine coordinate system agrees with the X data of TOUCH POS 3.

5249-E P-226 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

10

Press the WRITE key. The coordinate values of the contact position in the presently selected coordinate system are displayed. The cursor moves to “CENTER POS/RAD”.

ME61012R0700700140003

The following comment is displayed. “PRESS WRITE BUTTON”

5249-E P-227 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

11

With the cursor on “CENTER POS/RAD”, press the WRITE key. The data is automatically displayed as shown below and the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET NO.”.

ME61012R0700700140004

When the cursor comes to “ZERO OFFSET NO.”, the following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM THE FORMS THE ZERO OFFSET”

5249-E P-228 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

12

Input the work coordinate system number as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key. The data of “TOUCH POS”, “CENTER POS/RAD”, “ZERO OFFSET” and “ACT POSIT”, with the exception of “D”, is updated to the coordinate values in the set coordinate system.

ME61012R0700700140005

When the data is set for “ZERO OFFSET NO.”, the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET X” and the following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE POSITION OF THE NEW COORDINATE”

5249-E P-229 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

13

Input the X and Y coordinate values of the I.D. center in the new coordinate system and press the WRITE key. The set O.D. center coordinate values, X and Y, are displayed at “CENTER POS” and the data of “TOUCH POS”, “ZERO OFFSET” and “ACT POSIT” are updated accordingly. The cursor automatically returns to “TOUCH POS.1”.

ME61012R0700700140006

This completes the O.D. center gauging operation.

14

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the WORK GAUGING menu screen.

15

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen.

5249-E P-230 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

4-4.

Internal Faces Center Gauging The center gauging function for two internal faces (groove center gauging function) is used to set the zero point at the center of the two internal faces. The function provides two modes of operation to calculate the center - 2-point contact and 3-point contact.

4-4-1. Selecting 2-point/3-point Contact Which of the gauging modes is used can be selected by parameter setting or by using the buttons on the screen.

• Selection by parameter To select the contact mode by parameter setting, use CNC optional parameter (bit) No. 48, bit 3. Without check mark: 2-point contact With check mark: 3-point contact [Supplement] If the gauging mode is selected by parameter, the screen display is not changed unless the screen is closed and redisplayed.

• Selection with buttons For selecting the gauging mode, the [2 POSITIONS] and [3 POSITIONS] buttons are provided on the screen. Select the desired gauging pattern by pressing the corresponding button.

ME61012R0700700160001

5249-E P-231 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING Procedure :

1

Move the cursor to either of the [2 POSITIONS] and [3 POSITIONS] buttons.

2

Press the WRITE key. The gauging mode is selected and the corresponding screen is displayed.

4-4-2. Internal Face Center Gauging in 2-point Contact Mode The function calculates the center of two internal faces by bringing the touch probe into contact with the internal faces at two points. To use this function, the 2-point contact mode must be selected. If the 3-point contact mode is presently selected, change the gauging mode to the 2-point contact mode by referring to [4-4-1. Selecting 2-point/3-point Contact]. Procedure :

1

With the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen displayed, press function key [F1] (WORK GAUGING). For the procedure to display the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen, refer to [2. Basic Operation]. The WORK GAUGING menu screen, shown below, will be displayed.

ME61012R0700700170001

[Supplement] The comment “MOVE CURSOR AND PRESS ENTER KEY” is displayed on a menu screen. When this comment is displayed, the desired item can be selected by using the cursor and the WRITE key as well as by function key operation.

5249-E P-232 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

2

Press function key [F4] (INT END CENTER). The WORK GAUGING 4. INT END CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed.

ME61012R0700700170002

The following comment is displayed on the screen. “SELECT AXIS BY CURSOR AND PRESS ENTER KEY”

3

Select the axis (X or Y) used for gauging and press the WRITE key as instructed by the comment. The selected axis is displayed at “AXIS SELECT” and the cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 1”.

ME61012R0700700170003

The following comment is displayed on the screen. “TOUCH THE END FACE AND PRESS ENTER KEY”.

5249-E P-233 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

4

Move the touch probe in the selected axis direction using the pulse handle to bring it into contact with the end face. Move the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting for contact detection. The touch probe red LED lights when the touch probe contacts the end face.

5

At the position where contact is detected, press the WRITE key. The end face position in the presently selected coordinate system is displayed and the cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 2”.

6

Perform a similar operation to make the touch probe contact the other end face, then press the WRITE key. When position 2 is set, the cursor moves to “CENTER POS”.

ME61012R0700700170004

The following comment is displayed. “PRESS ENTER KEY”

5249-E P-234 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

7

Press the WRITE key as instructed by the comment. The coordinate values of the center position are automatically displayed and the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET NO.”.

ME61012R0700700170005

The following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM THE FORMS THE ZERO OFFSET”

5249-E P-235 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

8

Input the work coordinate system number as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key. The data of “TOUCH POS 1, 2”, “CENTER POS”, “ZERO OFFSET” and “ACT POSIT”, with the exception of “L”, is updated to the coordinate values in the set coordinate system. When the data is set for “ZERO OFFSET NO.”, the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET X” and the following comment is displayed.

ME61012R0700700170006

“WRITE THE POSITION OF THE NEW COORDINATE”

5249-E P-236 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

9

Input the X and Y coordinate values of the center position between two internal faces in the new coordinate system and press the WRITE key. The set center coordinate values, X and Y, are displayed at “CENTER POS” and the data of “TOUCH POS 1, 2”, “ZERO OFFSET” and “ACT POSIT” are updated accordingly. The cursor automatically returns to “AXIS SELECT”.

ME61012R0700700170007

This completes the internal face center gauging operation.

10

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the WORK GAUGING menu screen.

11

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen.

5249-E P-237 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

4-4-3. Internal Face Center Gauging in 3-point Contact Mode This function calculates the center of two internal faces by bringing the touch probe into contact with the internal faces at three points. To use this function, the 3-point contact mode must be selected. If the 2-point contact mode is presently selected, change the gauging mode to the 3-point contact mode by referring to [4-4-1. Selecting 2-point/3-point Contact]. [Supplement] Even if the 3-point contact mode is selected, it is possible to calculate the center position by bringing the touch probe into contact with the internal faces at two points. For details, refer to [44-4. Gauging only Two Points in 3-Point Contact Mode]. Procedure :

1

With the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen displayed, press function key [F1] (WORK GAUGING). For the procedure to display the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen, refer to [2. Basic Operation]. The WORK GAUGING menu screen, shown below, will be displayed.

ME61012R0700700180001

[Supplement] The comment “MOVE CURSOR AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON” is displayed on a menu screen. When this comment is displayed, the desired item can be selected by using the cursor and the WRITE key as well as by function key operation.

5249-E P-238 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

2

Press function key [F4] (INT END CENTER). The WORK GAUGING 4. INT END CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed with the cursor positioned at “TOUCH POS 1”.

ME61012R0700700180002

The following comment is displayed on the screen. “TOUCH THE END FACE AND PRESS ENTER KEY IF 2 POSITIONS GAUGING, SELECT AXIS” [Supplement] To execute gauging with touch probe contact at only two points, move the cursor “AXIS SELECT”, select an axis (X or Y), then move the cursor “TOUCH POS 1” again.

3

Move the touch probe in the selected axis direction using the pulse handle to bring it into contact with the internal face at position 1 (position 1 in the guide diagram). Move the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting for contact detection. The touch probe red LED lights when the touch probe detects a contact.

4

At the position where the contact is detected, press the WRITE key. The end face position in the presently selected coordinate system is displayed and the cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 2”. The following comment is displayed. “TOUCH THE END FACE AND PRESS ENTER KEY IF SELECTING 2 POSITIONS GAUGING, DON’T GAUGE THIS POSITION”

5249-E P-239 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

5

Perform a similar operation to make the touch probe contact position 2 and position 3 (positions 2 and 3 in the guide diagram). [Supplement] 1) At positions 1 and 2, gauging is executed on one internal face, and at position 3, gauging is executed on the other internal face that is parallel to the first internal face. 2) To execute this gauging operation by bringing the touch probe into contact with the internal faces at two points, skip the contact at position 2 (TOUCH POS 2). When positions 2 and 3 are set, the cursor moves to “CENTER POS”.

ME61012R0700700180003

The following comment is displayed. “PRESS ENTER KEY”

5249-E P-240 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

6

Press the WRITE key as instructed by the comment. The data is automatically displayed for “CENTER POS”, “distance between end faces (L)” and “inclination angle (β)”, then the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET NO.”.

ME61012R0700700180004

The data is obtained in the manner indicated below for each item. CENTER POS:

The center position between positions 1 and 3 is calculated assuming that the end faces are parallel to each other.

Distance between end faces (L):

The distance between two end faces in the right angle direction to the faces is calculated assuming that the inclined face gauged at positions 1 and 2 and the other face gauged at position 3 are parallel with each other.

Inclination angle (β):

The angle made between the inclined face gauged at positions 1 and 2, and the X-axis is calculated.

The following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM THE FORMS THE ZERO OFFSET”

5249-E P-241 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

7

Input the work coordinate system number as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key. The input number is displayed at “ZERO OFFSET NO.” and the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET” data position.

ME61012R0700700180005

The following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE POSITION OF THE NEW COORDINATE”

5249-E P-242 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

8

Input the X and Y coordinate values of the center position between two end faces in the new coordinate system and press the WRITE key. The set center coordinate values, X and Y, are displayed at “CENTER POS” and the data of “TOUCH POS”, “ZERO OFFSET” and “ACT POSIT” are updated accordingly. The cursor automatically returns to “AXIS SELECT”.

ME61012R0700700180006

This completes the internal face center gauging (3-point contact mode) operation.

9 10

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the WORK GAUGING menu screen. Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen.

5249-E P-243 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

4-4-4. Gauging only Two Points in 3-Point Contact Mode To obtain the center position by bringing the touch probe into contact at only two points after selecting the 3-point contact mode, the operation procedure differs from the normal gauging operation in the following points.

• Selection of an axis is necessary. • Contact detection is not carried out at position 2 but must be carried out at positions 1 and 3. • “Center position”, “distance between end faces” and “inclination angle” are calculated as indicated below. Center position:

The center between positions 1 and 3

Distance between end faces (L): Distance between positions 1 and 3 Inclination angle (β):

If the X-axis is selected for “AXIS SELECT”, this angle is 90°. If the Y-axis is selected for “AXIS SELECT”, this angle is 0°.

[Supplement] To execute gauging at only two points although the 3-point contact mode is selected, no data must be displayed for “TOUCH POS 2” (immediately after the data is cleared or the start of this gauging operation). For details of operation, refer to [4-4-3. Internal Face Center Gauging in 3-point Contact Mode].

5249-E P-244 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

4-5.

External Faces Center Gauging The center gauging function for two external faces (projection center gauging function) is used to set the zero point at the center of the two external faces. The function provides two modes of operation to calculate the center - 2-point contact and 3-point contact.

4-5-1. Selecting 2-point/3-point Contact Which of the gauging modes is used can be selected by parameter setting or by using the buttons on the screen.

• Selection by parameter To select the contact mode by parameter setting, use CNC optional parameter (bit) No. 48, bit 3. Without check mark: 2-point contact With check mark: 3-point contact [Supplement] If the gauging mode is selected by parameter, the screen display is not changed unless the screen is closed and redisplayed.

• Selection with buttons For selecting the gauging mode, the [2 POSITIONS] and [3 POSITIONS] buttons are provided on the screen. Select the desired gauging pattern by pressing the corresponding button.

ME61012R0700700210001

Procedure :

1

Move the cursor to either of the [2 POSITIONS] and [3 POSITIONS] buttons.

2

Press the WRITE key. The gauging mode is selected and the corresponding screen is displayed.

5249-E P-245 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

4-5-2. External Face Center Gauging in 2-point Contact Mode The function calculates the center of two external faces by bringing the touch probe into contact with the external faces at two points. To use this function, the 2-point contact mode must be selected. If the 3-point contact mode is presently selected, change the gauging mode to the 2-point contact mode by referring to [4-5-1. Selecting 2-point/3-point Contact]. Procedure :

1

With the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen displayed, press function key [F1] (WORK GAUGING). For the procedure to display the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen, refer to [2. Basic Operation]. The WORK GAUGING menu screen, shown below, will be displayed.

ME61012R0700700220001

[Supplement] The comment “MOVE CURSOR AND PRESS ENTER KEY” is displayed on a menu screen. When this comment is displayed, the desired item can be selected by using the cursor and the WRITE key as well as by function key operation.

5249-E P-246 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

2

Press function key [F5] (EXT END CENTER). The WORK GAUGING 5. EXT END CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed.

ME61012R0700700220002

The following comment is displayed on the screen. “SELECT AXIS BY CURSOR AND PRESS ENTER KEY”

3

Select the axis (X or Y) used for gauging and press the WRITE key as instructed by the comment. The selected axis is displayed at “AXIS SELECT” and the cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 1”.

ME61012R0700700220003

The following comment is displayed on the screen. “TOUCH THE END FACE AND PRESS ENTER KEY”.

5249-E P-247 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

4

Move the touch probe in the selected axis direction using the pulse handle to bring it into contact with the end face. Move the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting for contact detection. The touch probe red LED lights when the touch probe contacts the end face.

5

At the position where contact is detected, press the WRITE key. The end face position in the presently selected coordinate system is displayed and the cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 2”.

6

Perform a similar operation to make the touch probe contact the other end face, then press the WRITE key. When the position 2 is set, the cursor moves to “CENTER POS”.

ME61012R0700700220004

The following comment is displayed. “PRESS ENTER KEY”

5249-E P-248 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

7

Press the WRITE key as instructed by the comment. The coordinate values of the center position are automatically displayed and the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET NO.”.

ME61012R0700700220005

The following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM THE FORMS THE ZERO OFFSET”

5249-E P-249 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

8

Input the work coordinate system number as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key. The data of “TOUCH POS”, “CENTER POS”, “ZERO OFFSET” and “ACT POSIT”, with an exception of “L”, is updated to the coordinate values in the set coordinate system. When the data is set for “ZERO OFFSET NO.”, the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET X”,

ME61012R0700700220006

The following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE POSITION OF THE NEW COORDINATE”

5249-E P-250 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

9

Input the X and Y coordinate values of the center position between two external faces in the new coordinate system and press the WRITE key. The set center coordinate values, X and Y, are displayed at “CENTER POS” and the data of “TOUCH POS”, “ZERO OFFSET” and “ACT POSIT” are updated accordingly. The cursor automatically returns to “AXIS SELECT”.

ME61012R0700700220007

This completes the external face center gauging operation.

10

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the WORK GAUGING menu screen.

11

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen.

5249-E P-251 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

4-5-3. External Face Center Gauging in 3-point Contact Mode The function calculates the center of two external faces by bringing the touch probe into contact with the external faces at three points. To use this function, the 3-point contact mode must be selected. If the 2-point contact mode is presently selected, change the gauging mode to the 3-point contact mode by referring to [4-5-1. Selecting 2-point/3-point Contact]. [Supplement] Even if the 3-point contact mode is selected, it is possible to calculate the center position by bringing the touch probe into contact with the external faces at two points. For details, refer to [45-4. Gauging only Two Points in 3-Point Contact Mode]. Procedure :

1

With the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen displayed, press function key [F1] (WORK GAUGING). For the procedure to display the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen, refer to [2. Basic Operation]. The WORK GAUGING menu screen, shown below, will be displayed.

ME61012R0700700230001

[Supplement] The comment “MOVE CURSOR AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON” is displayed on a menu screen. When this comment is displayed, the desired item can be selected by using the cursor and the WRITE key as well as by function key operation.

5249-E P-252 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

2

Press function key [F5] (EXT END CENTER). The WORK GAUGING 5. EXT END CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed with the cursor positioned at “TOUCH POS 1”.

ME61012R0700700230002

The following comment is displayed on the screen. “TOUCH THE END FACE AND PRESS ENTER KEY IF 2 POSITIONS GAUGING, SELECT AXIS” [Supplement] To execute gauging by making the touch probe contact only at two points, move the cursor “AXIS SELECT”, select an axis (X or Y), then move the cursor “TOUCH POS 1” again.

3

Move the touch probe in the selected axis direction using the pulse handle to bring it into contact with the internal face at position 1 (position 1 in the guide diagram). Move the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting for contact detection. The touch probe red LED lights when the touch probe detects a contact.

4

At the position where the contact is detected, press the WRITE key. The end face position in the presently selected coordinate system is displayed and the cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 2”. The following comment is displayed. “TOUCH THE END FACE AND PRESS ENTER KEY IF SELECTING 2 POSITIONS GAUGING, DON’T GAUGE THIS POSITION”

5249-E P-253 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

5

Perform a similar operation to make the touch probe contact position 2 and position 3 (positions 2 and 3 in the guide diagram). [Supplement] 1) At positions 1 and 2, gauging is executed on one internal face, and at position 3, gauging is executed on the other internal face that is parallel to the first internal face. 2) To execute this gauging operation by bringing the touch probe into contact with the external faces at two points, skip the contact at position 2 (TOUCH POS 2). When positions 2 and 3 are set, the cursor moves to “CENTER POS”.

ME61012R0700700230003

The following comment is displayed “PRESS ENTER KEY”

5249-E P-254 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

6

Press the WRITE key as instructed by the comment. The data is automatically displayed for “CENTER POS”, “distance between end faces (L)” and “inclination angle (b)”, then the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET NO.”.

ME61012R0700700230004

The data for each item is obtained in the manner indicated below. CENTER POS:

The center position between positions 1 and 3 is calculated assuming that the end faces are parallel to each other.

Distance between end faces (L): The distance between two end faces in the right angle direction to the faces is calculated assuming that the inclined face gauged at positions 1 and 2 and the other face gauged at position 3 are parallel with each other. Inclination angle (β):

The angle made between the inclined face gauged at positions 1 and 2, and the X-axis is calculated.

The following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM THE FORMS THE ZERO OFFSET”

5249-E P-255 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

7

Input the work coordinate system number as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key. The input number is displayed at “ZERO OFFSET NO.” and the cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET” data position.

ME61012R0700700230005

The following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE POSITION OF THE NEW COORDINATE”

5249-E P-256 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

8

Input the X and Y coordinate values of the center position between two end faces in the new coordinate system and press the WRITE key. The set center coordinate values, X and Y, are displayed at “CENTER POS” and the data of “TOUCH POS”, “ZERO OFFSET” and “ACT POSIT” are updated accordingly. The cursor automatically returns to “AXIS SELECT”.

ME61012R0700700230006

This completes the external face center gauging (3-point contact mode) operation.

9 10

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the WORK GAUGING menu screen. Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen.

5249-E P-257 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

4-5-4. Gauging only Two Points in 3-Point Contact Mode To obtain the center position by bringing the touch probe into contact only at two points after selecting the 3-point contact mode, the operation procedure differs from the normal gauging operation in the following points.

• Selection of an axis is necessary. • Contact detection is not carried out at position 2 but must be carried out at positions 1 and 3. • “Center position”, “distance between end faces” and “inclination angle” are calculated as indicated below. Center position:

The center between positions 1 and 3

Distance between end faces (L): Distance between positions 1 and 3 Inclination angle (β):

If X-axis is selected for “AXIS SELECT”, this angle is 90°. If Y-axis is selected for “AXIS SELECT”, this angle is 0°.

[Supplement] To execute gauging only at two points although the 3-point contact mode is selected, no data must be displayed for “TOUCH POS 2” (immediately after the data is cleared or the start of this gauging operation). For details of operation, refer to [4-5-3. External Face Center Gauging in 3-point Contact Mode].

5249-E P-258 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

4-6.

Inclination and Corner Gauging This function is used to determine the zero point on the X- and Y-axis for workpieces that are not mounted parallel to these axes. Note that although the zero offset is automatically executed for the X- and Y-axis, zero offset for inclination is not carried out automatically and therefore the data must be reflected to the part program as necessary. Procedure :

1

With the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen displayed, press function key [F1] (WORK GAUGING). For the procedure to display the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen, refer to [2. Basic Operation]. The WORK GAUGING menu screen, shown below, will be displayed.

ME61012R0700700250001

[Supplement] The comment “MOVE CURSOR AND PRESS ENTER KEY” is displayed on a menu screen. When this comment is displayed, the desired item can be selected by using the cursor and the WRITE key as well as by function key operation.

5249-E P-259 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

2

Press function key [F6] (INCLINE, CORNER). The WORK GAUGING 6. INCLINE, CORNER screen is displayed.

ME61012R0700700250002

The following comment is displayed. “SELECT CORNER BY CURSOR AND PRESS ENTER KEY”

5249-E P-260 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

3

Select the corner where gauging is to be executed from “GAUGING CORNER (A, B, C, D)” as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key. The colors of the arrow symbol, and the related number and corner name automatically change.

ME61012R0700700250003

The direction of gauging at a contact detection position differs depending on the selected corner as shown below. GAUGING CORNER

Contact Position 1

Contact Position 2

Contact Position 3

CORNER A

Y+

Y+

X+

CORNER B

Y+

Y+

X-

CORNER C

Y-

Y-

X-

CORNER D

Y-

Y-

X+

5249-E P-261 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING The cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 1”.

ME61012R0700700250004

The following comment is displayed. “MAKE A TOUCH AND PRESS ENTER KEY”

4

Bring the touch probe into contact with the workpiece at position 1 (position 1 in the guide diagram) using the pulse handle as instructed by the comment. Feed the touch probe with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting for contact detection. The touch probe red LED lights when the touch probe detects a contact.

5

At the position where the contact is detected, press the WRITE key. The corner position in the presently selected coordinate system is displayed and the cursor moves to “TOUCH POS 2”.

5249-E P-262 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

6

Execute gauging at contact positions 2 and 3 (positions 2 and 3 in the guide drawing) using the same operation. The cursor moves to “CORNER POS/ANG”.

ME61012R0700700250005

The following comment is displayed. “PRESS ENTER KEY”

5249-E P-263 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

7

Press the WRITE key as instructed by the comment. The data of the corner, and the angle, are automatically displayed and the cursor moves to “ZERO OFST NO.”

ME61012R0700700250006

The following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM THE FORMS THE ZERO OFFSET”

8

Input the work coordinate system number as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key. The data of “TOUCH POS”, “CORNER POS/ANG”, “ZERO OFST NO.” and “ACT POSIT”, with the exception of “angle β”, are updated to the coordinate values in the set coordinate system.

5249-E P-264 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

9

When the zero offset number is set, the cursor moves to “CORNER SET”.

ME61012R0700700250007

The following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE CORNER POSITION OF THE NEW COORDINATE”

10

Input the X and Y coordinate values of the corner in the new coordinate system and press the WRITE key. The cursor moves to “ZERO OFFSET”.

ME61012R0700700250008

The following comment is displayed. “PRESS ENTER KEY”

5249-E P-265 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

11

Press the WRITE key as instructed by the comment. The data of “TOUCH POS”, “CORNER POS/ANG”, “ZERO OFST NO.” and “ACT POSIT” is automatically updated and the cursor returns to “GAUGING CORNER”.

ME61012R0700700250009

This completes the inclination/corner gauging operation.

12

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the WORK GAUGING menu screen.

13

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen.

[Supplement] 1) The function assumes that angles at a corner (A, B, C, D) are right angles. 2) The angle value (β) is the angle made between the X-axis and the line defined by contact detection positions 1 and 2. 3) The angle value (β) displayed at “β” of “CAL. RESULT” is registered in system common variables VS65. 4) The value set for VS65 cannot be directly displayed on the screen. It is cleared when the power is turned off. To check the value set for VS65 or to retain the value after turning the power off, perform the following steps.

5249-E P-266 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING Procedure :

1

Select the MDI mode.

2

Input “VC**=VS65”. Input a normal common variable number for “**”.

3

Press the WRITE key.

4

Press the CYCLE START button. The value set for VS65 is set at VC**. Once the value is set for a common variable, the value can be checked by displaying the parameter setting screen.

[Supplement] In a program, specify the commands like “G11 P=VC**”.

5249-E P-267 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

5.

Tool Length Gauging The tool length gauging function is used to set the tool length offset data. Procedure :

1

In the state the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen is displayed, press function key [F2] (TOOL LENGTH GAUGING). For the procedure for displaying the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen, refer to [2. Basic Operation]. The TOOL LENGTH GAUGING screen, shown below, will be displayed.

ME61012R0700700260001

[Supplement] The comment “MOVE CURSOR AND PRESS ENTER KEY” is displayed on a menu screen. When this comment is displayed, the desired item can be selected by using the cursor and the WRITE key as well as by function key operation. The following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE NEXT GAUGING TOOL NUMBER BY SET AND START ATC 1 CYCLE”

2

Input the tool number of the tool to be gauged to “NEXT TOOL” and press the WRITE key as instructed by the comment.

5249-E P-268 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

3

Press the [1 CYCLE START] button on the ATC operation panel to mount the tool to be gauged in the spindle. The tool number of the tool mounted in the spindle is displayed at “ACT TOOL”.

ME61012R0700700260002

The cursor moves to “TOOL-L OFST NO.” and the following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE TOOL LENGTH OFFSET NUMBER”

4

Input the tool length offset number as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key. The cursor moves to “TOOL-L OFFSET”.

ME61012R0700700260003

The following comment is displayed. “MAKE A TOUCH AND PRESS ENTER KEY”.

5249-E P-269 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

5

Bring the tool into contact with the touch sensor, as instructed by the comment, by operating the pulse handle. Move the tool with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting for contact detection. The touch probe red LED lights when contact is detected.

6

At the position where contact is detected, press the WRITE key. The tool length offset data is displayed. This completes the tool length gauging operation when the tool offset data of other tools is not measured. To execute the tool length gauging cycle for other tools, proceed to the next step.

7

Move the cursor to “ACT TOOL”.

8

Input the tool number to “ACT TOOL” and press the WRITE key. The cursor moves to “POT NO.” and the following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE RETURN DESTINATION POT NUMBER BY SET (* WHEN NOT SET)”

9

Input the return tool pot number or “*” as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key. When the return pot number is set, pressing the [1 CYCLE START] button on the ATC operation panel causes the tool to be returned to the specified pot. If an attempt is made to call another tool by setting its number at “NEXT TOOL” while a return pot number is set at “POT NO.”, an alarm occurs and the following alarm message is displayed on the screen. “5266 Pot command exist”. To avoid this, input “*” for “POT NO.” and press the WRITE key. This causes “NA” to be set for “POT NO.”, allowing the next tool set for “NEXT TOOL” to be called. After calling the next tool, repeat steps 4) to 9) for all tools for which the tool length offset data should be set.

10

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen.

5249-E P-270 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

6.

Cutter Radius Gauging The cutter radius gauging function is used to set the cutter radius compensation data. Procedure :

1

In the state the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen is displayed, press function key [F3] (CUTTER RADIUS). For the procedure for displaying the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen, refer to [2. Basic Operation]. The CUTTER RAD GAUGING screen, shown below, will be displayed.

ME61012R0700700270001

[Supplement] The comment “MOVE CURSOR AND PRESS ENTER KEY” is displayed on a menu screen. When this comment is displayed, the desired item can be selected by using the cursor and the WRITE key as well as by function key operation. The following comment is displayed. “SELECT AXIS BY CURSOR AND PRESS ENTER KEY”

5249-E P-271 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

2

Select the direction of gauging (+X, -X, +Y, -Y) by moving the cursor to the desired choice, as instructed by the comment, and press the WRITE key.

-Y

+X

-X

+Y ME61012R0700700270002

Fig.4-1 Selecting the Gauging Axis The cursor moves to “NEXT TOOL” and the following message is displayed. “WRITE THE NEXT GAUGING TOOL NUMBER BY SET AND START ATC 1 CYCLE”

3

Input the tool number of the tool to be gauged at “NEXT TOOL” and press the WRITE key as instructed by the comment.

4

Press the [1 CYCLE START] button on the ATC operation panel to mount the tool to be gauged in the spindle.

5

The spindle is orientated. The cursor moves to “CUTR-R COMP NO.” and the following comment is displayed. “WRITE THE CUTTER RADIUS COMPENSATION NUMBER”

6

Input the cutter radius compensation number as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key. The cursor moves to “CUTR-R COMP”.

ME61012R0700700270003

The following comment is displayed. “MAKE A TOUCH AND PRESS ENTER KEY”.

5249-E P-272 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

7

Bring the tool into contact with the touch sensor as instructed by the comment by operating the pulse handle. Move the tool with the “x1” multiplication ratio setting for contact detection. The touch probe red LED lights when contact is detected.

8

At the position where contact is detected, press the WRITE key. The cutter radius compensation data is displayed. This completes the cutter radius gauging operation when the cutter radius compensation data of other tools is not measured.

9

To execute the cutter radius gauging cycle for other tools, repeat the gauging operation steps indicated above for all tools for which the cutter radius compensation data is to be set. This completes the cutter radius gauging operation.

10

Press function key [F8] (CLOSE). The screen returns to the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen. For the procedure for setting “ACT TOOL” and “POT NO.” refer to [5. Tool Length Gauging].

5249-E P-273 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

7.

Comparison and Calculation of Gauging Results In conventional gauging operation, absolute gauging results are obtained in the work coordinate system currently selected. The new manual gauging function allows gauging results to be saved using the data transfer function and to perform gauging while comparing and calculating gauging results of various gauging cycles. Any combination of gauging cycles, for example “INCLINE, CORNER” and “INT END CENTER”, “ID GAUGING” and “OD GAUGING”, and others, is allowed as long as the results of gauging (to be explained later) remain on the WORK GAUGING screen. It is also possible to display the results of comparison/calculation (angle, distance, coordinate value, etc.) WORK GAUGING screens.

ME61012R0700700280001

7-1.

Transferring Gauging Results The procedure for transferring results of gauging after the completion of a gauging cycle is described below. Procedure :

1

After the completion of a work gauging cycle, press function key [F7] (TRANSFER) on the WORK GAUGING screen. A comment such as the one indicated below will be displayed. “INT CENTER (H0) X162.475 INT CENTER (H0) Y147.078 INT CENTER β45.000 THESE ARE PREVIOUS GAUGING RESULTS WHICH RESULT DO YOU TRANSFER?” The term such as “INT CENTER” given in the comment represents the mode of the gauging cycle that was executed to obtain the result. “INT CENTER (H0) X162.475” in the comment shown in the example screen above means that the data that was transferred is the X-axis gauging result obtained in the internal face center gauging operation and that the value is “162.475” in the machine coordinate system (H0). The comment displayed on the screen includes one of the following terms, which indicate the gauging mode used.

5249-E P-274 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

• “END FACE”: Data transferred as the result of end face gauging operation • “INSIDE DIA”: Data transferred as the result of the I.D. gauging operation • “OUTSIDE DIA”: Data transferred as the result of the O.D. gauging operation • “INT CENTER”: Data transferred as the result of the internal end face center gauging operation

• “EXT CENTER”: Data transferred as the result of the external end face center gauging operation

• “CORNER”: Data transferred as the result of inclination/corner gauging operation [Supplement] The X and Y data, among the transferred data, are coordinate values in the machine coordinate system (H0). Data “β” represents an angle value.

2

In this state, select the data to be transferred by pressing the corresponding function key.

• [F1] POSIT: Transfers the position data. • [F2] ANGLE: Transfers the angle data. • [F3] POSIT & ANGLE: Transfers the position and angle data. If no data is to be transferred, press function key [F8] (CANCEL). If any of function keys [F1] (POSIT), [F2] (ANGLE) and [F3] (POSIT & ANGLE) is pressed, the corresponding data obtained in the latest gauging cycle is transferred and stored in the CNC memory. The actual data to be transferred depends on the executed work gauging cycle. See the table below for the relationship between a work gauging cycle and the data to be transferred. Work Gauging Cycle

Transferred Data with [F1] Transferred Data with [F2]

End face gauging (X, Y, Z)

End face position

0

I.D. center

I.D. center position

0

O.D. center

O.D. center position

0

Center between two internal faces (2-point contact mode)

Center position between two internal faces (only for the selected axis)

0

Center between two internal faces (3-point contact mode)

Center position between two internal faces

End face angle

Center between two external faces (2-point contact mode)

Center position between two external faces (only for the selected axis)

0

Center between two external faces (3-point contact mode)

Center position between two external faces

End face angle

Inclination/corner

Corner position

Workpiece angle

If function key [F3] (POSIT & ANGLE) is pressed, both the kinds of data selected by [F1] (POSIT) and [F2] (ANGLE) are transferred.

5249-E P-275 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING If any of these function keys ([F1], [F2], [F3]) is pressed before a gauging cycle is completed, no data is transferred and the following comment is displayed on the screen. The previous transferred data remains. “NO GAUGING RESULT! CONTINUE GAUGING”

3 7-2.

If the comment indicated above is displayed, press function key [F8] (OK). This cancels data transfer mode and allows the operation to be continued.

Comparison with Gauging Data Data obtained in other gauging cycles is converted into the values in a pseudo local coordinate system on the basis of the transferred data. The coordinate values, distance L, and inclined angle β in the pseudo local coordinate system are displayed on each WORK GAUGING screen. The calculation results obtained for each gauging operation are as follows. Gauging operation

Calculation result Coordinate system

End face gauging

L

β

-

ID center

ID center

Distance from the zero to the ID center

*1

OD center

OD center

Distance from the zero to the OD center

*1

Center between two internal faces (2 points) Center between two internal faces (3 points)

Center between two internal faces

Center between two external faces (2 points) Center between two external faces (3 points) Inclination and corner -

Distance from the zero to the center between two internal faces

Inclined angle

Center between two external faces

Distance from the zero to the center between two external faces

Inclined angle

Corner

Distance from the zero to the corner

Inclined angle

: No calculation result is displayed.

*1 : For the calculation result β, the inclined angle obtained in each gauging of "center between two internal faces (3 points)", "center between two external faces (3 points)", and "inclination and corner" is displayed by converting it into an inclined angle in the pseudo local coordinate system. This is not applied to the ID and OD center gauging.

5249-E P-276 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

7-3.

Example of Calculation Results Display How the calculation results are displayed is described below. Assume workpiece A shown below is set on the table with a certain angle to the machine coordinate system. The following is the procedure to obtain the distance between the reference corner position and the center of hole “a”, and coordinate values of the center of hole “a” in the xy coordinate system (pseudo local coordinate system).

ym

Hole "a"

Workpiece A

y x

75

150 Reference corner position

0

xm

(xm, ym)........Machine coordinate system (x, y).............Pseudo local coordinate system ME61012R0700700310001

Procedure :

1

At the WORK GAUGING 6. INCLINE, CORNER screen, select “A” for the gauging corner.

2

Bring the touch probe into contact with workpiece A at TOUCH POS 1, TOUCH POS 2, and TOUCH POS 3 in this order and obtain corner position data and inclination.

3

Press function key [F7] (TRANSFER) on the WORK GAUGING 6. INCLINE, CORNER screen to transfer corner position data and the inclination obtained in step 1). The following comment is displayed. “THESE ARE PREVIOUS GAUGING RESULTS WHICH RESULT DO YOU TRANSFER?”

4

Press function key [F3] (POSIT & ANGLE). The corner position data and inclination angle of the workpiece are transferred. Assume that the X- and Y- coordinate values and inclination of corner transferred as an example are x0, y0, β0, respectively, in the machine coordinate system (H0).

ym

Workpiece A

A y0

0

x0

β0

X- and Y-coordinate values of corner A are (x0, y0). H(0)X...................x0 H(0)Y...................y0 Inclination angle..β0 xm ME61012R0700700310002

Fig.4-2 Inclination and Corner Gauging

5249-E P-277 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

5

Close the WORK GAUGING 6. INCLINE, CORNER screen once and open the WORK GAUGING 2. I.D. CENTER screen.

6

Set the touch probe inside hole “a” and bring it into contact with the hole I.D. at TOUCH POS 1, TOUCH POS 2, TOUCH POS 3, and TOUCH POS 4 to set the contact position data.

7

Make sure that the cursor is at “CENTER POS/RAD” (the cursor automatically moves to “CENTER POS/RAD” when data is set at “TOUCH POS 4”), then press the WRITE key. The center position (xt, yt) and the diameter (D) are calculated and displayed.

ym

Hole "a"

yt

D Workpiece A

0

xt

xm ME61012R0700700310003

Fig.4-3 I.D. Center Gauging The X- and Y-coordinate values (xt, yt) of the center of hole “a” will be displayed at the calculation result display area on the screen. These coordinate values are calculated on the basis of the corner position data (x0, y0) transferred in step 4) above and are expressed as coordinate values in the local coordinate system (x, y) which is obtained by rotating the machine coordinate system (xm, ym) by transferred angle data β. The distance to the center calculated in the I.D. gauging is obtained at the same time and displayed on the screen.

ym

Hole "a"

Workpiece A

y

x L

75 y0

150 Rotation by β Reference corner position

0

x0

xm ME61012R0700700310004

Fig.4-4 Local Coordinate System after Comparison/Calculation

5249-E P-278 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING The calculation result display area shows the following data. CAL. RESULT X: The distance between the reference point (x0, y0) and the center of hole “a” along the X-axis in the local coordinate system (x, y). CAL. RESULT Y: The distance between the reference point (x0, y0) and the center of hole “a” along the Y-axis in the local coordinate system (x, y). CAL. RESULT L: The distance between the reference point (x0, y0) and the center of hole “a”. [Supplement] Angle β displayed at CAL. RESULT β is completely different from angle β which is obtained in gauging operation and is transferred.

5249-E P-279 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING

8.

Error List Error No. Cutter R. comp input NO. 2713

Description This error occurs in any of the following cases. (1) The designated cutter radius compensation number is “0” or smaller, or greater than the number of compensation pairs selected as the machine specification. a.

Tool data 300-pair specification: The input number is greater than 301.

b.

Tool data 200-pair specification: The input number is greater than 201.

c.

Tool data 100-pair specification: The input number is greater than 101.

(2) The cutter radius compensation number has not been designated when cutter radius compensation data should be designated. Zero set input NO. 2714

This error occurs in any of the following cases. (1) The designated zero offset number is “0” or smaller, or greater than the number of work coordinate system number selected as the machine specification. a.

Work coordinate 100-pair system specification: The input zero offset number is greater than 101.

b.

Work coordinate 50-pair system specification: The input zero offset number is greater than 51.

c.

Work coordinate 20-pair system specification: The input zero offset number is greater than 21.

(2) The zero offset number has not been designated when zero offset data should be designated. Tool length offset input NO. This error occurs in any of the following cases. 2715 (1) The designated tool length offset number is “0” or smaller, or greater than the number of tool length offset pair selected as the machine specification. a.

Tool data 300-pair specification: The input number is greater than 301.

b.

Tool data 200-pair specification: The input number is greater than 201.

c.

Tool data 100-pair specification: The input number is greater than 101.

(2) The tool length offset number has not been designated when tool length offset data should be designated.

5249-E P-280 SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING Error No. Set data limit over 2716

Description This error occurs in any of the following cases (Items 3 and 4 apply when the interactive gauging function is used). (1) When designating the REF ring diameter, the input data is outside the range 0 to 1000.000. (2) When designating the reference tool diameter, the input data is outside the range 0 to 1000.000. (3) When designating the Z-axis upward stroke for OD gauging mode, the input data is outside the range 0 to 2000.000. (4) When designating the maximum contact detection stroke, the input data is outside the range 0 to 2000.000.

Data set not ready 2718

This error occurs in any of the following cases. (1) In the work gauging mode (1. X, Y, Z, END FACE), an attempt is made to designate a zero offset value while the reference surface position has not been obtained. (2) In the work gauging mode (2. I.D. CENTER, 3. O.D. CENTER), an attempt is made to designate zero offset data while the center position has not been obtained. (3) In the work gauging mode (4. INT END CENTER, 5. EXT END CENTER), an attempt is made to designate zero offset data while the center position has not been obtained. (4) In the work gauging mode (6. INCLINE, CORNER), an attempt is made to designate zero offset data while the corner position and inclination angle have not been obtained.

5249-E P-281 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

SECTION 5 1.

INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

Specifications Zero point setting and tool offset setting are carried out using the touch probe or touch sensor. Differing from conventional automatic gauging and automatic tool gauging functions, the operator can carry out the gauging operations in the manual mode using the switches following the guide messages displayed on the screen. Therefore, the operator does not have to master special gauging programs. This function allows you easy and quick data setting without referring to the programming manual, and can be effectively used for: (1) Setting the zero point or the tool length offset data for machining one-of-a-kind workpiece. (2) Setting the zero point or the tool length offset data for machining the first workpiece and beginning production from the next workpiece using the set data. (3) Setting the zero point or the tool offset data when performing machining jobs by interrupting lot production using the same part program.

Interactive gauging effective/ ineffective switch

INTERACT. GAUGING - TOOL LENGTH GAUGING Screen

INTERACT. GAUGING WORK GAUGING Screen

TOOL LENGTH GAUGING Screen

PREPARATION (TOOL LENGTH) Screen

PARAMETER (TOOL LENGTH) Screen

t

REF TOOL

L

REF FACE (0)

REF TOOL

REFERENCE SURFACE SET Screen

WORK GAUGING Screen

PREPARATION (WORK) Screen

Z

REF FACE (0)

TOUCH PROBE LENGTH OFFSET Screen TOUCH PROBE RADIUS COMP Screen

INCLINE, CORNER Screen

EXT END CENTER Screen

INT END CENTER Screen

O.D. CENTER Screen

I.D. CENTER Screen

X, Y, Z END FACE Screen

2.

L

PARAMETER (WORK) Screen

5249-E P-282 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

List of Display Screen

ME61012R0700800020001

5249-E P-283 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

3.

Switches

3-1.

Interactive Gauging Operation Panel

GAUGING CYCLE MODE

TOOL GAUGING

+BLOCK MODE

-BLOCK MODE

WORK GAUGING

AUTO MODE

TOUCH SIGNAL

ME61012R0700800030001

(1) GAUGING CYCLE MODE switch This switch is operative in the MANUAL mode selected on the NC operation panel. When this key is pressed, the INTERACTIVE GAUGING screen appears. The switch lamp lights when the gauging cycle mode is effective. (2) TOOL GAUGING switch Press this switch to measure the tool length. The switch lamp lights and the tool length gauging screen appears. (3) WORK GAUGING switch Press this switch to measure the workpiece dimensions. The switch lamp lights and the work gauging screen appears. (4) +BLOCK MODE selection button The gauging cycle in which the spindle moves only in the positive direction is called. (5) -BLOCK MODE selection button The gauging cycle in which the spindle moves only in the negative direction is called. (6) AUTO MODE selection button Automatic gauging cycle, which is stored in advance, is called. In the case, direction of axis motion is not restricted. (7) TOUCH SIGNAL This lamp lights when the touch probe or the touch sensor touches a workpiece or a tool in the gauging cycle mode established by depression of the GAUGING CYCLE MODE switch. These lamps flicker when the selected cycle is effective. According to the selection status, either one lamp or more than one lamp blinks. When mode selection with the above buttons (4) to (6) is effective, their lamp keeps blinking.

5249-E P-284 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

4.

Terminology (1) SET Sets the entered data as new data. To issue the SET command, press the function key [F1] (SET), enter required data through the keyboard, and then press the WRITE key. Data cannot be set until the WRITE key is pressed. (2) CAL Sets the data obtained by adding or subtracting the entered data to or from the preset value as new data. To issue the CAL command, press the function key [F3] (CAL), enter required data through the keyboard, and then press the WRITE key. Data cannot be set until the WRITE key is pressed. (3) ZERO OFFSET NO. 10 (for system) This offset number is used to register the touch sensor position (setting of the REF surface) as the preparatory step for the gauging operation. This offset number cannot be used in usual machining program. It is not possible to change the number by moving the cursor on the screen. (4) TOOL LENGTH OFFSET NO. 5 (for system) This offset number is used as the tool offset number special to the touch probe as the preparatory step for the gauging operation. It is not possible to change the number by moving the cursor on the screen. (5) REF RING CENTER HS3 This is the coordinate system used to obtain the center of the REF ring for the touch probe diameter compensation as the preparatory step for the gauging operation. It is not possible to change the coordinate system number by moving the cursor on the screen. (6) Relative Offset The reference tool length is taken as “0” and tool offset is made based on the difference between the length of the tool in question and the reference tool length. (7) Absolute Offset Length of each tool is input directly and tool offset made based on the input length. The reference tool length is: 150 mm (5.91 in.) for NT No. 40 and 200 mm (7.87 in.) for NT No. 50. (8) H.P. SET (ATC home position setting) This is effective only for vertical machining centers. The tool change position for tool length gauging cycle is set. After bringing the tool to the position where the ATC operation can be conducted safely, press the function key [F4] (H.P. SET). The position is registered as the ATC home position. The auto cycle for the tool length gauging is effective only after the home position has been set. Once set, the home position remains effective until the power is turned off. The set home position is lost when the power is turned off. Therefore, it is necessary to set the home position after turning on the power.

5249-E P-285 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

5.

Basic Operation Because the manual gauging is carried out in the manual operation mode, all types of manual operations such as rapid feed, cutting feed and pulse handle feed are possible during the execution of manual gauging. Therefore, feed the touch probe or touch sensor manually until it is brought near the contact point. When bringing the touch sensor or touch probe into contact with the object, select the -SINGLE, +SINGLE, or AUTO by using the buttons on the specially prepared INTERACTIVE GAUGING operation panel and press the CYCLE START button. The slide hold and override functions are effective in this automatic touch detection cycle. In the slide hold mode, manual feed is also possible; to restart the automatic cycle operation, press the CYCLE START. The lamps above these cycle selection buttons flicker when the corresponding cycle is selectable. When the cycle is selected from those indicated by the flickering lamps, the lamp corresponding to the selected cycle stays lit and other lamps go off. Pressing the CYCLE START button under such condition can begin the selected cycle. Procedure :

1

Press the MANUAL key on the NC operation panel to select the manual operation mode.

2

Place the interactive gauging effective/ineffective switch at GAUGING position. Select either work gauging mode or tool gauging mode by pressing the WORK GAUGING or TOOL GAUGING switch on the interactive gauging operation panel.

5249-E P-286 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

6.

Outline of Interactive Gauging Function The interactive gauging function includes the following specification. For general specifications, refer to Section 2, “LIST OF DISPLAY SCREEN”. (1) Work Gauging Function This is the function to carry out the zero offset using the touch probe. This function provides the following five gauging function to meet variety of workpiece shape: 1. X, Y, Z END FACE 2. I.D. CENTER 3. O.D. CENTER 4. INT END CENTER 5. EXT END CENTER 6. INCLINE, CORNER

ME61012R0700800060001

Before carrying out the work gauging function, always carry out the gauging PREPARATION (WORK) and PARAMETER (WORK).

5249-E P-287 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION (2) Tool Length Gauging Function This is the function to carry out the tool length offset using the touch sensor. To carry out this function, a reference tool or a tool for which the length between the gauge line and the tool nose is known is used as the “gauge”. For the offset data, two types of offset data are available - relative offset data and absolute offset data. The relative tool offset data uses the difference in lengths between the reference tool and a tool in question. The absolute tool offset data uses the length of the tool in question between the gauge line and the tool nose.

ME61012R0700800060002

(Relative Offset)

(Absolute Offset) Reference tool

Gauge line

L L

Value "L" is registered as the tool length offset data

Value "L" is registered as the tool length offset data ME61012R0700800060003

Before carrying out the tool length gauging, always carry out the preparation for tool length gauging and set the gauging parameter data.

5249-E P-288 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION (3) Preparation for work gauging and setting the parameters Before carrying out the work gauging cycle, it is necessary to set the data on the INTERACT. GAUGING PREPARATION (WORK) screen and the INTERACT. GAUGING PARAMETER (WORK) screen. a.

Preparatory step

ME61012R0700800060004

Before carrying out the work gauging function, it is necessary to set the tool offset data and tool radius compensation (4 directions of +X, -X, +Y, -Y) data of the touch probe itself. The touch probe length offset and radius compensation are required only when a touch probe is changed or a touch probe has been struck against an obstacle. b.

Setting the gauging parameters

ME61012R0700800060005

5249-E P-289 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION Once set, the parameter setting remains effective until it is changed with new setting. There are two types of work gauging parameters as indicated below:

• Maximum travel to detect “touch” (MAX TRVL TO TOUCH) The maximum travel of the touch probe to detect the “touch” automatically after manual positioning at the automatic gauging cycle start position. If the “touch” signal is not obtained after the touch probe movement exceeds the set distance, an alarm occurs and the touch probe returns to the start point. Initial setting is 50 mm (1.97 in.).

• Spindle retract stroke during OD gauging (SPIDL UP TRVL AT O.D. GAUGING) In the OD gauging mode, the spindle is retracted upward to prevent interference of the touch probe with the workpiece. Set this stroke for this parameter. Initial setting is 50 mm (1.97 in.). (4) Preparation for Tool Gauging and Setting the Parameters Before carrying out the tool gauging cycle, it is necessary to set the data on the INTERACT. GAUGING PREPARATION (TOOL LENGTH) screen and the INTERACT. GAUGING PARAMETER (TOOL LENGTH) screen. a.

Preparatory step

ME61012R0700800060006

Before carrying out the tool length gauging cycle, it is necessary to set the touch sensor position and the reference tool length. The touch sensor position is set for “HS1” of system work coordination zero (the coordinate system specially used for the setting of the touch sensor position data and cannot be used for machining). If the touch sensor is fixed, setting is required only once. However, if the touch sensor position is changed, it is necessary to set the data again. When “0” is set for REF TOOL LENGTH, the relative tool length offset data is obtained and when the length between the gauge line and the tool nose is set, the absolute tool length is offset data is obtained. Tool length of the reference tool which is supplied by Okuma is 150 mm (5.91 in.) for NT. 40 taper and 200 mm (7.87 in.) for NT. 50 taper.

5249-E P-290 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION b.

Setting the gauging parameter

ME61012R0700800060007

Once set, the parameter setting remains effective until it is changed with new setting. There are two types of tool length gauging parameters as indicated below:

• Maximum travel to detect “touch” (MAX TRAVEL TO TOUCH) The maximum travel of the touch probe to detect the “touch” in the -BLOCK MODE after manual positioning at the gauging cycle start position. If the “touch” signal is not obtained after the touch probe movement exceeds the set distance, an alarm occurs and the touch probe returns to the start point. Initial setting is 50 mm (1.97 in.).

5249-E P-291 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

• Maximum tool length (MAX TOOL LENGTH) Set the length of the longest tool that will be used in user’s plant. The data to be set differs depending on whether the relative tool length offset data is to be used or the absolute tool length offset data is to be used. The setting for this parameter determines the distance in which the tool advances to the touch sensor at a rapid feedrate when the tool length offset data is read in the AUTO mode after setting HP. Because the tool will be hit against the touch sensor if the setting is too small, set the data taking safety into consideration. HP position

5

1

Max. tool length +10 mm

2

3

4

Rapid feed Cutting feed Operation sequence

Touch sensor Auto Mode Cycle ME61012R0700800060008

CAUTION If the maximum tool length is set to a value smaller than the actual tool length, the tool and the touch sensor will collide. Never set the maximum tool length shorter than the actual tool length.

5249-E P-292 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

7.

Work Gauging Function

7-1.

PARAMETER (WORK) Screen Procedure :

1

Select the MANUAL mode, and turn on the GAUGING CYCLE MODE switch on the additional operation panel for interactive gauging. Then, press the WORK GAUGING switch. The following screen appears.

ME61012R0700800070001

2

Press the function key [F8] (GAUGING PARAM). The screen below will be displayed.

ME61012R0700800070002

5249-E P-293 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

7-2.

3

Locate the cursor at the data column of MAX TRVL TO TOUCH L=. After inputting the value, press the function key [F1] (SET).

4

Locate the cursor at the data SPIDL UP TRVL AT O.D. GAUGING. After entering the value, press the function key [F1] (SET).

5

Press the function key [F8] (CLOSE).

PREPARATION (WORK) Screen Prepare the followings: - touch probe - reference ring - swing gauge - reference block - reference tool Procedure :

1

Select the MANUAL mode, and turn on the GAUGING CYCLE MODE switch on the additional operation panel for interactive gauging. Then, press the WORK GAUGING switch. The following screen appears.

ME61012R0700800080001

5249-E P-294 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

2

Press the function key [F7] (GAUGING PREPARE). Screen below will be displayed.

ME61012R0700800080002

3

Locate the cursor at the data column of NXT TOOL and key in the reference tool registration No. Press the 1 CYCLE START key after moving the axes to the positions where the ATC operation is possible. The reference tool is extracted from the ATC magazine and mounted to the spindle.

4

After the reference tool has been mounted to the spindle, manually bring the reference tool into contact with the reference block. Then, move the cursor to the data column of ZERO OFFSET Z.

5

When the cursor is moved to the data column of ZERO OFFSET Z, the message “Write the REF block thickness” will be displayed on the screen. Key in the thickness (L) of reference block.

5249-E P-295 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

6

Press the function key [F5] (NEXT). Screen below will be displayed.

ME61012R0700800080003

7

Locate the cursor at the data column of NXT TOOL and key-in the touch probe registration No. Press the 1 CYCLE START key after moving the axes to the position where the ATC operation is possible.

8

After the touch probe has been mounted to the spindle, locate the cursor at the data column of TOOL LENGTH OFFSET.

9

After confirming that the message “Position near REF face and select cycle” is displayed on the screen, manually move the touch probe close to the reference surface. Press “Z” key to select Z-axis for gauging axis direction. Press -BLOCK MODE key on the INTERACTIVE GAUGING operation panel and then press the CYCLE START button. The touch probe will start the automatic gauging cycle.

10

The tool offset values are entered when the touch prove contacts the reference surface.

5249-E P-296 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

11

Press the function key [F5] (NEXT). This will display screen below.

ME61012R0700800080004

12

Fix the reference ring on the table.

13

Locate the cursor at the data column of REF RING DIA D and key-in the ring diameter.

14

After the completion of operation in step (13), the message “Find the ref ring center and press WRITE button at that posit” is displayed on the screen. The cursor will advance to the data column of REF RING CENTER.

15

Manually remove the touch probe from the spindle and press the swing gauge against the spindle. Leave marking on the touch probe to confirm the correct phase alignment with the drive key before removing the touch probe from the spindle.

16

Obtain the center of the reference ring by manually moving the swing gauge and align the center of reference ring and spindle center.

Swing gauge Datum ring Table ME61012R0700800080005

5249-E P-297 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION Press the WRITE key at that position. The values for ZERO OFFSET NO. 3 (for system) (X, Y, Z) will be changed and the cursor will advance to the data column of RAD COMP.

ME61012R0700800080006

17

While maintaining the X and Y axes at the center of the reference ring, retract the Z-axis. Remove the swing gauge from the spindle and mount the touch probe to the spindle while aligning the match mark with the drive key. Then, manually carry out spindle orientation. If the touch probe radius compensation is carried out without carrying out spindle orientation, a gauging error might be caused.

18

Lower Z-axis until the touch probe tip will come into the reference ring. Press “X” key to select X-axis, and press AUTO MODE button and CYCLE START button in this order.

5249-E P-298 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

19

The touch probe will execute the automatic gauging cycle and the values for RAD COMP 1, 2, 3 and 4 will be entered.

ME61012R0700800080007

3

3

1

2 2

6

5

6

5 4

4

1

Solid line : Cutting feed Broken line: Rapid feed

Automatic Gauging Cycle of Touch Probe ME61012R0700800080008

20

Pressing the function key [F8] (CLOSE) returns the screen to the WORK GAUGING MENU screen.

5249-E P-299 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

7-3.

X, Y, Z END FACE Procedure :

1

Select the MANUAL mode, and turn on the GAUGING CYCLE MODE switch on the additional operation panel for interactive gauging. Then, press the WORK GAUGING switch. The following screen appears.

ME61012R0700800090001

2

Locate the cursor at “1. X, Y, Z END FACE” on the MENU screen above and press the WRITE key. Screen below will be displayed.

ME61012R0700800090002

5249-E P-300 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

3

Enter the ZERO OFFSET NO. (work coordinate No.). The work coordinate No. can be selected irrespective of the work coordinate No. currently effective.

4

After the completion of operation in step 3, the zero offset values of the selected coordinate system and the actual position values in the selected coordinate system will be displayed.

ME61012R0700800090003

5

Move the touch probe close to the gauging position.

6

Select an axis along which the gauging cycle is carried out by pressing any of the AXIS SELECT keys. When the axis is selected, the cursor will advance to the data column of the selected axis of ZERO OFFSET.

5249-E P-301 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

7

The lamps of +BLOCK MODE and -BLOCK MODE flicker. Select the direction in which the touch probe is moved. The lamp of the direction selected will continue flickering, while the lamp of the direction not selected will stop flickering.

8

Pressing the CYCLE START button starts the automatic gauging cycle in the selected direction.

9

The touch probe moves at the speed determined by the cutting override switch setting until it will contact the workpiece.

10

After the touch probe has contacted the workpiece, it will once retract for 0.5 mm from the workpiece and then contact the workpiece again. The speed at which this motion is conducted is constant disregarding the cutting override switch setting.

11

After the second contact, the touch probe returns to the previous gauging position.

12

The zero offset data is changed; zero offset is carried out automatically so that the coordinate value of the contact position will be “0”.

13

To set the zero offset data so that the contact position coordinate values will be other than “0”, select an axis using the AXIS SELECT key and the cursor moves to the data area of the selected axis. Press the function key [F3] (CAL) and enter the required value.

5249-E P-302 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION [Supplement] 1) When a wrong operation mode has been selected +BLOCK MODE, -BLOCK MODE or wrong zero offset data has been entered, press either the function key [F7] (QUIT) or RESET key. 2) An alarm, indicating the gauging cycle is not possible, is lit in the following cases: - The contact is not detected within the distance set for a parameter. - The CYCLE START switch is pressed after selecting the +BLOCK MODE or -BLOCK MODE with the pulse handle selected. Press the RESET key to cancel the alarm state. 3) The direction in which an axis moves in the automatic cycle coincides with the direction of the axis selected using the AXIS SELECT key. If a wrong axis is selected, the touch sensor will not move in the required direction. For ID or OD gauging, select the X-axis for automatic mode. The cursor on the screen moves to the axis which is selected using the AXIS SELECT key. That is, when X-axis is selected, the cursor moves to the X-axis data column of ZERO OFFSET.

PULSE HANDLE

22

X

27

4

28

Y

29

5

30

Z

31

6

32 ME61012R0700800090004

ME61012R0700800090005

When the PULSE HANDLE is selected using the AXIS SELECT key, the cursor on the screen is cleared; if the gauging cycle is started under such condition, an alarm occurs.

5249-E P-303 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

7-4.

I.D. CENTER Procedure :

1

Select the MANUAL mode, and turn on the GAUGING CYCLE MODE switch on the additional operation panel for interactive gauging. Then, press the WORK GAUGING switch. The following screen appears.

ME61012R0700800100001

5249-E P-304 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

2

Locate the cursor at the data column of “2. I.D. CENTER” on the above screen and press the WRITE key. Screen below will be displayed.

ME61012R0700800100002

3

Enter the ZERO OFFSET NO. (work coordinate No.).

4

The lamps of +BLOCK MODE and AUTO MODE flicker.

5

The message “Position near end-face, select axis, then select cycle” will be displayed on the screen. Feed the touch probe manually to the following position and then feed it into the hole. AUTO MODE

....

Near the center of the hole

+BLOCK MODE

....

Near the wall of the hole in the +X-axis direction

[Supplement] Selection of the AUTO MODE and +BLOCK MODE should be made according to the ID dimension. AUTO MODE ......... The ID is 2 x max. travel or less to touch. +BLOCK MODE ...... The ID is greater than 2 x max. travel to touch. The initial setting for this parameter is 50 mm (1.97 in.). Change the setting as needed.

6

AUTO MODE When the AUTO MODE is selected, the lamp of AUTO MODE will continue flickering. Select the X-axis using the AXIS SELECT key and press the CYCLE START button. The gauging cycle starts and gauging is carried out in the sequence of X-axis, Y-axis, and Xaxis. Finally, the touch probe stops at the center of the hole and the gauging cycle is completed. The zero offset of X- and Y-axes is carried out so that the X and Y coordinate values of the center of the hole will be (0, 0).

5249-E P-305 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

7

+BLOCK MODE When the +BLOCK MODE is selected, the lamp of +BLOCK MODE will continue flickering.

GAUGING CYCLE MODE

TOOL GAUGING

WORK GAUGING

+BLOCK MODE

-BLOCK MODE

AUTO MODE

TOUCH SIGNAL

ME61012R0700800100003

(1) Feed the touch probe manually close to point “1” as illustrated below and insert it into the hole. Y

Manual feed X 2

1

ME61012R0700800100004

(2) Select the X-axis using the AXIS SELECT key and press the CYCLE START button. (3) The gauging cycle starts; the touch probe moves in the positive direction of X-axis and after the detection of “contact”, it returns to the previously located position. (4) The indicating lamp of AUTO MODE continues flickering, while the indicating lamp of +BLOCK MODE stops flickering. (5) Manually feed the touch probe close to point “2” as shown in (1). In this axis movement, move only X-axis and do not move Y-axis. If Y-axis is moved, the results of the gauging cycle are not correct.

5249-E P-306 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION (6) Select the X-axis using the AXIS SELECT key and press the cycle start switch.

GAUGING CYCLE MODE

TOOL GAUGING

WORK GAUGING

+BLOCK MODE

-BLOCK MODE

AUTO MODE

TOUCH SIGNAL

ME61012R0700800100005

(7) The gauging cycle starts; the touch probe moves in the negative direction of X-axis and after the detection of “contact”, it moves to the center position. Then, the cycle is continuously carried out in the order of Y-axis and X-axis. Finally, the touch probe stops at the center of the hole. After the completion of gauging, the zero offset of X- and Y-axes is carried out so that the X and Y coordinate values of the center of the hole will be (0, 0). At the same time, the ID measurement is also displayed. (8) When zero offset is required so that the coordinate values of the obtained center of the hole will be other than “0”, select the axis using the AXIS SELECT key. The cursor moves to the data area of the corresponding axis on the screen. Press the function key [F3] (CAL) and enter the required value.

5249-E P-307 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

7-5.

O.D. CENTER Procedure :

1

Select the MANUAL mode, and turn on the GAUGING CYCLE MODE switch on the additional operation panel for interactive gauging. Then, press the WORK GAUGING switch. The following screen appears.

ME61012R0700800110001

2

Locate the cursor at the data column of “3. O.D. CENTER” on the above screen ad press the WRITE key. Screen below will be displayed.

ME61012R0700800110002

5249-E P-308 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

3

Enter the ZERO OFFSET NO. (work coordinate No.).

4

The indicating lamp of -BLOCK MODE will flicker.

5

Manually move the touch probe to the position “1” of the drawing below. Y

Manual feed X 2

1

A

ME61012R0700800110003

After the positioning of the X- and Y-axes, move the touch probe down; the infeed amount (“A” in drawing above) must be smaller than the spindle retract stroke set for SPIDL UP TRVL AT O.D. GAUGING.

6

Select the X-axis using the AXIS SELECT key, select the -BLOCK MODE and press the CYCLE START button.

7

The gauging cycle starts; the touch probe moves in the negative direction of X-axis and after the detection of “contact”, it returns to the previously located position and then the Z-axis moves upward. The Z-axis upward movement amount is as the amount set for SPIDLE UP TRVL AT O.D. GAUGING. The initial setting for this parameter is 50 mm. Change the setting when needed.

8

Manually move the touch probe close to position “2” in drawing in 5. In this axis movement, move only X-axis and do not move Y-axis. If Y-axis is moved, the results obtained in the gauging cycle will not be correct.

9

Select the X-axis using the AXIS SELECT key, select the AUTO MODE and press the CYCLE START button.

5249-E P-309 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

10

The gauging cycle starts; the touch probe moves in the positive direction of X-axis and after the detection of “contact”, the Z-axis moves upward and then to the center of the OD. The gauging is carried out in the sequence of Y-axis and X-axis while Z-axis moves upward and downward. Finally the touch probe stops at the center of the hole. The zero offset of X- and Y-axes is carried out so that the X and Y coordinate values of the center of the hole will be (0, 0). At the same time, the OD measurement is also displayed.

11

When zero offset is required so that the coordinate values of the obtained center of the hole will be other than “0”, select the axis using the AXIS SELECT key. The cursor moves to the data area of the corresponding axis on the screen. Press the function key [F3] (CAL) and enter the required value.

5249-E P-310 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

7-6.

INT END CENTER Procedure :

1

Select the MANUAL mode, and turn on the GAUGING CYCLE MODE switch on the additional operation panel for interactive gauging. Then, press the WORK GAUGING switch. The following screen appears.

ME61012R0700800120001

2

Locate the cursor at “4. INT END CENTER” on the above screen and press the WRITE key. Screen below will be displayed.

ME61012R0700800120002

5249-E P-311 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

3

Enter the ZERO OFFSET NO. (work coordinate No.).

4

The lamps of +BLOCK MODE, -BLOCK MODE and AUTO MODE will flicker.

5

The message “Position near end-face, select axis, then select cycle” will be displayed on the screen. Feed the touch probe manually to the following position and then feed it into the groove. AUTO MODE

....

Near the center of the internal end face

+BLOCK MODE

....

Near the wall of the groove in the positive direction of the selected axis

[Supplement] Selection of the AUTO MODE and +BLOCK MODE should be made according to the internal end face dimension. AUTO MODE ........ When the internal end face is 2 x max. travel or less to touch. +BLOCK MODE ..... When the internal end face is greater than 2 x max. travel to touch. The initial setting for this parameter is 50 mm (1.97 in.). Change the setting as needed.

6

AUTO MODE When AUTO MODE is selected, the lamp of AUTO MODE will continue flickering. Select an axis along which the gauging cycle is carried out using the AXIS SELECT key and press the CYCLE START button. The gauging cycle starts. The zero offset is carried out so that the coordinate value of the center of the internal end face will be “0”.

Y

1 Manual feed

X 2

Y-axis zero offset

2

1

X-axis zero offset ME61012R0700800120003

5249-E P-312 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

7

+BLOCK MODE When the +BLOCK MODE is selected, the lamp of +BLOCK MODE will continue flickering.When the +BLOCK MODE is selected, the indicating lamp of +BLOCK MODE will continue flickering. (1) Move the touch probe manually close to point “1” as illustrated below and insert it into the groove.

2

1

ME61012R0700800120004

(2) Select an axis using the AXIS SELECT key and press the CYCLE START button. (3) The gauging cycle starts. After the completion of gauging, the touch probe returns to the previously located position. (4) Move the touch probe close to the opposite wall of the groove. (5) Select an axis using the AXIS SELECT key, select the -BLOCK MODE and press the CYCLE START button. After the completion of gauging, the zero offset of the axis gauged is carried out so that the coordinate value of the center will be “0”. At the same time, the internal end face dimension (width between walls) is also displayed. (6) When zero offset is required so that the coordinate value of the obtained center will be other than “0”, select the axis using the AXIS SELECT key. The cursor moves to the data area of the corresponding axis on the screen. Press the function key [F3] (CAL) and enter the required value. [Supplement] In this example, the -BLOCK MODE cycle is carried out after the completion of the +BLOCK MODE cycle. The operation in the reverse order is also possible.

5249-E P-313 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

7-7.

EXT END CENTER Procedure :

1

Select the MANUAL mode, and turn on the GAUGING CYCLE MODE switch on the additional operation panel for interactive gauging. Then, press the WORK GAUGING switch. The following screen appears.

ME61012R0700800130001

5249-E P-314 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

2

Locate the cursor at “5. EXT END CENTER” on the above screen and press the WRITE key. Screen below will be displayed.

ME61012R0700800130002

3

Enter the ZERO OFFSET NO. (work coordinate No.).

4

The indicating lamp of +BLOCK MODE and -BLOCK MODE will flicker.

5

Manually move the touch probe to the position “1” of the drawing below. After the positioning of the X- and Y-axes, move the touch probe down; this infeed amount (“A” in drawing above) must be smaller than the spindle retract stroke set for SPIDL UP TRVL AT O.D. GAUGING. 1

Y-axis zero offset

2

2

Y

1

X-axis zero offset

X A ME61012R0700800130003

5249-E P-315 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

6

Select an axis along which the gauging cycle is carried out by pressing any of the AXIS SELECT keys. Press the -BLOCK MODE button and the CYCLE START button.

7

The gauging cycle starts. After the completion of gauging, the touch probe returns to the previously located position.

8

Manually move the touch probe close to the opposite side wall.

9

Select an axis using the AXIS SELECT key, select the +BLOCK MODE and press the CYCLE START button. After the completion of gauging, the zero offset of the axis gauged is carried out so that the coordinate value of the center will be “0”. At the same time, the external end face dimension is also displayed.

10

When zero offset is required so that the coordinate value of the obtained center will be other than “0”, select the axis using the AXIS SELECT key. The cursor moves to the data area of the corresponding axis on the screen. Press the function key [F3] (CAL) and enter the required value.

[Supplement] In this example, the -BLOCK MODE cycle is carries out after the completion of the +BLOCK MODE cycle. The operation in the reverse order is also possible. Select “5. EXT END CENTER” for the case indicated below where the touch probe is brought into contact twice in the same direction.

ME61012R0700800130004

5249-E P-316 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

7-8.

INCLINE, CORNER Procedure :

1

Select the MANUAL mode, and turn on the GAUGING CYCLE MODE switch on the additional operation panel for interactive gauging. Then, press the WORK GAUGING switch. The following screen appears.

ME61012R0700800140001

2

Locate the cursor at “6. INCLINE, CORNER” on the above MENU screen and press the WRITE key to display the screen below.

ME61012R0700800140002

5249-E P-317 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

3

Enter the ZERO OFFSET NO. (work coordinate system No.) and press the WRITE key.

ME61012R0700800140003

4

According to the message “1 Position near end-face and select cycle”, manually move the probe close to the position “1” on the screen and select “+BLOCK MODE”. Then, press the CYCLE START button.

5

On completion the gauging cycle, the probe returns to the original position. The gauged value obtained at this time is not displayed on the screen.

6

According to the message “2 Position near end-face and select cycle”, manually move the probe close to the position “2” on the screen and select “+BLOCK MODE”. Then, press the CYCLE START button.

7

According to the message “3 Position near end-face and select cycle”, manually move the probe close to the position “3” on the screen. Select “+BLOCK MODE” in the case of corner position A and “-BLOCK MODE” in the case of B. Then, press the CYCLE START button.

5249-E P-318 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

8

On completion of the gauging cycle, corner position and angle are automatically displayed.

ME61012R0700800140004

9

After gauging operation, press [F8] (CLOSE) to return to the initial screen.

[Supplement] 1) The angle obtained through the gauging operation will be registered at the system common variable VS65. The value at VS65 cannot be checked on the display screen and will be lost when the power is turned off. (a) to check the value or (b) to retain the value even with the power off, follow the steps below. - Press the MDI key to select the MDI operation mode. - Enter VC{{=VS65 through the keyboard. - Press the CYCLE START button. The value at VS65 is entered to VC{{. Here, VC{{ is a general-use common variable and its value can be checked on the PARAMETER SET screen. 2) Create a program as follows: : G11 P=VC{{ :

5249-E P-319 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

8.

Tool Length Gauging

8-1.

Parameter (Tool Length) Procedure :

1

Select the MANUAL mode, and turn on the GAUGING CYCLE MODE switch on the additional operation panel for interactive gauging. Then, press the TOOL GAUGING switch. The following screen appears.

ME61012R0700800150001

5249-E P-320 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

2

Press the function key [F3] (GAUGING PARAM). Screen below will be displayed.

ME61012R0700800150002

3

Locate the cursor at the data column of MAX TRAVEL TO TOUCH L= and press the function key [F1] (SET). Enter the value.

4

Locate the cursor at the data column of MAX TOOL LENGTH and press the function key [F1] (SET). Enter the value.

5

Press the function key [F8] (CLOSE).

5249-E P-321 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

8-2.

Preparation (Tool Length) Prepare the followings: - small dia. drill - reference tool Procedure :

1

Select the MANUAL mode, and turn on the GAUGING CYCLE MODE switch on the additional operation panel for interactive gauging. Then, press the TOOL GAUGING switch. The following screen appears.

ME61012R0700800160001

5249-E P-322 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

2

After confirming that the message “Write the next gauging tool number and start ATC 1 CYCLE” is displayed on the above screen, press the function key [F1] (SET) and key-in the registration No. of the small dia. drill. (This operation is necessary to align the center of the drill tool (X-, Y-axes) and the center of the touch sensor.)

ME61012R0700800160002

3

Press the 1 CYCLE START key and mount the small dia. drill to the spindle.

4

Align the center of the drill (X-, Y-axes) and the center of the touch sensor. (by eye measure allowed)

5

Press the function key [F2] (GAUGING PREPARE).

6

Locate the cursor at the data column of ZERO OFFSET X and press the WRITE key. The zero offset for X-axis will be executed.

7

Locate the cursor at the data column of ZERO OFFSET Y and press the WRITE key. The zero offset for Y-axis will be executed.

8

Move Z-axis upward while holding X- and Y-axis at that position, and remove the small dia. drill in the spindle and mount the reference tool instead.

5249-E P-323 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

9

Manually move the Z-axis downward and locate the reference tool close to the touch sensor. The distance between the reference tool and the touch sensor must be smaller than the value set for MAX TRAVEL TO TOUCH L. The initial setting for this parameter is 50 mm (1.97 in.).

L

ME61012R0700800160003

10

After pressing the -BLOCK MODE key, select Z-axis by pressing the AXIS SELECT key. Then, press the CYCLE START button.

11

The gauging cycle starts. After the reference tool has contacted the touch probe, the reference tool returns to the previously located position.

12

Press the function key [F8] (CLOSE).

13

Move the Z-axis upward. Manually remove the reference tool from the spindle and mount the small dia. drill instead.

14

Move the spindle to the position where ATC operation is possible (Z-axis ... plus limit, Y- and Zaxis ... position which is free of interference) and press the function key [F4] (H.P. SET). This position is set as the home position for tool change operation.

15

Press the 1 CYCLE START key without setting the data for next tool. The small dia. drill will be returned to the ATC magazine.

16

To proceed with the tool length gauging cycle, key-in the registration No. of the tool at NXT TOOL and carry out the 1 CYCLE START function.

5249-E P-324 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

8-3.

Tool Length Gauging The tool length gauging cycle consists of the two modes - -BLOCK MODE and AUTO MODE. -BLOCK MODE

....

The gauging cycle is carried out after a cutting tool is positioned above the touch sensor manually. In this mode, only Z-axis is controlled and after the detection of “contact”, the cutting tool returns to the previously located position.

AUTO MODE

....

The cycle is enabled after the HP (ATC position for interactive gauging operation) has been set. The cutting tool is positioned automatically at a position above the touch sensor and then the Z-axis moves down until the “contact” is detected. After the detection of “contact”, the cutting tool returns to the HP position.

For both the -BLOCK MODE and AUTO MODE, select Z-axis using the AXIS SELECT key. Use these modes to measure the tool length of a boring bar, face milling cutter, end mill and other types of cutting tools which do not have the cutting tip at the center of the tool because manual operation (spindle free, manual pulse feed, rapid feed) is allowed during slide hold mode. To restart the operation after activating the slide hold function, press the CYCLE START button. Procedure :

1

Select the MANUAL mode, and turn on the GAUGING CYCLE MODE switch on the additional operation panel for interactive gauging. Then, press the TOOL GAUGING switch. The following screen appears.

ME61012R0700800170001

2

The cursor is located at the data column of NXT TOOL. After keying-in the registration No. of the tool to be gauged, press the 1 CYCLE START key.

5249-E P-325 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

3

The cursor moves to the data column of TOOL-L OFST NO. Enter the tool length offset number.

ME61012R0700800170002

4

When the tool offset number is entered, the -BLOCK MODE and AUTO MODE indicating lamps will light up.

5

The cursor moves to the data column of TOOL-L OFFSET.

6

-BLOCK MODE

ME61012R0700800170003

a.

Manually move the cutting tool above the touch sensor and select Z-axis with the AXIS SELECT key.

5249-E P-326 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

7

b.

Press the -BLOCK MODE switch and then the CYCLE START button.

c.

When the cutting tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor, the tool length offset value is displayed automatically and the Z-axis moves up.

AUTO MODE a.

Press the AUTO MODE switch and the CYCLE START button. The cutting tool begins moving from the HP (home position) automatically until it is brought into contact with the touch sensor.

b.

Upon contact with the touch sensor, the tool length offset data is automatically displayed.

c.

The cutting tool returns to the HP automatically.

[Supplement] Setting the HP After positioning the cutting tool at a position (X, Y, Z) where interference will not occur when the ATC cycle is carried out, press the function key [F4] (H.P. SET). Because the set HP is lost when the power is turned off, it in necessary to set the HP each time the power is turned on.

5249-E P-327 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

9.

Other Supplementary Explanations When the work gauging cycle is carried out, zero point is automatically offset at the completion of the cycle. To carry out the automatic zero setting, set the bit 7 of the NC optional parameter (bit) No. 46 to “1”.

ME61012R0700800180001

For carrying out the tool length gauging cycle, this manual assumes that all tools are stored in the tool magazine and that the tool for which the tool gauging cycle is to be carried out is set in the spindle in the automatic tool change cycle. In other word, the required tool is set in the spindle by carrying out the automatic tool change cycle after entering the corresponding tool number for NXT TOOL. If the tool to be gauged is set in the spindle by hand instead of using the ATC, and if that tool is returned to the tool magazine using the ATC, enter the tool number of manually set tool for ACT TOOL. To return the tool to the required pot in the tool magazine, enter the pot number at POT NO. before starting the ATC cycle. If the tool may be returned to any pot, carry out the ATC cycle without designation the return pot number. In this case, the tool is returned to an empty pot automatically. (1) NC parameters a.

b.

Set whether or not the automatic zero setting is carried out when the work gauging cycle is carried out. NC optional parameter (bit) No. 46, bit 7 1

:

Automatic zero setting is carried out.

0

:

Only gauging is carried out.

Set whether only the automatic cycle is effective or both the automatic and block cycles are effective at the start of the work gauging cycle. NC optional parameter (bit) No. 46, bit 6

1 : Both the block and automatic modes are effective. 0 : Only the automatic mode is effective.

5249-E P-328 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION + BLOCK MODE

-BLOCK MODE

AUTO MODE

X, Y, Z END FACE

{

{

–

I.D. CENTER

∆

–

{

O.D. CENTER

–

{

(First in the + BLOCK MODE, then in the AUTO MODE)

INT END CENTER

∆

∆

{

EXT END CENTER

{

{

–

{

c.

: Effective regardless of parameter setting (the indicating lamp flickers.)

∆

: Effective when designated with a parameter.

–

: Ineffective Set the unit system used for the display and parameter setting. NC optional parameter bit No. 9

Bit No.

Contents

SET 1

SET 0

Factory Set Initial Value

0

In data setting, unit system of length is either “inch” or “mm”.

Inch

mm

0

1 mm, 1 inch, 1 deg, 1 sec

Minimum setting unit

1

1

In data setting unit is either minimum setting unit or 1 mm, 1 inch, 1 deg. and 1 sec.

2

0

3

0

4

0

5

0

6 7

In the data setting, the decimal point indicates 1 mm, 1 inch, 1 deg and 1 sec.

Basic unit

bit 1 setting

0 0

INTERACT. GAUGING TOOL LENGTH GAUGING Screen

INTERACT. GAUGING WORK GAUGING MENU Screen

4

0

1

0

4

1

1 0

0

1

TOOL LENGTH GAUGING Screen

INCKINE, CORNER Screen

2

EXT END CENTER Screen

2

INT END CENTER Screen

2

3

O.D. CENTER Screen

2

3

I.D. CENTER Screen

Move the touch probe manually close to position "1" in the illustration. After carrying out the BLOCK MODE cycle, manually move the touch sensor to position "2". Then, carry out the AUTO MODE cycle.

Move the touch probe manually close to position "1" in the illustration. After carrying out the +BLOCK MODE cycle, manually move the touch prober close to position "2". Then, carry out the AUTO MODE cycle. Use this cycle for gauging the inside diameter which is smaller than two times the maximum travel to detect "contact".

AUTO MODE

HP Setting

-BLOCK MODE

-BLOCK MODE or +BLOCK MODE

Manual Feed

+BLOCK MODE

+BLOCK MODE

Manual Feed

Manual Feed

+BLOCK MODE

-BLOCK MODE

After moving the cutting tool close to (within the maximum travel to detect "contact") the touch sensor, carry out the -BLOCK MODE cycle.

Move the cutting tool manually to a position where interference will not occur when the ATC cycle is carried out. Set the home position at this position and carry out the AUTO cycle. After the tool length gauging cycle is carried out, the cutting tool returns to the home position; this completes the cycle. The set home position remains effective until the power is turned off.

Move the touch probe manually close to position "1" and carry out the +BLOCK MODE cycle. Next, move the probe close to position "2" and carry out +BLOCk MODE cycle again. Then, move the probe manually close to position "3" and carry out -BLOCK MODE or +BLOCK MODE cycle.

Move the touch probe manually close to position "1" in the illustration. After carrying out the BLOCK MODE cycle, manually move the touch sensor to position "2". Then, carry out the +BLOCK MODE cycle. * In this case, "- BLOCK MODE" and "+ BLOCK MODE" are carried out in that order, but the order can be reversed.

Move the touch probe manually close to position "1" in the illustration. After carrying out the +BLOCK MODE cycle, manually move the touch probe close to position "2". Then carry out the -BLOCK MODE cycle. Use this cycle for gauging the width between the walls whose distance is greater than two times the maximum distance to detect "contact". * In this case, "+ BLOCK MODE" and "- BLOCK MODE" are carried out in that order, but the order can be reversed.

AUTO MODE

AUTO MODE

AUTO MODE

Move the touch probe manually close to the center of the hole and carry out the AUTO MODE cycle. Use this cycle for gauging the inside diameter which is smaller than the maximum travel to detect "contact".

Move the touch probe manually close to (within the maximum travel to detect "contact") the workpiece. Then, carry out the -BLOCK MODE or +BLOCK MODE cycle.

+BLOCK MODE Manual Feed

Manual Feed

Manual Feed

+BLOCK MODE

Move the touch probe manually close to the center of the groove (between the walls) and carry out the AUTO MODE cycle. Use this cycle for gauging the width between the walls whose distance is smaller than two times the maximum distance to detect "contact".

or

AUTO MODE

-BLOCK MODE

+BLOCK MODE

AUTO MODE

-BLOCK MODE

10.

X, Y, Z END FACE Screen

5249-E P-329 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

Operation Flow

ME61012R0700800190001

5249-E P-330 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION

11.

Error List No.

Error Message Contents

Cutter R. comp input (1) The designated cutter radius compensation number is “0” or smaller, or NO. greater than the number of compensation pairs selected with user’s 5360 specification. a.

Tool data 300-pair specification The input number is greater than 301.

b.

Tool data 200-pair specification The input number is greater than 201.

c.

Tool data 100-pair specification The input number is greater than 101.

(2) The cutter radius compensation number has not been designated when the cutter radius compensation data should be designated. Zero set input NO. 5361

(1) The designated zero offset number is “0” or smaller, or greater than the number of work coordinate system number selected with user’s specification. a.

Work coordinate 100-pair system specification The input zero offset number is greater than 101.

b.

Work coordinate 50-pair system specification The input zero offset number is greater than 51.

c.

Work coordinate 20-pair system specification The input zero offset number is greater than 21.

(2) The zero offset number has not been designated when the zero offset data should be designated. Tool length offset input NO. 5362

(1) The designated tool length offset number is “0” or smaller, or greater than the number of tool length offset pair selected with user’s specification. a.

Tool data 300-pair specification The input number is greater than 301.

b.

Tool data 200-pair specification The input number is greater than 201.

c.

Tool data 100-pair specification The input number is greater than 101.

(2) The tool length offset number has not been designated when the tool length offset data should be designated. Input data overflow 5209

(1) When designating the REF ring diameter, the input data is outside the range of 0 to 1000.000. (2) When designating the reference tool diameter, the input data is outside the range of 0 to 1000.000. (3) When designating the Z-axis upward stroke for OD gauging mode, the input data is outside the range of 0 to 2000.000. (4) When designating the maximum contact detection stroke, the input data is outside the range of 0 to 2000.000. Note: Causes (3) and (4) above apply when the interactive gauging function is used.

5249-E P-331 SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION No. Set after gauging cycle 9432

Error Message Contents (1) In the work gauging mode (1. X, Y, Z, END FACE), an attempt is made to designate a zero offset value while the reference surface position has not been obtained. (2) In the work gauging mode (2. I.D. CENTER, 3. O.D. CENTER), an attempt is made to designate a zero offset data while the center position has not been obtained. (3) In the work gauging mode (4. INT END CENTER, 5. EXT END CENTER), an attempt is made to designate a zero offset data while the center position has not been obtained. (4) In the work gauging mode (6. INCLINE, CORNER), an attempt is made to designate a zero offset data while the corner position and inclination angle have not been obtained.

5249-E P-332 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

SECTION 6 1.

NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

What is Non-contact Sensor? The non-contact sensor uses a laser beam for measurement unlike existing sensors with mechanical or electric contacts. This optical sensor, by taking advantages of a non-contact sensor, can gauge even a rotating tool, which used to be impossible for the existing sensors. The sensor can increase the gauging speed, and can gauge sphericity by taking the advantage of a linear sensor. However, the bloom sensor in tended for linear gauging can not gauge the maximum length (or radial) of an irregular shaped tool depending on the sensor position. Scanning gauging* makes up this disadvantage. This gauging method permits gauging of a rotating tool or gauging while searching the maximum length.

ME61012R0700900010001

* Scanning gauging: The sensor gauges a tool in a gauging direction (e.g. the Y-axis) and shifts along the axis at right angles with the gauging axis (e.g. the Z-axis). By repeating the above gauging several times, the sensor determines the maximum tool length (or diameter).

5249-E P-333 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

2.

Outline Non-contact sensor gauging is roughly classified into two methods according to the position wherethe sensor is installed: gauging with a fixed sensor and gauging with a movable one. A fixed sensor can gauge a horizontal spindle tool (an attachment tool). But a movable sensor can gauge only a vertical spindle tool. Movable sensor

for gauging a vertical spindle tool or horizontal spindle tool

Fixed sensor

for gauging a vertical spindle tool or horizontal spindle tool for gauging a vertical spindle tool

ME61012R0700900020001

The sensor mode (fixed/movable) can be switched by bit 3 of the system-variable VFST. Bit 3 of VFST

0

...... Movable sensor

1

...... Fixed sensor

The tool-gauging program consists of the following maker’s subprograms:

• Preparation program for gauging • Gauging program • Tool breakage detection program Programs classified by the sensor position are described on the following pages.

5249-E P-334 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

3.

Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode As mentioned earlier, the sensor mode (fixed/movable) can be switched by bit 3 of the system-variable VFST. When selecting the movable sensor mode, turn off bit 3 of the variable.

ME61012R0700900030001

When using a movable sensor, the sensor position can be set with bits 0 and 1 of NC optional parameter No. 72. Four positions are available as shown in the figure below, and the moving axis and the approach direction are different among the four positions.

1

0

2 Y+

3 X+ Default position ME61012R0700900030002

Sensor position

NC optional parameter bit No. 72

Approach direction

Bit 1

Bit 0

0

0

0

Negative X-axis direction → Positive X-axis direction

1

0

1

Negative Y-axis direction → Positive Y-axis direction

2

1

0

Positive X-axis direction → Negative X-axis direction

3

1

1

Positive Y-axis direction → Negative Y-axis direction

5249-E P-335 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [List of gauging preparation cycle] OO31

Position setting cycle for tool change

OO33

Position setting cycle for Y-axis retract

OO93

Sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction

OO94

Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction

[List of gauging cycle] OO95

Gauging in the lengthwise direction

OO96

Gauging in the radial direction

OO99

Gauging the sphericity

[List of tool breakage detection cycle] OO95

Tool breakage detection in the lengthwise direction

OO96

Tool breakage detection in the radial direction

OO97

High-speed tool breakage detection

[Tool change position setting cycle (OO31)] On the machine of which tool change function is set at ON (bit 0 of NC specification code No.21 is turned on), the NC performs tool change by transferring the argument PGO=2 on detection of tool breakage. The cycle sets the tool change position used for that purpose. The tool change position is stored in the system-work coordinates No.2. For details, refer to “Section 1. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET / AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION”. CALL OO31 [Y-axis retract position setting cycle (OO33)] In some machines, the sensor may interfere with the Y-axis when it advances or retracts. If interference is anticipated, move the Y-axis to its retract position before advancing or retracting the sensor. If necessary, refer to “Section 1. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET / AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION”. CALL OO33 [Spindle speed] When performing gauging while rotating the spindle, specify the spindle speed by referring to the speed obtained by the following formula: S=F/N Here, S means the actual spindle speed. This is the S command value multiplied by the spindle speed override. F is the actual feedrate. If PF1 (the 1st approach speed of the sensor) is not specified with an argument, this value is 2,000 multiplied by the cutting feedrate override. If PF1 is specified with an argument, this value is the specified value multiplied by the cutting feedrate override. N is the number of tool blades. [Sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction (OO93)] This cycle determines the sensor position used to gauge the tool length and detect tool breakage. The offset method can be switched by bit 7 of VFST. Bit 7 of VFST

OFF : Relatively position offset ON

: Absolutely position offset

Do not change this setting after you select the offset method here. The gauging results are stored in the system-work coordinates No.20.

5249-E P-336 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Calling sequence CALL OO93

PAXI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PRET=1] [PCON=1] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]

PAXI: Axis of which zero point is set (bit0: the X-axis, bit1: the Y-axis, bit2: Z-axis) When the sensor position is 0 or 2, set PAXI at #06H. When a movable sensor is used, the sensor and the tool may interfere with each other and the machine will consequently get damaged if the Y-axis position is not set. When the sensor position is 1 or 3, set PAXI at #05H. When a movable sensor is used, the sensor and the tool may interfere with each other and the machine will consequently get damaged if the X-axis position is not set. PLI: Reference tool length For the absolute position offset (as mentioned earlier), specify the length from the gauge line to the end of the reference tool. For the relative position offset, specify the difference between the reference tool length for relative position offset and the reference tool length used for individual gauging. If they are the same, just specify 0. PRS: Spindle orientation position If PRS is omitted and an M code for spindle rotation (M03 or M04) is specified, the tool is measured while in rotation. When PRS is specified, the spindle is orient-stopped and the sensor gauges the stopped tool. With out the above M code, however, the spindle is orient-stopped and the sensor gauges the stopped tool even if PRS is omitted. PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] Specify the width of gauging in one direction. In scanning gauging, the sensor measures the tool in both positive and negative directions. Without designation of PSPN, the sensor cannot gauge the tool. The default pick feed for gauging is 0.1 mm (0.004 in.). Scanning gauging is in tended for determining the maximum tool length position. When the measured value decreased, it is assumed that the subsequent gauging data will no more in crease. This means the sensor does not need to continue gauging before it covers the width of PSPN. The criterion for stopping gauging is called skip value. The default is 0.005 mm (0.00020 in.).

5249-E P-337 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number Set the offset amount to VATSC [185, attachment offset number].Use this number when performing the sensor zero setting cycle using an attachment. The movable sensor cannot gauge a horizontal tool. Therefore, this number applies only to the gauging on extension attachments. PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Usually the Z-axis is positioned near the positive travel limit where the gauging cycle is finished. To hold the Z-axis after gauging, specify “1” for PCON. PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* Usually the sensor retracts after gauging. To hold the sensor position after gauging, specify “1” for PRET. * When “1” is set at the Z-axis retract inhibiting parameter, “1” is automatically set also at the sensor retraction inhibiting parameter. This is because the sensor interferes with a machine component when it advances or retracts depending on the axis position or the machine. PF1: 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: 3rd approach speed of the sensor & 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: 4th approach speed of the sensor & 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Usually, the tool approaches the sensor four times. In scanning gauging, the tool approaches the sensor twice. Here, specify the approach speed at that time. The default speed is 2,000 mm/min, 1,000 mm/min, 100 mm/min, and 3 mm/min respectively. In the case of gauging of a rotating tool, the 4th approach speed depends on rotation speed (0.001 x S [mm]/min). PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow(3 [s] by default)

• Gauging operation 1.

Install the reference tool.

2.

Advance the sensor with M144. (Ensure that the sensor does not interfere with anything.)

3.

Turn on the laser with M375. (The laser is turned off by M374.)

4.

Locate the tool near the sensor by hand. (Locate the tool in a position where the sensor works by Z-axis movement)

5.

Execute the sensor zero setting cycle in automatic or MDI operation mode.

5249-E P-338 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Y-axis is positioned.

6.

The X-axis is positioned.

7.

The Z-axis moves to the under-travel position.

8.

The laser shutter opens.

9.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

10. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position. 11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 12. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 13. The laser shutter closes. 14. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 15. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.12 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.14 and 15 is omitted when PRET is specified.

[Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction (OO94)] This cycle determines the sensor position for gauging the cutter radius and detecting tool breakage. The gauging results are stored in the system work coordinates No.20.

• Calling sequence CALL OO94 PAXI=* PRI=* PLI=* [PIN=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] PAXI: Axis of which zero point is set (bit0: X-axis, bit1: Y-axis, and bit2: Z-axis) When the sensor position is 0 or 2, set PAXI at #01H. When the sensor position is 1 or 3, set PAXI at #02H. PRI: Reference tool radial Specify the cutter radius of the reference tool. PLI: Reference tool length Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PIN: Z-axis infeed amount When the sensor zero setting cycle is executed, the sensor starts gauging by shifting from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with PIN. PRS: Spindle orientation position Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.))

5249-E P-339 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION PAT: Attachment offset number Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. * Points to be noted in the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction also apply to this parameter. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default)

• Gauging operation 1.

Install the reference tool.

2.

Advance the sensor with M144. (Ensure that the sensor does not interfere with anything.)

3.

Turn on the laser with M375. (The laser is turned off by M374.)

4.

Locate the tool near the sensor by hand. (Locate the tool in a position where the sensor works by Y-axis or X-axis movement.

5.

Execute the sensor zero setting cycle in automatic or MDI operation mode.

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.*3

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Y-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position.*2

6.

The X-axis is positioned at the under-travel position.*2

7.

The Z-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position. (When PIN is specified, the Zaxis shifts from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

8.

The laser shutter opens.

9.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

10. The X-axis moves to the sensor position.*2 11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 12. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 13. The laser shutter closes. 14. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.*, *3 15. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.12 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.14 and 15 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-340 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION *2

When the sensor position is 1 or 3 (for measurement in Y-axis direction), the Y-axis moves instead of the X-axis in the above steps 6 and 10, and the X-axis moves instead of Y-axis in the above step 5.

*3

When the sensor position is 1 or 3 (for measurement in Y-axis direction), Y-axis retraction does not take place.

[Gauging in the lengthwise direction] This cycle gauges the tool length. When gauging the tool length, turn on bit 0 of the systemvariable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO95 PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length Specify the (expected) tool length. PRS: Spindle orientation position Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]:Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number An offset must be set at VATSC [185, attachment offset designation number]. Use this setting for executing a sensor zero setting cycle using an attachment. It is also necessary to match the attachment number with the attachment offset number. Set attachment rotation offset numbers (G181 to G185) to the attachment in ascending order. Example: T301: Offset number 1 (PAT = 1 at this time) T302: Offset number 2 (PAT = 2 at this time) T303: Offset number 3 (PAT = 3 at this time) : : When a movable sensor is used, horizontal tools cannot be measured. In this case, only gauging using an extension attachment is available. PH: Tool length offset number Specify the tool length offset number where the gauged tool length is stored. When PH is omitted, the active tool offset number (VTLCN) is set. PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction.

5249-E P-341 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times. If PSAM is set to 2 or more, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the set number of times. For the 1st gauging, the NC performs normal gauging (with 4 times of approach). For the 2nd and later gauging cycles, the NC performs gauging by 2 times of approach to the sensor. The approaching speeds in the 2nd and later gauging cycles are as follows: 1st approach ... The 3rd approach speed in the normal gauging cycle 2nd approach ... The 4th approach speed in the normal gauging cycle The average value obtained by several times of gauging is regarded as the finally measured value. The 2nd and later gauging cycles do not include the scanning gauging. The default is 3 (times). PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements The maximum and the minimum values are obtained from the results of several times of gauging. Set the allowable range of the difference between the maximum and minimum measurements (variation) at this parameter. The default is 0.005 [mm]. PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) Set whether the variation exceeding the allowable range causes an alarm or not. Set “1” if you want an alarm to be generated. Set “0” if not. The default is “0” (no alarm). PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry). Set whether the variation exceeding the allowable range triggers another gauging cycle or not. When retry is desired, set the number of retry times at PRTY. If retry is not desired, set “0” at PRTY. The NC performs gauging by the number of times set at PSAM (number of gauging times) for each retry gauging. During the retry gauging, two times of approach is made even in the 1st gauging cycle. If the variation does not fall within the allowable range after the specified number of retrials, an alarm occurs. If PSRA is set to “1”, the PRTY value is ignored. If “0” is set at both PSRA and PRTY, the average value is regarded as the measured value even when the variation is out of the allowable range. The default is “0” (no retry).

5249-E P-342 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

6.

The X-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

7.

The sensor-air-blower is turned off.

8.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The Z-axis moves to the sensor position.

10. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 11. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 12. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position. 13. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 14. The laser shutter closes. 15. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 16. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.13 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.15 and 16 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-343 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [Gauging in the radial direction] This cycle gauges the cutter radius. When gauging the cutter radius, turn on bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO96 PRI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length Specify the offset amount of the tool length. PRI: Cutter radius Specify the offset amount of the cutter radius (: the expected offset amount of the cutter radius). PRS: Spindle orientation position Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PIN: Z-axis infeed amount The sensor starts gauging by shifting from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with PIN. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number Refer to the Gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction. PD: Cutter radius compensation number Specify the cutter radius compensation number where is stored the gauged cutter radius. When omitted, the active tool compensation number (VTLCN) is set. PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction. PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction. PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction. PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry) Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction.

5249-E P-344 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.*3

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.*2

6.

The X-axis moves to the under-travel position.*2

7.

The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the sensor position shift sin infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

8.

The laser shutter opens.

9.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

10. The X-axis moves to the sensor position.*2 11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 12. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 13. The X-axis moves to the sensor position.*2 14. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 15. The laser shutter closes. 16. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.*, *3 17. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.14 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.16 and 17 is omitted when PRET is specified.

*2

When the sensor position is 1 or 3 (for measurement in Y-axis direction), the Y-axis moves instead of the Y-axis in the above steps 6, 10, 13, and the X-axis moves instead of X-axis in the above step 5.

*3

When the sensor position is 1 or 3 (for measurement in Y-axis direction), Y-axis retraction does not take place.

5249-E P-345 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [Gauging the sphericity (OO99)] This cycle gauges the sphericity at the tip of ball end mill.

• Calling sequence CALL OO99 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PRE=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] PH: Tool management number Specify the tool management number where the tool length offset amount and the cutter radius compensation amount are stored for judgment of sphericity. When PH is omitted, the active tool number (VTLCN) is set. PLI: Tool length Specify the tool length. When omitted, the offset amount of the tool management number is set. PRI: Cutter radius Specify the cutter radius. When omitted, the compensation amount of the tool management number is set. PRA: The angle added for gauging sphericity The sensor gauges the sphericity from the length wise direction to the radial direction. Specify the incremental angle used for this gauging. The angle must be 5° or over and a divisor of 90°. Default is 15°. PRS: Spindle orientation position Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number Refer to the Gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction. PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PRE: Maximum allowable error When the error in the sphericity gauging exceeds this amount, an alarm occurs. When PRE is not specified, the cycle does not judge the errors. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default)

5249-E P-346 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.*3

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

6.

The X-axis is positioned.*2

7.

The laser shutter opens.

8.

Gauging cycle starts.(Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The X-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position.*2

10. The PRA angle is added and the sensor gauges sphericity in the slanting direction. 11. Operation sequences No.9 and 10 are repeated up to the gauging angle of 90°. 12. The X-axis and Z-axis move to the sensor position.*2 13. The sensor gauges in the radial direction. 14. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 15. The laser shutter closes. 16. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.*, *3 17. The sensor retracts.* 18. The sphericity is judged, if the judgement command is specified. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.14 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.16 and 17 is omitted when PRET is specified.

*2

When the sensor position is 1 or 3 (for measurement in Y-axis direction), the Y-axis moves instead of the Y-axis in the above steps 6, 9, 12, and the Y-axis moves instead of X-axis in the above step 5.

*3

When the sensor position is 1 or 3 (for measurement in Y-axis direction), Y-axis retraction does not take place.

5249-E P-347 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [Tool breakage detection in the lengthwise direction] This cycle detect the tool breakage in the lengthwise direction. When the breakage detection in the lengthwise direction, turnoff bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO95 [PLI=*][PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*][PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length Specify the tool length (: the expected tool length). PRS: Spindle orientation position Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning[Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number Refer to the Gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction. PH: Tool length offset number Specify the tool length offset number of which data is compared with the gauging result. When omitted, the active tool number (VTLCN) is set. PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PGO: Action to be taken on detection of tool breakage PGO= The tool is changed on detection of tool breakage. 1 PGO= The tool is changed on detection of tool breakage. The broken tool 2 moves to the tool change position before being changed. If PGO is omitted, the cycle ends with alarm occurrence. PLE1: Threshold value for judging tool breakage Specify the threshold value for judging tool breakage as a difference from the tool offset value. Default is 0.1 mm (0.004 in.). PLE2: Threshold value for judging tool wear Specify the threshold value for judging tool wear as a difference from the tool offset value. When the difference is less than PLE2, the NC judges that the tool is worn and up dates the tool length offset amount. If PLE2 is omitted, the NC does not make this judgment. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default)

5249-E P-348 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION PSAM: The number of gauging times Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction. PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction. PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction. PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry) Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction.

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

6.

The X-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

7.

The laser shutter opens.

8.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The Z-axis moves to the sensor position.

10. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 11. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 12. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position. 13. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 14. The laser shutter closes. 15. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 16. The sensor retracts.* 17. The tool breakage or the tool wear are judged. 18. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.13 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.15 and 16 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-349 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [Tool breakage detection in the radial direction] This cycle detects the tool breakage in the radial direction. For the breakage detection in the radial direction, turn off bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO96 [PRI=*] [PLI=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length Specify the offset amount of the tool length. PRI: Cutter radius Specify the offset amount of the cutter radius (: the expected offset amount of the cutter radius). PRS: Spindle orientation position Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PIN: Z-axis infeed amount The sensor starts gauging by shifting from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with PIN. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number Refer to the Gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction. PD: Cutter radius compensation number The cutter radius is compared with this value. When omitted, the data of the active tool number (VTLCN) is set. PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PGO: Action to be taken on detection of tool breakage Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction and the tool breakage detection cycle. PLE1: Threshold value for judging tool breakage Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction and the tool breakage detection cycle. PLE2: Threshold value for judging tool wear Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction and the tool breakage detection cycle. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle

5249-E P-350 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction. PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction. PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction. PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry) Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction.

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.*3

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.*2

6.

The X-axis moves to the under-travel position.*2

7.

The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Z-axis shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

8.

The laser shutter opens.

9.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

10. The X-axis moves to the sensor position. 11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 12. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 13. The X-axis moves to the sensor position.*2 14. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 15. The laser shutter closes. 16. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.*, *3 17. The sensor retracts.* 18. The tool breakage or the tool wear are judged. 19. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.14 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.16 and 17 is omitted when PRET is specified.

*2

When the sensor position is 1 or 3 (for measurement in Y-axis direction), the Y-axis moves instead of the X-axis in the above steps 6, 10, 13, and the Y-axis moves instead of X-axis in the above step 5.

*3

When the sensor position is 1 or 3 (for measurement in Y-axis direction), Y-axis retraction does not take place.

5249-E P-351 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [High-speed tool breakage detection] This cycle detects the tool length breakage.The high-speed tool breakage detection is executed on the assumption that a broken tool does not interrupt the sensor beam as shown in the right figure. This cycle, however, may not be able to detects light tool breakage.

ME61012R0700900030004

• Calling sequence CALL OO97 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] PLI: Tool length Specify the tool length offset amount. When omitted, the value specified with the offset number is set. PRI: Cutter radius Specify the cutter radius compensation amount. When omitted, the value specified with the offset number is set. PRS: Spindle orientation position Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PIN: Z-axis infeed amount The sensor starts gauging by shifting from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with PIN. (Default: 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)) PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number Refer to the Gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction. PH: Tool offset number Specify the tool off set number. When omitted, the active tool number (VTLCN) is set. PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction.

5249-E P-352 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.*3

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.*2

6.

The X-axis moves to the under-travel position.*2

7.

The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Z-axis shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

8.

The laser shutter opens.

9.

The X-axis skips to the target position (sensor position + over travel position).*2

10. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 11. The laser shutter closes. 12. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.*, *3 13. The sensor retracts.* 14. The tool breakage is judged. 15. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.10 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.12 and 13 is omitted when PRET is specified.

*2

When the sensor position is 1 or 3 (for measurement in Y-axis direction), the Y-axis moves instead of Y-axis in the above steps 6 and 9, and the Y-axis moves instead of Xaxis in the above step 5.

*3

When the sensor position is 1 or 3 (for measurement in Y-axis direction), Y-axis retraction does not take place.

5249-E P-353 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

4.

Maker’s Subprogram in the Fixed Sensor Mode The sensor mode (fixed/movable) can be switched by bit 3 of the system-variable VFST. When selecting the fixed sensor mode, turn on bit 3 of the variable. A fixed sensor can gauge a horizontal spindle tool (an attachment tool) or a vertical spindle tool. The sensor mode (horizontal/vertical) can be switched by bit 6 of the system-variable VFST. For gauging a horizontal spindle tool, turn on bit 6 of the variable. The gauging cycles for vertical and horizontal spindle tools are described below:

ME61012R0700900040001

5249-E P-354 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

5.

Maker’s Subprogram for Gauging a Vertical Spindle Tool in the Fixed Sensor Mode Like the gauging program for the movable sensor, the program for gauging a vertical spindle tool by the fixed sensor consists of the following subroutines: [List of gauging preparation cycle] OO31

Position setting cycle for tool change

OO33

Position setting cycle for Y- axis retract

OO93

Sensor zero setting cycle in the length wise direction

OO94

Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction

[List of gauging cycle] OO95

Gauging in the length wise direction

OO96

Gauging in the radial direction

OO99

Gauging the sphericity

[List of tool breakage detection cycle] OO95

Tool breakage detection in the length wise direction

OO96

Tool breakage detection in the radial direction

OO97

High-speed tool breakage detection

[Tool change position setting cycle (OO31)] Refer to “3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode” [Tool change position setting cycle (OO31)]. [Y- axis retract position setting cycle (OO33)] Refer to “3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode” [Y- axis retract position setting cycle (OO33)] [Spindle speed] When performing gauging while rotating the spindle, specify the spindle speed by referring to the speed obtained by the following formula: S=F/N Here, S means the actual spindle speed. This is the S command value multiplied by the spindle speed override. F is the actual feedrate. If PF1 (the 1st approach speed of the sensor) is not specified with an argument, this value is 2,000 multiplied by the cutting feedrate override. If PF1 is specified with an argument, this value is the specified value multiplied by the cutting feedrate override. Additionally, when PF1 is specified with an argument, this is a value calculated by multiplying the commanded value by the cutting feedrate override. N is the number of tool blades. [Sensor zero setting cycle in the length wise direction (OO93)] This cycle determines the sensor position used to gauge the tool length and detect tool breakage. The offset method can be switched by bit 7 of VFST. Bit 7 of VFST

OFF : Relatively position offset ON

: Absolutely position offset

Do not change this setting after you select the offset method here. The gauging results are stored in the system-work coordinates No.20.

5249-E P-355 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Calling sequence CALL OO93 PAXI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PRET=1] [PCON=1] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] PAXI: Axis of which zero point is set (bit0: the X-axis, bit1: the Y-axis, bit2: Z-axis) Normal setting data is PAXI=#04H. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) PLI: Reference tool length PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PAT: Attachment offset number PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PF1: 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: 3rd approach speed of the sensor & 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: 4th approach speed of the sensor & 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) Refer to 3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode.

• Gauging operation 1.

Install the reference tool.

2.

Advance the sensor with M144. (Ensure that the sensor does not interfere with anything.)

3.

Turn on the laser with M375. (The laser is turned off by M374.)

4.

Locate the tool near the sensor by hand.(Locate the tool in a position where the sensor works by Z-axis movement)

5.

Execute the sensor zero setting cycle in automatic or MDI operation mode.

5249-E P-356 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Y-axis is positioned.

6.

The X-axis is positioned.

7.

The Z-axis moves to the under-travel position.

8.

The laser shutter opens.

9.

Gauging cycle starts.(Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

10. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position. 11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 12. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 13. The laser shutter closes. 14. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 15. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No. 12 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.14 and 15 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-357 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction (OO94)] This cycle determines the sensor position for gauging the cutter radius and detecting tool breakage. The gauging results are stored in the system work coordinates No.20.

• Calling sequence CALL OO94 PAXI=* PRI=* PLI=* [PIN=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] PAXI: Axis of which zero point is set (bit0: X-axis, bit1: Y-axis, and bit2: Z-axis) Normal setting is #02H. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) PRI: Reference cutter radius PLI: Reference tool length PIN: Z-axis infeed amount PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PAT: Attachment offset number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PF1: 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: 3rd approach speed of the sensor & 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: 4th approach speed of the sensor & 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Refer to “3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode”. PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default)

• Gauging operation 1.

Install the reference tool.

2.

Advance the sensor with M144. (Ensure that the sensor does not interfere with anything.)

3.

Turn on the laser with M375. (The laser is turned off by M374.)

4.

Locate the tool near the sensor by hand. (Locate the tool in a position where the sensor works by Y-axis movement)

5.

Execute the sensor zero setting cycle in automatic or MDI operation mode.

5249-E P-358 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Y-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position.

6.

The X-axis moves to the under-travel position.

7.

The Z-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position. (When PIN is specified, the Zaxis shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

8.

The laser shutter opens.

9.

Gauging cycle starts.(Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

10. The Y-axis moves to the sensor position. 11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 12. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 13. The laser shutter closes. 14. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 15. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.12 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.14 and 15 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-359 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [Gauging in the length wise direction] This cycle gauges the tool length. When gauging the tool length, turn on bit 0 of the systemvariable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO95 PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number PH: Tool length offset number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry). Refer to “3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode”.

5249-E P-360 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

6.

The X-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

7.

The laser shutter opens.

8.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The Z-axis moves to the sensor position.

10. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 11. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 12. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position. 13. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 14. The laser shutter closes. 15. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 16. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.13 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.15 and 16 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-361 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [Gauging in the radial direction] This cycle gauges the cutter radius. For gauging the cutter radius, turn on bit 0 of the systemvariable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO96 PRI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length PRI: Cutter radius PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PIN: Z-axis infeed amount PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number PD: Cutter radius compensation number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PGO: Action to be taken on detection of tool breakage PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry). Refer to “3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode”.

5249-E P-362 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

6.

The X-axis moves to the under-travel position.

7.

The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Z-axis shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

8.

The laser shutter opens.

9.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

10. The X-axis moves to the sensor position. 11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 12. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 13. The X-axis moves to the sensor position. 14. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 15. The laser shutter closes. 16. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 17. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.14 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.16 and 17 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-363 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [Gauging the sphericity (OO99)] This cycle gauges the sphericity at the tip of a ball end mill.

• Calling sequence CALL OO99 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PRE=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] PH: Tool length offset number, Cutter radius compensation number PLI: Tool length PRI: Cutter radius PRA: The angle added for gauging sphericity PRS: Spindle orientation position PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PRE: Detected error PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) Refer to “3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode”.

5249-E P-364 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

6.

The X-axis is positioned.

7.

The laser shutter opens.

8.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The X-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position.

10. The PRA angle is added and the sensor gauges sphericity in the slanting direction. 11. Operation sequences No.9 and 10 are repeated up to the gauging angle of 90°. 12. The X-axis and Z-axis move to the sensor position. 13. The sensor gauges in the radial direction. 14. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 15. The laser shutter closes. 16. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 17. The sensor retracts.* 18. The sphericity is judged, if the judgment command is specified. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.14 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.16 and 17 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-365 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [Tool breakage detection in the length wise direction] This cycle detect the tool breakage in the length wise direction. For the breakage detection in the lengthwise direction, turn off bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO95 [PLI=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*][PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number PH: Tool length offset number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PGO: Action to be taken on detection of tool breakage PLE1: Threshold value for judging tool breakage PLE2: Threshold value for judging tool wear PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry). Refer to “3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode”.

5249-E P-366 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

6.

The X-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

7.

The laser shutter opens.

8.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The Z-axis moves to the sensor position.

10. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 11. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 12. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position. 13. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 14. The laser shutter closes. 15. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 16. The sensor retracts.* 17. The gauging result is judged to be tool breakage or tool wear. 18. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.13 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.15 and 16 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-367 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [Tool breakage detection in the radial direction] This cycle detects the tool breakage in the radial direction. For the breakage detection in the radial direction, turn off bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO96 [PRI=*] [PLI=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length PRI: Cutter radius PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PIN: Z-axis infeed amount PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number PD: Cutter radius compensation number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PGO: Action to be taken on detection of tool breakage PLE1: Threshold value for judging tool breakage PLE2: Threshold value for judging tool wear PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry). Refer to “3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode”.

5249-E P-368 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

6.

The X-axis moves to the under-travel position.

7.

The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Z-axis shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

8.

The laser shutter opens.

9.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

10. The X-axis moves to the sensor position. 11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 12. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 13. The X-axis moves to the sensor position. 14. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 15. The laser shutter closes. 16. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 17. The sensor retracts.* 18. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool breakage or the tool wear are judged. 19. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.14 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.16 and 17 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-369 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [High-speed tool breakage detection] The tool breakage is detected at high-speed.

• Calling sequence CALL OO97 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] PLI: Tool length PRI: Cutter radius PRS: Spindle orientation position PIN: Z-axis infeed amount PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number PH: Tool offset number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Refer to “3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode”.

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

6.

The X-axis moves to the under-travel position.

7.

The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position.(When PIN is specified, the Z-axis shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

8.

The laser shutter opens.

9.

The X-axis skips to the target position (sensor position + over travel position).

10. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 11. The laser shutter closes. 12. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 13. The sensor retracts.* 14. The gauging result is judged to be tool breakage. 15. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.10 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.12 and 13 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-370 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

6.

Maker’s Subprogram for Gauging a Horizontal Spindle Tool in the Fixed Sensor Mode The sensor mode (fixed/movable) can be switched by bit 3 of the system-variable VFST. When selecting the fixed sensor mode, turn on bit 3 of the variable. A fixed sensor can gauge a horizontal spindle tool (an attachment tool) or a vertical spindle tool. The sensor mode (horizontal/vertical) can be switched by bit 6 of the system-variable VFST. For gauging a horizontal spindle tool, turn on bit 6 of the variable.

ME61012R0700900060001

Like the gauging cycles in the movable sensor mode, the horizontal tool gauging program in the fixed sensor mode consists of the following sub routines: [List of gauging preparation cycle] OO31

Position setting cycle for tool change

OO32

Z- axis lowering position setting cycle

OO93

Sensor zero setting cycle in the length wise direction

OO94

Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction

[List of gauging cycle] OO95

Gauging in the length wise direction

OO96

Gauging in the radial direction

OO99

Gauging the sphericity

[List of tool breakage detection cycle] OO95

Tool breakage detection in the length wise direction

OO96

Tool breakage detection in the radial direction

OO97

High-speed tool breakage detection

[Tool change position setting cycle (OO31)] Refer to “3. Maker’s subprogram in the movable sensor mode” [Tool change position setting cycle (OO31)]. [Z- axis lowering position setting cycle (OO32)] For the gauging on extension attachments, the Z-axis lowering position has to been specified. This OO32 cycle set this position. Refer to “Section 1. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET / AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION”.

5249-E P-371 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [Sensor zero setting cycle in the length wise direction (OO93)] This cycle determines the sensor position used to gauge the tool length and detect tool breakage. The offset method can be switched by bit 7 of VFST. Bit 7 of VFST

OFF : Relatively position offset ON

: Absolutely position offset

Do not change this setting after you select the offset method here. The gauging results are stored in the system-work coordinates No.23.

• Calling sequence CALL OO93 PAXI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PRET=1] [PCON=1] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] PAXI: Axis of which zero point is set (bit0: the X-axis,bit1: the Y-axis, bit2: Z-axis) Normal setting data is PAXI=#02H. PLI: Reference tool length PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PF1: 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: 3rd approach speed of the sensor & 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: 4th approach speed of the sensor & 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) Refer to “3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode”.

• Gauging operation 1.

Install the reference tool. Set the attachment direction to the right on the user’s responsibility.

2.

Advance the sensor with M144. (Ensure that the sensor does not interfere with anything.)

3.

Turn on the laser with M375. (The laser is turned off by M374.)

4.

Locate the tool near the sensor by hand. (Locate the tool in a position where the sensor works by Y-axis movement)

5.

Execute the sensor zero setting cycle in automatic or MDI operation mode.

5249-E P-372 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Z-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position.

6.

The Y-axis moves to the under-travel position.

7.

The laser shutter opens.

8.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The Y-axis moves to the sensor position.

10. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 11. The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position. 12. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 13. The laser shutter closes. 14. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.12 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.14 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-373 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction (OO94)] This cycle determines the sensor position for gauging the cutter radius and detecting the tool breakage. The gauging results are stored in the system work coordinates No.23.

• Calling sequence CALL OO94 PAXI=* PRI=* PLI=* [PIN=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] PAXI: Axis of which zero point is set (bit0: X-axis, bit1: Y-axis, and bit2: Z-axis) Normal setting is #04H. PRI: Reference cutter radius PLI: Reference tool length PIN: Z-axis infeed amount VEST: Sensor setting position PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PF1: 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: 3rd approach speed of the sensor & 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: 4th approach speed of the sensor & 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) Refer to “3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode”.

• Gauging operation 1.

Install the reference tool. Set the attachment direction to the right on the user’s responsibility.

2.

Advance the sensor with M144. (Ensure that the sensor does not interfere with anything.)

3.

Turn on the laser with M375. (The laser is turned off by M374.)

4.

Locate the tool near the sensor by hand. (Locate the tool in a position where the sensor works by Z-axis movement)

5.

Execute the sensor zero setting cycle in automatic or MDI operation mode.

5249-E P-374 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Z-axis moves to the under-travel position.

6.

The Y-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position. (When PIN is specified, the Yaxis shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

7.

The laser shutter opens.

8.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The Z-axis moves to the sensor position.

10. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 11. The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position. 12. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 13. The laser shutter closes. 14. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.12 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.14 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-375 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [Gauging in the length wise direction] This cycle gauges the tool length. When gauging the tool length, turn on bit 0 of the systemvariable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO95 PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PH=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning][Skip value in scanning] PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment off set number PH: Tool length offset number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry). Refer to “3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode”.

5249-E P-376 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

6.

The Y-axis is positioned at the under-travel position.

7.

The laser shutter opens.

8.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The Y-axis moves to the sensor position.

10. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 11. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 12. The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position. 13. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 14. The laser shutter closes. 15. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.13 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.15 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-377 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [Gauging in the radial direction] This cycle gauges the cutter radius. When gauging the cutter radius, turn on bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO96 PRI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length PRI: Cutter radius PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC][PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PIN: Y-axis infeed amount PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number PD: Cutter radius compensation number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry). Refer to “3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode”.

5249-E P-378 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Z-axis moves to the under-travel position.

6.

The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Y-axis shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

7.

The laser shutter opens.

8.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The Z-axis moves to the sensor position.

10. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 11. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 12. The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position. 13. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 14. The laser shutter closes. 15. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.13 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.15 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-379 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [Gauging the sphericity (OO99)] This cycle gauges the sphericity at the tip of a ball end mill.

• Calling sequence CALL OO99 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PRE=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] PH: Tool length offset number, Cutter radius compensation number PLI: Tool length PRI: Cutter radius PRA: The angle added for gauging sphericity PRS: Spindle orientation position PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PRE: Detected error PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) Refer to “3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode”.

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

6.

The Y-axis moves to the under-travel position.

7.

The laser shutter opens.

8.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The Y-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position.

10. The PRA angle is added and the sensor gauges sphericity in the slanting direction. 11. Operation sequences No.9 and 10 are repeated up to the gauging angle of 90°. 12. The Y-axis and Z-axis move to the sensor position. 13. The sensor gauges in the radial direction. 14. The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position. 15. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 16. The laser shutter closes. 17. The sensor retracts.* 18. The sphericity is judged, if the judgment command is specified. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.15 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.17 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-380 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [Tool breakage detection in the lengthwise direction] This cycle detect the tool breakage in the lengthwise direction. When the breakage detection in the lengthwise direction, turn off bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO95 [PLI=*][PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PH=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*][PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number PH: Tool length offset number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PGO: Action to be taken on detection of tool breakage PLE1: Threshold value for judging tool breakage PLE2: Threshold value for judging tool wear PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry). Refer to “3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode”.

5249-E P-381 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

6.

The Y-axis moves to the under-travel position.

7.

The laser shutter opens.

8.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The Y-axis moves to the sensor position.

10. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 11. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 12. The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position. 13. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 14. The laser shutter closes. 15. The sensor retracts.* 16. The gauging result is judged to be tool breakage or tool wear. 17. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.13 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.15 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-382 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [Tool breakage detection in the radial direction] This cycle detects the tool breakage in the radial direction. For the breakage detection in the radial direction, turn off bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO96 [PRI=*] [PLI=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*][PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length PRI: Cutter radius PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PIN: Y-axis infeed amount PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number PD: Cutter radius compensation number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PGO: Action to be taken on detection of tool breakage PLE1: Threshold value for judging tool breakage PLE2: Threshold value for judging tool wear PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry). Refer to “3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode”.

5249-E P-383 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Z-axis moves to the under-travel position.

6.

The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Y-axis is positioned at the shifting point from the sensor position by a distance specified with PIN.)

7.

The laser shutter opens.

8.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The Z-axis moves to the sensor position.

10. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 11. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 12. The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position. 13. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 14. The laser shutter closes. 15. The sensor retracts.* 16. If the tool breakage is detected, the NC judges if the tool has been broken or worn. 17. If the judgment is tool breakage, the NC changes the tool according to the PGO setting. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.13 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.15 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-384 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION [High-speed tool breakage detection] The tool breakage is detected at high-speed.

• Calling sequence CALL OO97 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PH=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] PLI: Tool length PRI: Cutter radius PRS: Spindle orientation position PIN: Y-axis infeed amount PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number PH: Tool offset number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Refer to “3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode”.

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The Z-axis moves to the under-travel position.

6.

The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Y-axis shifts in feed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

7.

The laser shutter opens.

8.

The Z-axis skips to the target position (sensor position + over travel position).

9.

The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position.

10. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 11. The laser shutter closes. 12. The sensor retracts.* 13. The tool breakage is judged. 14. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.10 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.12 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-385 SECTION 6 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION

7. 2583

List of Alarms Alarm B UNTENDED: Large error in measurement of sphericity Large errors were detected in measurement of sphericity. [Probable Faulty Locations] In the sensor zero setting cycle, the sensor zero position in the horizontal direction did not match the tool center. Or, the measuring tool was defective. [Measures to Take] Use a proper tool, such as a spare tool.

2305

Alarm B UNTENDED: Measurement impossible Measurement became impossible during auto gauging cycle. For this gauging system, the following codes are added to this alarm: 6A

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the first approach.

6B

Contact could not be confirmed in the first approach.

6C

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the second approach.

6D

Contact could not be confirmed in the second approach.

6E

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the third approach.

6F

Contact could not be confirmed in the third approach.

70

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the fourth approach.

71

Contact could not be confirmed in the fourth approach.

72

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in retraction of the skipping cycle.

73

Contact could not be confirmed in the first approach of the skipping cycle.

74

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in retraction of the skipping cycle.

75

Contact could not be confirmed in the second approach of the skipping cycle.

7B

The first sensor could not be confirmed in the high-speed tool breakage detection cycle.

7C

The sensor could not be confirmed after skipping in the high-speed tool breakage detection cycle.

95

In the plural measurement operations, the difference between the minimum and maximum measured values exceeded the tolerance.

96

The attachment type does not match the gauging program number. 30° angular ATOO125, OO126, OO127, and OO129 are usable. 45° angular ATOO115, OO116, OO117, and OO119 are usable. Vertical/Horizontal spindles In execution of OO95, OO96, OO97, or OO99, no attachment is mounted, or the attachment is not extension one, 90° angular one, or B-/C-axis one.

97

The attachment is not indexed to an angle where measurement is possible. 30° angular ATNot indexed to C270° 45° angular ATNot indexed to C270° Vertical/Horizontal spindles90° angular AT not indexed to C270° B-/C-axis AT indexed to B90° but not indexed to C270°

99

The vertical/horizontal spindle tool command (bit 6 of VFST) is wrong. “1” (horizontal spindle) is set at bit 6 of VFST when no attachment was mounted or an extension AT was mounted for vertical/horizontal spindle measurement. Or, “0” (horizontal spindle) is set at bit 6 of VFST when 90° angular AT or B-/C-axis AT is mounted.

5249-E P-386 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

SECTION 7 1.

NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

What is Non-contact Sensor? The non-contact sensor uses a laser beam for measurement unlike existing sensors with mechanical or electric contacts. This optical sensor, by taking advantages of a non-contact sensor, can gauge even a rotating tool, which used to be impossible for the existing sensors. The sensor can increase the gauging speed, and can gauge sphericity by taking the advantage of a linear sensor. However, the bloom sensor in tended for linear gauging can not gauge the maximum length (or radial) of an irregular shaped tool depending on the sensor position. Scanning gauging* makes up this disadvantage. This gauging method permits gauging of a rotating tool or gauging while searching the maximum length.

ME61012R0701000010001

* Scanning gauging: The sensor gauges a tool in a gauging direction (e.g. the Y-axis) and shifts along the axis at right angles with the gauging axis (e.g. the Z-axis). By repeating the above gauging several times, the sensor determines the maximum tool length (or diameter).

5249-E P-387 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

2.

Outline Non-contact sensor gauging is roughly classified into two methods according to the position wherethe sensor is installed: This gauging function is possible only with the fixed sensor type.

Y+ X+

Z+

ME61012R0701000020001

The sensor mode (fixed/movable) can be switched by bit 3 of the system-variable VFST. Bit 3 of VFST

0

...... Movable sensor

1

...... Fixed sensor

The tool-gauging program consists of the following maker’s subprograms:

• Preparation program for gauging • Gauging program • Tool breakage detection program Programs classified by the sensor position are described on the following pages.

3.

Gauging with the Fixed Sensor Movable sensor and fixed sensor can be switched with the setting at bit 3 of the system variable VFST. To select the fixed sensor, set ON the bit 3. Perform this gauging by setting OFF the bit 6 of the system variable VFST.

5249-E P-388 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

4.

Each Manufacturer’s Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor The gauging subprogram for the fixed sensor consists of the following subroutines:

ME61012R0701000040003

[List of gauging preparation cycle] OO31

Position setting cycle for tool change

OO33

Position setting cycle for Y-axis retract

OO93

Sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction

OO94

Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction

[List of gauging cycle] OO95

Gauging in the lengthwise direction

OO96

Gauging in the radial direction

OO99

Gauging the sphericity

[List of tool breakage detection cycle] OO95

Tool breakage detection in the lengthwise direction

OO96

Tool breakage detection in the radial direction

OO97

High-speed tool breakage detection

[Tool change position setting cycle (OO31)] On the machine of which tool change function is set at ON (bit 0 of NC specification code No.21 is turned on), the NC performs tool change by transferring the argument PGO=2 on detection of tool breakage. The cycle sets the tool change position used for that purpose. The tool change position is stored in the system-work coordinates No.2. For details, refer to “Section 1. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET / AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION”. CALL OO31 [Y-axis retract position setting cycle (OO33)] In some machines, the sensor may interfere with the Y-axis when it advances or retracts. If interference is anticipated, move the Y-axis to its retract position before advancing or retracting the sensor. If necessary, refer to “Section 1. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET / AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION”. CALL OO33

5249-E P-389 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC [Spindle speed] When performing gauging while rotating the spindle, specify the spindle speed by referring to the speed obtained by the following formula: S=F/N Here, S means the actual spindle speed. This is the S command value multiplied by the spindle speed override. F is the actual feedrate. If PFI (the 1st approach speed of the sensor) is not specified with an argument, this value is 2,000 multiplied by the cutting feedrate override. If PFI is specified with an argument, this value is the specified value multiplied by the cutting feedrate override. N is the number of tool blades. [B-axis positioning function] This function moves the B-axis to the machine zero before execution of the program for each gauging cycle. Use this function when interference is anticipated between the workpiece and the sensor during gauging. NC optional parameter No. 36 bit 5 (POSITIONING 1: DOES, 0: DOES NOT) [Setting a barrier] There is an area in which the tool interferes with the sensor when a large-diameter tool is attached to the spindle. A barrier must be set to avoid this. For the setting of a barrier, see the attached manual “SECTION 8 SPECIAL BARRIER FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC.” [Sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction (OO93)] This cycle determines the sensor position used to gauge the tool length and detect tool breakage. The offset method can be switched by bit 7 of VFST. Bit 7 of VFST

OFF : Relatively position offset ON

: Absolutely position offset

Do not change this setting after you select the offset method here. The gauging results are stored in the system-work coordinates No.20.

• Calling sequence CALL 0093

PAXI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PRET=1] [PCON=1] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]

PAXI: Axis of which zero point is set (bit0: the X-axis, bit1: the Y-axis, bit2: Z-axis) Normal setting data is PAXI=#05H. In the case of movable sensor, however, set the X-axis position. Otherwise, the sensor interferes with the tool, damaging the machine. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) PLI: Reference tool length For the absolute position offset (as mentioned earlier), specify the length from the gauge line to the end of the reference tool. For the relative position offset, specify the difference between the reference tool length for relative position offset and the reference tool length used for individual gauging. If they are the same, just specify 0. PRS: Spindle orientation position If PRS is omitted and an M code for spindle rotation (M03 or M04) is specified, the tool is measured while in rotation. When PRS is specified, the spindle is orientstopped and the sensor gauges the stopped tool. With out the above M code, however, the spindle is orient-stopped and the sensor gauges the stopped tool even if PRS is omitted.

5249-E P-390 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] Specify the width of gauging in one direction. In scanning gauging, the sensor measures the tool in both positive and negative directions. Without designation of PSPN, the sensor cannot gauge the tool. The default pick feed for gauging is 0.1 mm (0.004 in.). Scanning gauging is in tended for determining the maximum tool length position. When the measured value decreased, it is assumed that the subsequent gauging data will no more in crease. This means the sensor does not need to continue gauging before it covers the width of PSPN. The criterion for stopping gauging is called skip value. The default is 0.005 mm (0.00020 in.).

PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Usually the Z-axis is positioned near the positive travel limit where the gauging cycle is finished. To hold the Z-axis after gauging, specify “1” for PCON. PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* Usually the sensor retracts after gauging. To hold the sensor position after gauging, specify “1” for PRET. * When “1” is set at the Z-axis retract inhibiting parameter, “1” is automatically set also at the sensor retraction inhibiting parameter. This is because the sensor interferes with a machine component when it advances or retracts depending on the axis position or the machine. PF1: 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: 3rd approach speed of the sensor & 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: 4th approach speed of the sensor & 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Usually, the tool approaches the sensor four times. In scanning gauging, the tool approaches the sensor twice. Here, specify the approach speed at that time. The default speed is 2,000 mm/min, 1,000 mm/min, 100 mm/min, and 3 mm/min respectively. In the case of gauging of a rotating tool, the 4th approach speed depends on rotation speed (0.001 x S [mm]/min). PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default)

5249-E P-391 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

• Gauging operation 1.

install the reference tool.

2.

Advance the sensor with M144. (Ensure that the sensor does not interfere with anything.)

3.

Turn on the laser with M375. (The laser is turned off by M374.)

4.

Locate the tool near the sensor by hand. (Locate the tool in a position where the sensor works by Z-axis movement)

5.

Execute the sensor zero setting cycle in automatic or MDI operation mode.

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The B-axis moves to the machine zero at the rapid traverse when “1” is set at bit 5 of NC optional parameter No. 36.

6.

The Y-axis is positioned.

7.

The X-axis is positioned.

8.

The Z-axis moves to the under-travel position.

9.

The laser shutter opens.

10. Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.) 11. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position. 12. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 13. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 14. The laser shutter closes. 15. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 16. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.13 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.15 and 16 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-392 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC [Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction (OO94)] This cycle determines the sensor position for gauging the cutter radius and detecting tool breakage. The gauging results are stored in the system work coordinates No.20.

• Calling sequence CALL OO94 PAXI=* PRI=* PLI=* [PIN=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] PAXI: Axis of which zero point is set (bit0: X-axis, bit1: Y-axis, and bit2: Z-axis) Normal setting is #02H. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) PRI: Reference tool radial PLI: Reference tool length PIN: Z-axis infeed amount PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* * Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default)

• Gauging operation 1.

Install the reference tool.

2.

Advance the sensor with M144. (Ensure that the sensor does not interfere with anything.)

3.

Turn on the laser with M375. (The laser is turned off by M374.)

4.

Locate the tool near the sensor by hand. (Locate the tool in a position where the sensor works by Y-axis movement.)

5.

Execute the sensor zero setting cycle in automatic or MDI operation mode.

5249-E P-393 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The B-axis moves to the machine zero at the rapid traverse when “1” is set at bit 5 of NC optional parameter No. 36.

6.

The Y-axis is positioned at the gauging start position.

7.

The X-axis is positioned at the under-travel position.

8.

The Z-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position. (When PIN is specified, the Zaxis shifts from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

9.

The laser shutter opens.

10. Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.) 11. The Y-axis moves to the sensor position. 12. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 13. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 14. The laser shutter closes. 15. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 16. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.13 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.15 and 16 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-394 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC [Gauging in the lengthwise direction] This cycle gauges the tool length. When gauging the tool length, turn on bit 0 of the systemvariable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO95

PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PH=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*]

PLI: Tool length PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]:Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PH: Tool length offset number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSAM: The number of gauging times. If PSAM is set to 2 or more, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the set number of times. For the 1st gauging, the NC performs normal gauging (with 4 times of approach). For the 2nd and later gauging cycles, the NC performs gauging by 2 times of approach to the sensor. The approaching speeds in the 2nd and later gauging cycles are as follows: 1st approach ... The 3rd approach speed in the normal gauging cycle 2nd approach ... The 4th approach speed in the normal gauging cycle The average value obtained by several times of gauging is regarded as the finally measured value. The 2nd and later gauging cycles do not include the scanning gauging. The default is 3 (times). PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements The maximum and the minimum values are obtained from the results of several times of gauging. Set the allowable range of the difference between the maximum and minimum measurements (variation) at this parameter. The default is 0.005 [mm]. PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) Set whether the variation exceeding the allowable range causes an alarm or not. Set “1” if you want an alarm to be generated. Set “0” if not. The default is “0” (no alarm).

5249-E P-395 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry). Set whether the variation exceeding the allowable range triggers another gauging cycle or not. When retry is desired, set the number of retry times at PRTY. If retry is not desired, set “0” at PRTY. The NC performs gauging by the number of times set at PSAM (number of gauging times) for each retry gauging. During the retry gauging, two times of approach is made even in the 1st gauging cycle. If the variation does not fall within the allowable range after the specified number of retrials, an alarm occurs. If PSRA is set to “1”, the PRTY value is ignored. If “0” is set at both PSRA and PRTY, the average value is regarded as the measured value even when the variation is out of the allowable range. The default is “0” (no retry).

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The B-axis moves to the machine zero at the rapid traverse when “1” is set at bit 5 of NC optional parameter No. 36.

6.

The X-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

7.

The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

8.

The sensor-air-blower is turned off.

9.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

10. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position. 11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 12. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 13. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position. 14. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 15. The laser shutter closes. 16. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 17. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.14 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.16 and 17 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-396 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC [Gauging in the radial direction] This cycle gauges the cutter radius. When gauging the cutter radius, turn on bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO96 PRI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length PRI: Cutter radius PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PIN: Z-axis infeed amount PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PD: Cutter radius compensation number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry) See the description of the zero setting cycle of the sensor for gauging in lengthwise direction and the gauging cycle in lengthwise direction.

5249-E P-397 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The B-axis moves to the machine zero at the rapid traverse when “1” is set at bit 5 of NC optional parameter No. 36.

6.

The X-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

7.

The Y-axis moves to the under-travel position.

8.

The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the sensor position shift sin infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

9.

The laser shutter opens.

10. Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.) 11. The X-axis moves to the sensor position. 12. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 13. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 14. The X-axis moves to the sensor position. 15. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 16. The laser shutter closes. 17. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 18. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.15 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.17 and 18 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-398 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC [Gauging the sphericity (OO99)] This cycle gauges the sphericity at the tip of ball end mill.

• Calling sequence CALL OO99 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PRE=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] PH: Tool length offset, cutter radius compensation number Specify the tool management number where the tool length offset amount and the cutter radius compensation amount are stored for judgment of sphericity. When PH is omitted, the active tool number (VTLCN) is set. PLI: Tool length Specify the tool length. When omitted, the offset amount of the tool management number is set. PRI: Cutter radius Specify the cutter radius. When omitted, the compensation amount of the tool management number is set. PRA: The angle added for gauging sphericity The sensor gauges the sphericity from the length wise direction to the radial direction. Specify the incremental angle used for this gauging. The angle must be 5° or over and a divisor of 90°. Default is 15°. PRS: Spindle orientation position PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PRE: Maximum allowable error When the error in the sphericity gauging exceeds this amount, an alarm occurs. When PRE is not specified, the cycle does not judge the errors. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction.

5249-E P-399 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The B-axis moves to the machine zero at the rapid traverse when “1” is set at bit 5 of NC optional parameter No. 36.

6.

The X-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

7.

The Y-axis is positioned.

8.

The laser shutter opens.

9.

Gauging cycle starts.(Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

10. The X-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position. 11. The PRA angle is added and the sensor gauges sphericity in the slanting direction. 12. Operation sequences No. 10 and 11 are repeated up to the gauging angle of 90°. 13. The X-axis and Z-axis move to the sensor position. 14. The sensor gauges in the radial direction. 15. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 16. The laser shutter closes. 17. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 18. The sensor retracts.* 19. The sphericity is judged, if the judgement command is specified. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.15 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.17 and 18 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-400 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC [Tool breakage detection in the lengthwise direction] This cycle detect the tool breakage in the lengthwise direction. When the breakage detection in the lengthwise direction, turnoff bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO95 [PLI=*][PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PH=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*][PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning[Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PH: Tool length offset number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PGO: Parameter for designating the action when tool breakage is detected PLE1: Threshold value for judging tool breakage PLE2: Threshold value for judging tool wear PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry) See the description of the zero setting cycle of the sensor for gauging in lengthwise direction and the gauging cycle in lengthwise direction.

5249-E P-401 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The B-axis moves to the machine zero at the rapid traverse when “1” is set at bit 5 of NC optional parameter No. 36.

6.

The X-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

7.

The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

8.

The laser shutter opens.

9.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

10. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position. 11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 12. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 13. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position. 14. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 15. The laser shutter closes. 16. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 17. The sensor retracts.* 18. The tool breakage or the tool wear are judged. 19. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.14 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.16 and 17 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-402 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC [Tool breakage detection in the radial direction] This cycle detects the tool breakage in the radial direction. For the breakage detection in the radial direction, turn off bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO96 [PRI=*] [PLI=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length PRI: Cutter radius PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PIN: Z-axis infeed amount PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PD: Cutter radius compensation number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* PGO: Parameter for designating the action when tool breakage is detected PLE1: Threshold value for judging tool breakage PLE2: Threshold value for judging tool wear PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry) See the description of the zero setting cycle of the sensor for gauging in lengthwise direction and the gauging cycle in lengthwise direction.

5249-E P-403 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The B-axis moves to the machine zero at the rapid traverse when “1” is set at bit 5 of NC optional parameter No. 36.

6.

The X-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

7.

The Y-axis moves to the under-travel position.

8.

The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Z-axis shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

9.

The laser shutter opens.

10. Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.) 11. The X-axis moves to the sensor position. 12. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 13. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 14. The X-axis moves to the sensor position. 15. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 16. The laser shutter closes. 17. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 18. The sensor retracts.* 19. The tool breakage or the tool wear are judged. 20. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.15 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.17 and 18 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-404 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC [High-speed tool breakage detection] This cycle measures the tool length for detecting broken tool at high speed. The high-speed tool breakage detection is executed on the assumption that a broken tool does not interrupt the sensor beam as shown in the right figure. This cycle, however, may not be able to detects light tool breakage.

ME61012R0701000040002

• Calling sequence CALL OO97 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PH=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] PLI: Tool length Specify the tool length offset amount. When omitted, the value specified with the offset number is set. PRI: Cutter radius Specify the cutter radius compensation amount. When omitted, the value specified with the offset number is set. PRS: Spindle orientation position PIN: Z-axis infeed amount The sensor starts gauging by shifting from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with PIN. (Default: 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)) PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PH: Tool offset number Specify the tool off set number. When omitted, the active tool number (VTLCN) is set. PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction.

5249-E P-405 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

2.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

3.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

4.

The sensor advances.

5.

The B-axis moves to the machine zero at the rapid traverse when “1” is set at bit 5 of NC optional parameter No. 36.

6.

The X-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

7.

The Y-axis moves to the under-travel position.

8.

The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Z-axis shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

9.

The laser shutter opens.

10. The X-axis skips to the target position (sensor position + over travel position). 11. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 12. The laser shutter closes. 13. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 14. The sensor retracts.* 15. The tool breakage is judged. 16. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.11 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.13 and 14 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-406 SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

5. 2583

List of Alarms Alarm B UNTENDED: Large error in measurement of sphericity Large errors were detected in measurement of sphericity. [Probable Faulty Locations] In the sensor zero setting cycle, the sensor zero position in the horizontal direction did not match the tool center. Or, the measuring tool was defective. [Measures to Take] Use a proper tool, such as a spare tool.

2305

Alarm B UNTENDED: Measurement impossible Measurement became impossible during auto gauging cycle. For this gauging system, the following codes are added to this alarm: 6A

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the first approach.

6B

Contact could not be confirmed in the first approach.

6C

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the second approach.

6D

Contact could not be confirmed in the second approach.

6E

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the third approach.

6F

Contact could not be confirmed in the third approach.

70

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the fourth approach.

71

Contact could not be confirmed in the fourth approach.

72

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in retraction of the skipping cycle.

73

Contact could not be confirmed in the first approach of the skipping cycle.

74

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in retraction of the skipping cycle.

75

Contact could not be confirmed in the second approach of the skipping cycle.

7B

The first sensor could not be confirmed in the high-speed tool breakage detection cycle.

7C

The sensor could not be confirmed after skipping in the high-speed tool breakage detection cycle.

95

In the plural measurement operations, the difference between the minimum and maximum measured values exceeded the tolerance.

5249-E P-407 SECTION 8 SPECIAL BARRIER FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

SECTION 8 1.

SPECIAL BARRIER FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

Outline If a non-contact sensor is mounted on a horizontal MC, there is an area in which the tool interferes with the sensor when a large-diameter tool is attached to the spindle, and consequently the tool may strike against the sensor. To prevent the tool from striking against the sensor, a special barrier function is adopted. This function is intended to limit the X-axis travel depending on the Y-axis position.

2.

Detailed Specifications

2-1.

Parameter Setting Select the parameter setting mode. Select [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) from the function menu. The DISPLAY CHANGE popup window appears. a.

If the DISPLAY CHANGE popup window shows BARRIER (X, Y), select it to display the BARRIER (X, Y) screen.

b.

If not, select [F1] (MENU CHANGE) from the function menu. The MENU CHANGE popup window appears. Using the page keys or [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] cursor keys, select BARRIER (X, Y).” When you select [F1] (check mark) from the popup function menu in the MENU CHANGE popup window, a checkmark is set at BARRIER (X, Y).” In this state, select [F7] (OK) from the popup function menu in the MENU popup window to exit the MENU CHANGE popup window. The DISPLAY CHANGE popup window is updated, and BARRIER (X, Y) is included in the popup window. So, select it to display the BARRIER (X, Y) screen.

ME61012R0701100020001

5249-E P-408 SECTION 8 SPECIAL BARRIER FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC Barrier (X, Y) Effective/Ineffective Effective commands

: Effective/Ineffective

Initial setting

: Ineffective

P limit, N limit Effective commands

2-2.

: SET, ADD

Setting range

: -99999.999 to 99999.999

Initial value

: 0.000

Setting Items Enable or disable the special barrier function in the upper area of the screen. When Effective is selected, set the barrier data in the table of the screen lower area. In this table, set an effective range of X- and Y-axes. At “Y”, set the range where the X-axis travel is limited, and at “X” set the X-axis travel range. Note that the above X- and Y-axis ranges shall be set in the machine coordinate system. Thus, a barrier alarm will occur when both of the following conditions are met.

• Barrier (X, Y) effective • The Y-axis position in the machine coordinate system is within the set range. • The X-axis position in the machine coordinate system is not within the set range.

5249-E P-409 SECTION 8 SPECIAL BARRIER FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

2-3.

Barrier Range Setting Example When the parameters are set as shown in Figure 1, the barrier ranges are as shown in Figure 2.

ME61012R0701100040001

2-4.

Barrier Alarm and Resetting Method If the sensor enters a barrier range set by the special barrier function, the following alarm occurs: 1203 Alarm A Barrier 2 To reset his alarm, select the manual operation mode, enable the pulse handle, and reset the NC. First of all, reset the alarm. After the alarm has been reset, axis movement is possible only with the pulse handle. Move the problem axis out of the interference range using the pulse handle. At the same time, the pulse handle can move all the axes.

5249-E P-410 SECTION 8 SPECIAL BARRIER FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

3.

Alarms

3-1.

Alarm A 1203

Barrier If a non-contact sensor is mounted on a horizontal MC, there is an area in which the tool interferes with the sensor when a large-diameter tool is attached to the spindle. On the parameter setting screen, set a barrier as the interference range of the X- and Y-axes. When (Barrier Y-axis N limit ≤ Y command value ≤ Barrier Y-axis P limit), the alarm lamp lights in either of the following cases: (Barrier X-axis N limit value ≥ X command value) or (Barrier X-axis P limit value ≤ X command value). [Index] None [Character-string] None [Code] 2: Special barrier function for horizontal MC [Probable Faulty Locations] Incorrect X-axis or Y-axis command in the program [Measures to Take] Review the program. A barrier check does not take place in the manual operation mode. When the barrier alarm lamp is lit, select the manual operation mode and reset the alarm. After resetting, axis movement is possible only with the pulse handle. Move the problem axis out of the barrier range using the pulse handle.

5249-E P-411 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF

SECTION 9 1.

NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF

What is Non-contact Sensor? The non-contact sensor uses a laser beam for measurement unlike existing sensors with mechanical or electric contacts. This optical sensor, by taking advantages of a non-contact sensor, can gauge even a rotating tool, which used to be impossible for the existing sensors. The sensor can increase the gauging speed, and can gauge sphericity by taking the advantage of a linear sensor. However, the bloom sensor in tended for linear gauging can not gauge the maximum length (or radial) of an irregular shaped tool depending on the sensor position. Scanning gauging* makes up this disadvantage. This gauging method permits gauging of a rotating tool or gauging while searching the maximum length.

ME61012R0701200010001

* Scanning gauging: The sensor gauges a tool in a gauging direction (e.g. the X-axis) and shifts along the axis at right angles with the gauging axis (e.g. the Z-axis). By repeating the above gauging several times, the sensor determines the maximum tool length (or diameter).

5249-E P-412 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF

2.

Outline Non-contact sensor gauging is roughly classified into two methods according to the position wherethe sensor is installed: This manufacturer’s subprogram (hereinafter called the MSB) is for a fixed sensor and can gauge vertical spindle tools. The sensor mode (fixed/movable) can be switched by bit 3 of the system-variable VFST. Bit 3 of VFST

0

...... Movable sensor

1

...... Fixed sensor

ME61012R0701200020001

The tool-gauging program consists of the following maker’s subprograms:

• Preparation program for gauging • Gauging program • Tool breakage detection program Programs classified by the sensor position are described on the following pages.

3.

Manufacturer’s Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor The movable sensor and fixed sensor can be switched by changing the setting at bit 3 of the system variable VFST. To select the fixed sensor, set ON the bit 3 of VFST. Since this MSB is used to gauge the vertical spindle tools, be sure to set OFF bit 6 of a system variable VFST.

ME61012R0701200030001

Vertical spindle tool gauging is described below.

5249-E P-413 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF

4.

Manufacturer’s Subprogram for Gauging Vertical Spindle Tools with the Fixed Sensor The subprogram for gauging vertical spindle tools with the fixed sensor consists of the following subroutines: [List of gauging preparation cycle] OO31

Position setting cycle for tool change

OO120

Position setting cycle for X-axis retract

OO93

Sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction

OO94

Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction

[List of gauging cycle] OO95

Gauging in the lengthwise direction

OO96

Gauging in the radial direction

OO99

Gauging the sphericity

[List of tool breakage detection cycle] OO95

Tool breakage detection in the lengthwise direction

OO96

Tool breakage detection in the radial direction

OO97

High-speed tool breakage detection

[Tool change position setting cycle (OO31)] On the machine of which tool change function is set at ON (bit 0 of NC specification code No.21 is turned on), the NC performs tool change by transferring the argument PGO=2 on detection of tool breakage. The cycle sets the tool change position used for that purpose. The tool change position is stored in the system-work coordinates No.2. For details, refer to “Section 1. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET / AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION”. CALL OO31 [X-axis retract position setting cycle (OO120)] (*Set this subroutine without fail.) Use this subroutine when moving the X-axis into the machine after gauging. * Set the X-axis position inside the machine when the ATC door is closed. Procedure :

1

Move the X-axis to the position to be set as the X-axis retract position. The positions of the X- and Y-axes do not affect the setting.

2

Select the automatic operation mode and execute the following subprogram: CALL OO120 M02 The X-axis does not move even if this program is executed. After this program has been executed, the current X-axis position is registered as the X-axis retract position at the system work coordinate system origin No. 12. It can be checked with system variable VSZOX [12] on the check display screen.

5249-E P-414 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF [Spindle speed] When performing gauging while rotating the spindle, specify the spindle speed by referring to the speed obtained by the following formula: S=F/N Here, S means the actual spindle speed. This is the S command value multiplied by the spindle speed override. F is the actual feedrate. If PF1 (the 1st approach speed of the sensor) is not specified with an argument, this value is 2,000 multiplied by the cutting feedrate override. If PF1 is specified with an argument, this value is the specified value multiplied by the cutting feedrate override. N is the number of tool blades.

CAUTION The laser sensor mounting position of the double-column MC “MCR-AF” is outside the travel limit. That is, gauging is performed in a range out of the control of the soft limit. In the sensor zero setting cycle (OO93 or OO94) of this manufacturer’s subprogram, the spindle is positioned in the sensor position, and it is, therefore, necessary for the operator to move it out of the travel limit by manual interrupt. Perform this operation with extreme care because it is very dangerous.

5249-E P-415 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF [Sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction (OO93)] This cycle determines the sensor position used to gauge the tool length and detect tool breakage. The offset method can be switched by bit 7 of VFST. Bit 7 of VFST

OFF : Relatively position offset ON

: Absolutely position offset

Do not change this setting after you select the offset method here. The gauging results are stored in the system-work coordinates No.20.

• Calling sequence CALL OO93 PAXI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] PAXI: Axis of which zero point is set (bit0: the X-axis, bit1: the Y-axis, bit2: Z-axis) Normal setting is #04H. PLI: Reference tool length For the absolute position offset (as mentioned earlier), specify the length from the gauge line to the end of the reference tool. For the relative position offset, specify the difference between the reference tool length for relative position offset and the reference tool length used for individual gauging. If they are the same, just specify 0. PRS: Spindle orientation position If PRS is omitted and an M code for spindle rotation (M03 or M04) is specified, the tool is measured while in rotation. When PRS is specified, the spindle is orientstopped and the sensor gauges the stopped tool. With out the above M code, however, the spindle is orient-stopped and the sensor gauges the stopped tool even if PRS is omitted. PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] Specify the width of gauging in one direction. In scanning gauging, the sensor measures the tool in both positive and negative directions. Without designation of PSPN, the sensor cannot gauge the tool. The default pick feed for gauging is 0.1 mm (0.004 in.). Scanning gauging is in tended for determining the maximum tool length position. When the measured value decreased, it is assumed that the subsequent gauging data will no more in crease. This means the sensor does not need to continue gauging before it covers the width of PSPN. The criterion for stopping gauging is called skip value. The default is 0.005 mm (0.00020 in.).

5249-E P-416 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number Set the offset amount to VATSC [185, attachment offset number].Use this number when performing the sensor zero setting cycle using an attachment. This MSB is not applicable to the measurement of horizontal spindle tools and can be used only for gauging of the tool mounted with an extension attachment. PF1: 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: 3rd approach speed of the sensor & 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: 4th approach speed of the sensor & 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Usually, the tool approaches the sensor four times. In scanning gauging, the tool approaches the sensor twice. Here, specify the approach speed at that time. The default speed is 2,000 mm/min, 1,000 mm/min, 100 mm/min, and 3 mm/min respectively. In the case of gauging of a rotating tool, the 4th approach speed depends on rotation speed (0.001 x S [mm]/min). PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default)

• Gauging operation 1.

Install the reference tool.

2.

Execute the sensor zero setting cycle in automatic or MDI operation mode.

5249-E P-417 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF

• Cycle operation 1.

The laser shutter opens.

2.

The sensor advances.

3.

The ATC door opens (disabling the Z-axis limit).

4.

The program stops on reception of M00.

5.

Select the manual interrupt mode and move the reference tool near the sensor. The operator must perform the following operations:

• Turn ON manual interrupt mode. • Manually move the reference tool close to the sensor (where the laser beam is blocked simply by Z-axis movement).

• Turn OFF manual interrupt mode. • Press the START button. 6.

The shift is canceled.

7.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

8.

The sensor is positioned at the X-axis retract position.

9.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

10. The X-axis is positioned. 11. The Z-axis moves to the under-travel position. 12. Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.) 13. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position. 14. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 15. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit. 16. The laser shutter closes. 17. The X-axis retracts. 18. The sensor retracts. 19. The ATC door closes (enabling the Z-axis limit).

5249-E P-418 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF [Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction (OO94)] This cycle determines the sensor position for gauging the cutter radius and detecting tool breakage. The gauging results are stored in the system work coordinates No.20.

• Calling sequence CALL OO94 PAXI=* PRI=* PLI=* [PIN=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] PAXI: Axis of which zero point is set (bit0: X-axis, bit1: Y-axis, and bit2: Z-axis) Normal setting is #01H. PRI: Reference tool radial Specify the cutter radius of the reference tool. PLI: Reference tool length Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PIN: Z-axis infeed amount When the sensor zero setting cycle is executed, the sensor starts gauging by shifting from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with PIN. PRS: Spindle orientation position Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default)

• Gauging operation 1.

Install the reference tool.

2.

Execute the sensor zero setting cycle in automatic or MDI operation mode.

5249-E P-419 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF

• Cycle operation 1.

The laser shutter opens.

2.

The sensor advances.

3.

The ATC door opens (disabling the Z-axis limit).

4.

The program stops on reception of M00.

5.

Select the manual interrupt mode and move the reference tool near the sensor. The operator must perform the following operations:

• Turn ON manual interrupt mode. • Manually move the reference tool close to the sensor (where the laser beam is blocked simply by X-axis movement).

• Turn OFF manual interrupt mode. • Press the START button. 6.

The shift is canceled.

7.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

8.

The sensor is positioned at the X-axis retract position.

9.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

10. The X-axis is positioned at the under-travel position. 11. The Z-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position. (When PIN is specified, the Zaxis shifts from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with PIN.) 12. Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.) 13. The X-axis moves to the sensor position. 14. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 15. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit. 16. The laser shutter closes. 17. The X-axis retracts. 18. The sensor retracts. 19. The ATC door closes (enabling the Z-axis limit).

5249-E P-420 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF [Gauging in the lengthwise direction] This cycle gauges the tool length. When gauging the tool length, turn on bit 0 of the systemvariable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO95 PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length Specify the (expected) tool length. PRS: Spindle orientation position Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]:Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PH: Tool length offset number Specify the tool length offset number where the gauged tool length is stored. When PH is omitted, the active tool offset number (VTLCN) is set. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times. If PSAM is set to 2 or more, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the set number of times. For the 1st gauging, the NC performs normal gauging (with 4 times of approach). For the 2nd and later gauging cycles, the NC performs gauging by 2 times of approach to the sensor. The approaching speeds in the 2nd and later gauging cycles are as follows: 1st approach ... The 3rd approach speed in the normal gauging cycle 2nd approach ... The 4th approach speed in the normal gauging cycle The average value obtained by several times of gauging is regarded as the finally measured value. The 2nd and later gauging cycles do not include the scanning gauging. The default is 3 (times). PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements The maximum and the minimum values are obtained from the results of several times of gauging. Set the allowable range of the difference between the maximum and minimum measurements (variation) at this parameter. The default is 0.005 [mm]. PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) Set whether the variation exceeding the allowable range causes an alarm or not. Set “1” if you want an alarm to be generated. Set “0” if not. The default is “0” (no alarm).

5249-E P-421 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry). Set whether the variation exceeding the allowable range triggers another gauging cycle or not. When retry is desired, set the number of retry times at PRTY. If retry is not desired, set “0” at PRTY. The NC performs gauging by the number of times set at PSAM (number of gauging times) for each retry gauging. During the retry gauging, two times of approach is made even in the 1st gauging cycle. If the variation does not fall within the allowable range after the specified number of retrials, an alarm occurs. If PSRA is set to “1”, the PRTY value is ignored. If “0” is set at both PSRA and PRTY, the average value is regarded as the measured value even when the variation is out of the allowable range. The default is “0” (no retry).

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor-air-blower is turned off.

2.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

3.

The sensor is positioned at the X-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

4.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

5.

The ATC door opens (disabling the Z-axis limit).

6.

The sensor advances.

7.

The X-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

8.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The Z-axis moves to the sensor position.

10. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 11. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 12. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position. 13. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit. 14. The laser shutter closes. 15. The X-axis retracts. 16. The sensor retracts. 17. The ATC door closes (enabling the Z-axis limit).

5249-E P-422 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF [Gauging in the radial direction] This cycle gauges the cutter radius. When gauging the cutter radius, turn on bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO96 PRI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PD=*] [PGO=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length Specify the offset amount of the tool length. PRI: Cutter radius Specify the offset amount of the cutter radius (: the expected offset amount of the cutter radius). PRS: Spindle orientation position Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning[Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PIN: Z-axis infeed amount The sensor starts gauging by shifting from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with PIN. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number Refer to the Gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction. PD: Cutter radius compensation number Specify the cutter radius compensation number where is stored the gauged cutter radius. When omitted, the active tool compensation number (VTLCN) is set. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction. PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction. PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction. PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry) Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction.

5249-E P-423 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF

• Cycle operation 1.

The laser shutter opens.

2.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

3.

The sensor is positioned at the X-axis retract position.

4.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

5.

The ATC door opens (disabling the Z-axis limit).

6.

The sensor advances.

7.

The X-axis moves to the under-travel position.

8.

The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the sensor position shift sin infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

9.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

10. The X-axis moves to the sensor position. 11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 12. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 13. The X-axis moves to the sensor position. 14. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit. 15. The laser shutter closes. 16. The X-axis retracts. 17. The sensor retracts. 18. The ATC door closes (enabling the Z-axis limit).

5249-E P-424 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF [Gauging the sphericity (OO99)] This cycle gauges the sphericity at the tip of ball end mill.

• Calling sequence CALL OO99 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PRE=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] PH: Tool length offset, cutter radius compensation number Specify the tool management number where the tool length offset amount and the cutter radius compensation amount are stored for judgment of sphericity. When PH is omitted, the active tool number (VTLCN) is set. PLI: Tool length Specify the tool length. When omitted, the offset amount of the tool management number is set. PRI: Cutter radius Specify the cutter radius. When omitted, the compensation amount of the tool management number is set. PRA: The angle added for gauging sphericity The sensor gauges the sphericity from the length wise direction to the radial direction. Specify the incremental angle used for this gauging. The angle must be 5° or over and a divisor of 90°. Default is 15°. PRS: Spindle orientation position Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number Refer to the Gauging in the lengthwise direction. PRE: Maximum allowable error When the error in the sphericity gauging exceeds this amount, an alarm occurs. When PRE is not specified, the cycle does not judge the errors. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default)

5249-E P-425 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF

• Cycle operation 1.

The laser shutter opens.

2.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

3.

The sensor is positioned at the X-axis retract position.

4.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

5.

The ATC door opens (disabling the Z-axis limit).

6.

The sensor advances.

7.

The X-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

8.

Gauging cycle starts.(Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The X-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position.

10. The PRA angle is added and the sensor gauges sphericity in the slanting direction. 11. Operation sequences No.9 and 10 are repeated up to the gauging angle of 90°. 12. The X-axis and Z-axis move to the sensor position. 13. The sensor gauges in the radial direction. 14. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit. 15. The laser shutter closes. 16. The X-axis retracts. 17. The sensor retracts. 18. The ATC door closes (enabling the Z-axis limit). 19. The sphericity is judged, if the judgement command is specified.

5249-E P-426 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF [Tool breakage detection in the lengthwise direction] This cycle detect the tool breakage in the lengthwise direction. When the breakage detection in the lengthwise direction, turnoff bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO95 [PLI=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*][PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length Specify the tool length (: the expected tool length). PRS: Spindle orientation position Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning[Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number Refer to the [Gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction]. PH: Tool length offset number Specify the tool length offset number of which data is compared with the gauging result. When omitted, the active tool number (VTLCN) is set. PGO: Action to be taken on detection of tool breakage PGO= The tool is changed on detection of tool breakage. 1 PGO= The tool is changed on detection of tool breakage. The broken tool 2 moves to the tool change position before being changed. If PGO is omitted, the cycle ends with alarm occurrence. PLE1: Threshold value for judging tool breakage Specify the threshold value for judging tool breakage as a difference from the tool offset value. Default is 0.1 mm (0.004 in.). PLE2: Threshold value for judging tool wear Specify the threshold value for judging tool wear as a difference from the tool offset value. When the difference is less than PLE2, the NC judges that the tool is worn and up dates the tool length offset amount. If PLE2 is omitted, the NC does not make this judgment. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction. PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction.

5249-E P-427 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) Refer to the [Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction]. PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry) Refer to the [Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction].

• Cycle operation 1.

The laser shutter opens.

2.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

3.

The sensor is positioned at the X-axis retract position.

4.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

5.

The ATC door opens (disabling the Z-axis limit).

6.

The sensor advances.

7.

The X-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

8.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The Z-axis moves to the sensor position.

10. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 11. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 12. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position. 13. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit. 14. The laser shutter closes. 15. The X-axis retracts. 16. The sensor retracts. 17. The ATC door closes (enabling the Z-axis limit). 18. The tool breakage or the tool wear are judged. 19. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting.

5249-E P-428 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF [Tool breakage detection in the radial direction] This cycle detects the tool breakage in the radial direction. For the breakage detection in the radial direction, turn off bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO96 [PRI=*] [PLI=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PD=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length Specify the offset amount of the tool length. PRI: Cutter radius Specify the offset amount of the cutter radius (: the expected offset amount of the cutter radius). PRS: Spindle orientation position Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning[Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PIN: Z-axis infeed amount The sensor starts gauging by shifting from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with PIN. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number Refer to the [Gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction]. PD: Cutter radius compensation number The cutter radius is compared with this value. When omitted, the data of the active tool number (VTLCN) is set. PGO: Action to be taken on detection of tool breakage Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction and the tool breakage detection cycle. PLE1: Threshold value for judging tool breakage Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction and the tool breakage detection cycle. PLE2: Threshold value for judging tool wear Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction and the tool breakage detection cycle. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction. PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction. PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm)

5249-E P-429 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction. PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry) Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction.

• Cycle operation 1.

The laser shutter opens.

2.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

3.

The sensor is positioned at the X-axis retract position.

4.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

5.

The ATC door opens (disabling the Z-axis limit).

6.

The sensor advances.

7.

The X-axis moves to the under-travel position.

8.

The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Z-axis shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

9.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

10. The X-axis moves to the sensor position. 11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 12. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 13. The X-axis moves to the sensor position. 14. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit. 15. The laser shutter closes. 16. The X-axis retracts. 17. The sensor retracts. 18. The ATC door closes (enabling the Z-axis limit). 19. The tool breakage or the tool wear are judged. 20. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting.

5249-E P-430 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF [High-speed tool breakage detection] This cycle detects the tool length breakage.The high-speed tool breakage detection is executed on the assumption that a broken tool does not interrupt the sensor beam as shown in the right figure. This cycle, however, may not be able to detects light tool breakage.

ME61012R0701200040002

• Calling sequence CALL OO97 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*] PLI: Tool length Specify the tool length offset amount. When omitted, the value specified with the offset number is set. PRI: Cutter radius Specify the cutter radius compensation amount. When omitted, the value specified with the offset number is set. PRS: Spindle orientation position Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PIN: Z-axis infeed amount The sensor starts gauging by shifting from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with PIN. (Default: 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)) PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number Refer to the [Gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction]. PH: Tool offset number Specify the tool off set number. When omitted, the active tool number is set.

5249-E P-431 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF

• Cycle operation 1.

The laser shutter opens.

2.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

3.

The sensor is positioned at the X-axis retract position.

4.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

5.

The ATC door opens (disabling the Z-axis limit).

6.

The sensor advances.

7.

The X-axis moves to the under-travel position.

8.

The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Z-axis shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)

9.

The X-axis skips to the target position (sensor position + over travel position).

10. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit. 11. The laser shutter closes. 12. The X-axis retracts. 13. The sensor retracts. 14. The ATC door closes (enabling the Z-axis limit). 15. The tool breakage is judged. 16. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting.

5249-E P-432 SECTION 9 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF

5. 2583

List of Alarms Alarm B UNTENDED: Large error in measurement of sphericity Large errors were detected in measurement of sphericity. [Probable Faulty Locations] In the sensor zero setting cycle, the sensor zero position in the horizontal direction did not match the tool center. Or, the measuring tool was defective. [Measures to Take] Use a proper tool, such as a spare tool.

2305

Alarm B UNTENDED: Measurement impossible Measurement became impossible during auto gauging cycle. For this gauging system, the following codes are added to this alarm: 6A

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the first approach.

6B

Contact could not be confirmed in the first approach.

6C

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the second approach.

6D

Contact could not be confirmed in the second approach.

6E

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the third approach.

6F

Contact could not be confirmed in the third approach.

70

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the fourth approach.

71

Contact could not be confirmed in the fourth approach.

72

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in retraction of the skipping cycle.

73

Contact could not be confirmed in the first approach of the skipping cycle.

74

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in retraction of the skipping cycle.

75

Contact could not be confirmed in the second approach of the skipping cycle.

7B

The first sensor could not be confirmed in the high-speed tool breakage detection cycle.

7C

The sensor could not be confirmed after skipping in the high-speed tool breakage detection cycle.

7E

The ATC door is not open.

81

When the Z-axis was lowered, the travel limit failed to become ineffective.

95

In several-times gauging, the difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements exceeded the tolerance.

5249-E P-433 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS)

SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS) 1.

What is Non-contact Sensor? The non-contact sensor uses a laser beam for measurement unlike existing sensors with mechanical or electric contacts. This optical sensor, by taking advantages of a non-contact sensor, can gauge even a rotating tool, which used to be impossible for the existing sensors. The sensor can increase the gauging speed, and can gauge sphericity by taking the advantage of a linear sensor. However, the bloom sensor in tended for linear gauging can not gauge the maximum length (or radial) of an irregular shaped tool depending on the sensor position. Scanning gauging* makes up this disadvantage. This gauging method permits gauging of a rotating tool or gauging while searching the maximum length.

ME61012R0701300010001

* Scanning gauging: The sensor gauges a tool in a gauging direction (e.g. the Y-axis) and shifts along the axis at right angles with the gauging axis (e.g. the Z-axis). By repeating the above gauging several times, the sensor determines the maximum tool length (or diameter).

5249-E P-434 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS)

2.

Outline Non-contact sensor gauging is classified into two methods: Gauging with a sensor fixed at a desired position Gauging with a movable sensor Gauging the tool mounted in a 30°/45° angular attachment (hereinafter called a 30°/45° AT) is possible only with the fixed sensor. Movable sensor

for gauging a vertical spindle tool or horizontal spindle tool

Fixed sensor

for gauging a vertical spindle tool or horizontal spindle tool for 30°/45° AT

ME61012R0701300020001

The sensor mode (fixed/movable) can be switched by bit 3 of the system-variable VFST. Bit 3 of VFST

0

...... Movable sensor

1

...... Fixed sensor

The tool-gauging program consists of the following maker’s subprograms:

• Preparation program for gauging • Gauging program • Tool breakage detection program Programs classified by the sensor position are described on the following pages.

5249-E P-435 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS)

3.

Manufacturer’s Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor The movable sensor or fixed sensor can be switched by changing the setting at the bit 3 of the system variable VFST. To gauge the tool mounted in a 30°/45° AT, set ON the bit 3 of VFST.

ME61012R0701300030001

5249-E P-436 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS)

4.

Manufacturer’s Subprogram for 30°/45° AT Tool Gauging by the Fixed Sensor The subprogram for gauging the tools mounted in the 30°/45° AT with the fixed sensor consists of the following subroutines: 30° AT [List of gauging preparation cycle] OO31

Position setting cycle for tool change

OO32

Position setting cycle for Y-axis retract

OO123

Sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction

OO124

Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction

[List of gauging cycle] OO125

Gauging in the lengthwise direction

OO126

Gauging in the radial direction

OO129

Gauging the sphericity

[List of tool breakage detection cycle] OO125

Tool breakage detection in the lengthwise direction

OO126

Tool breakage detection in the radial direction

OO127

High-speed tool breakage detection

45° AT [List of gauging preparation cycle] OO31

Position setting cycle for tool change

OO32

Position setting cycle for Y-axis retract

OO113

Sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction

OO114

Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction

[List of gauging cycle] OO115

Gauging in the lengthwise direction

OO116

Gauging in the radial direction

OO119

Gauging the sphericity

[List of tool breakage detection cycle] OO115

Tool breakage detection in the lengthwise direction

OO116

Tool breakage detection in the radial direction

OO117

High-speed tool breakage detection

5249-E P-437 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS) [Tool change position setting cycle (OO31)] On the machine of which tool change function is set at ON (bit 0 of NC specification code No.21 is turned on), the NC performs tool change by transferringtheargumentPGO=2 on detection of tool breakage. The cycle sets the tool change position used for that purpose. The tool change position is stored in the system-work coordinates No.2. For details, refer to “Section 1. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET / AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION”. CALL OO31 [Y-axis retract position setting cycle (OO32)] In some machines, the sensor may interfere with the Y-axis when it advances or retracts. If interference is anticipated, move the Y-axis to its retract position before advancing or retracting the sensor. If necessary, refer to “Section 1. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET / AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION”. CALL OO32 [Spindle speed] When performing gauging while rotating the spindle, specify the spindle speed by referring to the speed obtained by the following formula: S=F/N Here, S means the actual spindle speed. This is the S command value multiplied by the spindle speed override. F is the actual feedrate. If PF1 (the 1st approach speed of the sensor) is not specified with an argument, this value is 2,000 multiplied by the cutting feedrate override. If PF1 is specified with an argument, this value is the specified value multiplied by the cutting feedrate override. N is the number of tool blades.

5249-E P-438 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS) [Sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction (OO123, OO113)] This cycle determines the sensor position used to gauge the tool length and detect tool breakage. The offset method can be switched by bit 7 of VFST. Bit 7 of VFST

OFF : Relatively position offset ON

: Absolutely position offset

Do not change this setting after you select the offset method here. The gauging results are stored in the system work coordinates No. 25 for the tool mounted in the 30° AT, or in the system work coordinates No. 26 for the tool mounted in the 45° AT.

• Calling sequence CALL OO123 PAXI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* (OO113) [PRET=1] [PCON=1] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] PAXI: Axis of which zero point is set (bit0: the X-axis, bit1: the Y-axis, bit2: Z-axis) Normal setting is #06H. PLI: Reference tool length For the absolute position offset (as mentioned earlier), specify the length from the gauge line to the end of the reference tool. For the relative position offset, specify the difference between the reference tool length for relative position offset and the reference tool length used for individual gauging. If they are the same, just specify 0. PRS: Spindle orientation position If PRS is omitted and an M code for spindle rotation (M03 or M04) is specified, the tool is measured while in rotation. When PRS is specified, the spindle is orient-stopped and the sensor gauges the stopped tool. With out the above M code, however, the spindle is orient-stopped and the sensor gauges the stopped tool even if PRS is omitted. PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] Specify the width of gauging in one direction. In scanning gauging, the sensor measures the tool in both positive and negative directions. Without designation of PSPN, the sensor cannot gauge the tool. The default pick feed for gauging is 0.1 mm (0.004 in.). Scanning gauging is in tended for determining the maximum tool length position. When the measured value decreased, it is assumed that the subsequent gauging data will no more in crease. This means the sensor does not need to continue gauging before it covers the width of PSPN. The criterion for stopping gauging is called skip value. The default is 0.005 mm (0.00020 in.).

5249-E P-439 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS) PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number Set the offset amount to VATSC [184, attachment offset number]. PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Usually the Z-axis is positioned near the positive travel limit where the gauging cycle is finished. To hold the Z-axis after gauging, specify “1” for PCON. PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* Usually the sensor retracts after gauging. To hold the sensor position after gauging, specify “1” for PRET. * When “1” is set at the Z-axis retract inhibiting parameter, “1” is automatically set also at the sensor retraction inhibiting parameter. This is because the sensor interferes with a machine component when it advances or retracts depending on the axis position or the machine. PF1: 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: 3rd approach speed of the sensor & 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: 4th approach speed of the sensor & 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle Usually, the tool approaches the sensor four times. In scanning gauging, the tool approaches the sensor twice. Here, specify the approach speed at that time. The default speed is 2,000 mm/min, 1,000 mm/min, 100 mm/min, and 3 mm/min respectively. In the case of gauging of a rotating tool, the 4th approach speed depends on rotation speed (0.001 x S [mm]/min). PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default)

• Gauging operation 1.

install the reference tool.

2.

Advance the sensor with M144. (Ensure that the sensor does not interfere with anything.)

3.

Turn on the laser with M375. (The laser is turned off by M374.)

4.

Locate the tool near the sensor by hand. (Locate the tool in a position where the sensor moves by angular operation in the tool lengthwise direction.)

5.

Execute the sensor zero setting cycle in automatic or MDI operation mode.

5249-E P-440 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS)

• Cycle operation 1.

The laser shutter opens.

2.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

3.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

4.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

5.

The sensor advances.

6.

The Y-axis moves to the under-travel position.

7.

Locate the X-axis in the gauging start position.

8.

The Z-axis moves to the under-travel position.

9.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

10. The Y-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position. 11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 12. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 13. The laser shutter closes. 14. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 15. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.12 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.14 and 15 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-441 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS) [Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction (OO124, OO114)] This cycle determines the sensor position for gauging the cutter radius and detecting tool breakage. The gauging results are stored in system work coordinates No. 27 for the tool mounted in the 30° AT, or in system work coordinates No. 28 for the tool mounted in the 45° AT.

• Calling sequence CALL OO124 PAXI=* PRI=* PLI=* [PIN=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] (OO114) [POVT=*] PAT=* [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] PAXI: Axis of which zero point is set (bit0: X-axis, bit1: Y-axis, and bit2: Z-axis) Normal setting is #06H. PRI: Reference tool radial Specify the cutter radius of the reference tool. PLI: Reference tool length Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PIN: Z-axis infeed amount When the sensor zero setting cycle is executed, the sensor starts gauging by shifting from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with PIN. When calculating the sensor zero, however, set the tip of the reference tool as the sensor zero by taking this Z-axis infeed amount into account. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PAT: Attachment offset number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Usually the Z-axis is positioned near the positive travel limit where the gauging cycle is finished. To hold the Z-axis after gauging, specify “1” for PCON. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction.

• Gauging operation 1.

Install the reference tool.

2.

Advance the sensor with M144. (Ensure that the sensor does not interfere with anything.)

3.

Turn on the laser with M375. (The laser is turned off by M374.)

4.

Locate the tool near the sensor by hand. (Locate the tool in a position where the sensor moves at an upward angle of 90° from the lengthwise direction.)

5.

Execute the sensor zero setting cycle in automatic or MDI operation mode.

5249-E P-442 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS)

• Cycle operation 1.

The laser shutter opens.

2.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

3.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

4.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

5.

The sensor advances.

6.

Position the Y-axis at the under-travel position (if PIN is designated, locate the Y-axis in a position shifted by the Y-axis component of PIN).

7.

The X-axis is positioned at the gauging start position.

8.

Position the Z-axis at the under-travel position (if PIN is designated, locate the Z-axis in a position shifted by the Z-axis component of PIN).

9.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

10. The Y-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position. 11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 12. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 13. The laser shutter closes. 14. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 15. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.12 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.14 and 15 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-443 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS) [Gauging in the lengthwise direction (OO125, OO115)] This cycle gauges the tool length. When gauging the tool length, turn on bit 0 of the systemvariable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO125 PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PH=*] (OO115) [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length Specify the (expected) tool length. PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PH: Tool length offset number Specify the tool length offset number where the gauged tool length is stored. When PH is omitted, the active tool offset number (VTLCN) is set. PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* * Usually the Z-axis is positioned near the positive travel limit where the gauging cycle is finished. To hold the Z-axis after gauging, specify “1” for PCON. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PAT: Attachment offset number The offset must be set at VATSC [184, attachment offset designation number]. PSAM: The number of gauging times. If PSAM is set to 2 or more, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the set number of times. For the 1st gauging, the NC performs normal gauging (with 4 times of approach). For the 2nd and later gauging cycles, the NC performs gauging by 2 times of approach to the sensor. The approaching speeds in the 2nd and later gauging cycles are as follows: 1st approach ... The 3rd approach speed in the normal gauging cycle 2nd approach ... The 4th approach speed in the normal gauging cycle The average value obtained by several times of gauging is regarded as the finally measured value. The 2nd and later gauging cycles do not include the scanning gauging. The default is 3 (times). PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements The maximum and the minimum values are obtained from the results of several times of gauging. Set the allowable range of the difference between the maximum and minimum measurements (variation) at this parameter. The default is 0.005 [mm].

5249-E P-444 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS) PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) Set whether the variation exceeding the allowable range causes an alarm or not. Set “1” if you want an alarm to be generated. Set “0” if not. The default is “0” (no alarm). PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry). Set whether the variation exceeding the allowable range triggers another gauging cycle or not. When retry is desired, set the number of retry times at PRTY. If retry is not desired, set “0” at PRTY. The NC performs gauging by the number of times set at PSAM (number of gauging times) for each retry gauging. During the retry gauging, two times of approach is made even in the 1st gauging cycle. If the variation does not fall within the allowable range after the specified number of retrials, an alarm occurs. If PSRA is set to “1”, the PRTY value is ignored. If “0” is set at both PSRA and PRTY, the average value is regarded as the measured value even when the variation is out of the allowable range. The default is “0” (no retry).

• Cycle operation 1.

The sensor-air-blower is turned off.

2.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

3.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

4.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

5.

The sensor advances.

6.

The Y-axis is positioned on the extension line from the sensor position in the tool lengthwise direction.

7.

The X-axis is positioned at the gauging start position.

8.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The Y-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position.

10. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 11. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 12. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position.* 13. The laser shutter closes. 14. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 15. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.12 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.14 and 15 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-445 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS) [Gauging in the radial direction (OO126, OO116)] This cycle gauges the cutter radius. When gauging the cutter radius, turn on bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO126 PRI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] (OO116) PAT=* [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length Specify the offset amount of the tool length. PRI: Cutter radius Specify the offset amount of the cutter radius (: the expected offset amount of the cutter radius). PRS: Spindle orientation position Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction. PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PIN: Z-axis infeed amount Set a distance by which the Z-axis further advances from the original advanced distance in the sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number Refer to the [Gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction]. PD: Cutter radius compensation number Specify the cutter radius compensation number where is stored the gauged cutter radius. When omitted, the active tool compensation number (VTLCN) is set. PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Usually the Z-axis is positioned near the positive travel limit where the gauging cycle is finished. To hold the Z-axis after gauging, specify “1” for PCON. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry) Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction and the gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction.

5249-E P-446 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS)

• Cycle operation 1.

The laser shutter opens.

2.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

3.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

4.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

5.

The sensor advances.

6.

Position the Y-axis at the under-travel position (if PIN is designated, locate the Y-axis in a position shifted by the Y-axis component of PIN).

7.

The X-axis is positioned at the gauging start position.

8.

Position the Z-axis at the under-travel position (if PIN is designated, locate the Z-axis in a position shifted by the Z-axis component of PIN).

9.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

10. The Y-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position. 11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 12. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 13. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 14. The laser shutter closes. 15. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 16. The sensor retracts.* *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.13 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.15 and 16 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-447 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS) [Gauging the sphericity (OO129, OO119)] This cycle gauges the sphericity at the tip of ball end mill.

• Calling sequence CALL OO129 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PRET=*] (OO119) [PCON=*] [PRE=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] PH: Tool length offset, cutter radius compensation number Specify the tool management number where the tool length offset amount and the cutter radius compensation amount are stored for judgment of sphericity. When PH is omitted, the active tool number (VTLCN) is set. PLI: Tool length Specify the tool length. When omitted, the offset amount of the tool management number is set. PRI: Cutter radius Specify the cutter radius. When omitted, the compensation amount of the tool management number is set. PRA: The angle added for gauging sphericity The sensor gauges the sphericity from the length wise direction to the radial direction. Specify the incremental angle used for this gauging. The angle must be 5° or over and a divisor of 90°. Default is 15°. PRS: Spindle orientation position PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Usually the Z-axis is positioned near the positive travel limit where the gauging cycle is finished. To hold the Z-axis after gauging, specify “1” for PCON. PRE: Maximum allowable error When the error in the sphericity gauging exceeds this amount, an alarm occurs. When PRE is not specified, the cycle does not judge the errors. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction and the gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction.

5249-E P-448 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS)

• Cycle operation 1.

The laser shutter opens.

2.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

3.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

4.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

5.

The sensor advances.

6.

The Y-axis is positioned on the extension line from the sensor position in the tool lengthwise direction.

7.

The X-axis is positioned at the gauging start position.

8.

Gauging cycle starts.(Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The Y-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position.

10. The PRA angle is added and the sensor gauges sphericity in the slanting direction. 11. Operation sequences No.9 and 10 are repeated up to the gauging angle of 90°. 12. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.*. 13. The laser shutter closes. 14. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 15. The sensor retracts.* 16. The sphericity is judged, if the judgement command is specified. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.12 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.14 and 15 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-449 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS) [Tool breakage detection in the lengthwise direction (OO125, OO115)] This cycle detect the tool breakage in the lengthwise direction. When the breakage detection in the lengthwise direction, turnoff bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO125 [PLI=*][PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*] (OO115) [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*][PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length Specify the tool length (: the expected tool length). PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number PH: Tool length offset number Specify the tool length offset number of which data is compared with the gauging result. When omitted, the active tool number (VTLCN) is set. PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Usually the Z-axis is positioned near the positive travel limit where the gauging cycle is finished. To hold the Z-axis after gauging, specify “1” for PCON. PGO: Action to be taken on detection of tool breakage PGO= The tool is changed on detection of tool breakage. 1 PGO= The tool is changed on detection of tool breakage. The broken tool 2 moves to the tool change position before being changed. If PGO is omitted, the cycle ends with alarm occurrence. PLE1: Threshold value for judging tool breakage Specify the threshold value for judging tool breakage as a difference from the tool offset value. Default is 0.1 mm (0.004 in.). PLE2: Threshold value for judging tool wear Specify the threshold value for judging tool wear as a difference from the tool offset value. When the difference is less than PLE2, the NC judges that the tool is worn and up dates the tool length offset amount. If PLE2 is omitted, the NC does not make this judgment. PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry) Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction and the gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction.

5249-E P-450 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS)

• Cycle operation 1.

The laser shutter opens.

2.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

3.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

4.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

5.

The sensor advances.

6.

The Y-axis is positioned on the extension line from the sensor position in the tool lengthwise direction.

7.

The X-axis is positioned at the sensor position.

8.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

9.

The Y-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position.

10. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 11. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 12. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 13. The laser shutter closes. 14. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 15. The sensor retracts.* 16. The tool breakage or the tool wear are judged. 17. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.12 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.14 and 15 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-451 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS) [Tool breakage detection in the radial direction (OO126, OO116)] This cycle detects the tool breakage in the radial direction. For the breakage detection in the radial direction, turn off bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.

• Calling sequence CALL OO126 [PRI=*] [PLI=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] (OO116) PAT=* [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*] PLI: Tool length Specify the offset amount of the tool length. PRI: Cutter radius Specify the offset amount of the cutter radius (: the expected offset amount of the cutter radius). PRS: Spindle orientation position PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning] PIN: Z-axis infeed amount Set a distance by which the Z-axis further advances from the original advanced distance in the sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction. PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number PD: Cutter radius compensation number The cutter radius is compared with this value. When omitted, the data of the active tool number (VTLCN) is set. PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Usually the Z-axis is positioned near the positive travel limit where the gauging cycle is finished. To hold the Z-axis after gauging, specify “1” for PCON. PGO: Parameter for designating the action when tool breakage is detected PLE1: Threshold value for judging tool breakage PLE2: Threshold value for judging tool wear PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default) PSAM: The number of gauging times PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm) PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry) See the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction, the gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction, and the tool breakage detection cycle in the lengthwise direction.

5249-E P-452 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS)

• Cycle operation 1.

The laser shutter opens.

2.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

3.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

4.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

5.

The sensor advances.

6.

Position the Y-axis at the under-travel position (if PIN is designated, locate the Y-axis in a position shifted by the Y-axis component of PIN).

7.

The X-axis is positioned at the gauging start position.

8.

Position the Z-axis at the under-travel position (if PIN is designated, locate the Z-axis in a position shifted by the Z-axis component of PIN).

9.

Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)

10. The Y-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position. 11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected. 12. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified number of times. 13. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 14. The laser shutter closes. 15. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 16. The sensor retracts.* 17. The tool breakage or the tool wear are judged. 18. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.13 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.15 and 16 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-453 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS) [High-speed tool breakage detection (OO127, OO117)] This cycle measure the tool length to detect broken tool at high speed. The high-speed tool breakage detection is executed on the assumption that a broken tool does not interrupt the sensor beam as shown in the right figure. This cycle, however, may not be able to detects light tool breakage.

ME61012R0701300040002

• Calling sequence CALL OO127 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PH=*] [PRET=*] (OO117) [PCON=*] PLI: Tool length Specify the tool length offset amount. When omitted, the value specified with the offset number is set. PRI: Cutter radius Specify the cutter radius compensation amount. When omitted, the value specified with the offset number is set. PRS: Spindle orientation position PIN: Z-axis infeed amount The sensor starts gauging by shifting from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with PIN. (Default: 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)) PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.)) POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 10 mm (0.39 in.)) PAT: Attachment offset number PH: Tool offset number Specify the tool off set number. When omitted, the active tool number (VTLCN) is set. PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter* PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter* Usually the Z-axis is positioned near the positive travel limit where the gauging cycle is finished. To hold the Z-axis after gauging, specify “1” for PCON. Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction and the gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction.

5249-E P-454 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS)

• Cycle operation 1.

The laser shutter opens.

2.

The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.

3.

The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Y-axis before gauging.

4.

Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.

5.

The sensor advances.

6.

Position the Y-axis at the under-travel position (if PIN is designated, locate the Y-axis in a position shifted by the Y-axis component of PIN).

7.

The X-axis is positioned at the gauging start position.

8.

Position the Z-axis at the under-travel position (if PIN is designated, locate the Z-axis in a position shifted by the Z-axis component of PIN).

9.

The Y-axis and the Z-axis skip to the target position (sensor position + over travel position).

10. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.* 11. The laser shutter closes. 12. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.* 13. The sensor retracts.* 14. The tool breakage is judged. 15. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting. *

Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.10 is omitted when PCON is specified. Sensor retraction by the sequence No.12 and 13 is omitted when PRET is specified.

5249-E P-455 SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT (103 VERSIONS)

5. 2583

List of Alarms Alarm B UNTENDED: Large error in measurement of sphericity Large errors were detected in measurement of sphericity. [Probable Faulty Locations] In the sensor zero setting cycle, the sensor zero position in the horizontal direction did not match the tool center. Or, the measuring tool was defective. [Measures to Take] Use a proper tool, such as a spare tool.

2305

Alarm B UNTENDED: Measurement impossible Measurement became impossible during auto gauging cycle. For this gauging system, the following codes are added to this alarm: 6A

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the first approach.

6B

Contact could not be confirmed in the first approach.

6C

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the second approach.

6D

Contact could not be confirmed in the second approach.

6E

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the third approach.

6F

Contact could not be confirmed in the third approach.

70

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the fourth approach.

71

Contact could not be confirmed in the fourth approach.

72

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in retraction of the skipping cycle.

73

Contact could not be confirmed in the first approach of the skipping cycle.

74

Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in retraction of the skipping cycle.

75

Contact could not be confirmed in the second approach of the skipping cycle.

7B

The first sensor could not be confirmed in the high-speed tool breakage detection cycle.

7C

The sensor could not be confirmed after skipping in the high-speed tool breakage detection cycle.

95

In the plural measurement operations, the difference between the minimum and maximum measured values exceeded the tolerance.

96

The attachment type does not match the gauging program number. 30° angular AT OO125, OO126, OO127, and OO129 are usable. 45° angular AT OO115, OO116, OO117, and OO119 are usable. Vertical/Horizontal spindles In execution of OO95, OO96, OO97, or OO99, no attachment is mounted, or the attachment is not extension one, 90° angular one, or B-/C-axis one.

97

The attachment is not indexed to an angle where measurement is possible. 30° angular AT not indexed to C270° 45° angular AT not indexed to C270° Vertical/Horizontal spindles 90° angular AT not indexed to C270° B-/C-axis AT indexed to B90° but not indexed to C270°

99

The vertical/horizontal spindle tool command (bit 6 of VFST) is wrong. “1” (horizontal spindle) is set at bit 6 of VFST when no attachment was mounted or an extension AT was mounted for vertical/horizontal spindle measurement. Or, “0” (horizontal spindle) is set at bit 6 of VFST when 90° angular AT or B-/C-axis AT is mounted.

LIST OF PUBLICATIONS

Publication No.

Date

Edition

5249-E

June 2005

1st

5249-E-R1

December 2006

2nd

5249-E-R2

August 2007

3rd

5249-E-R3

February 2008

4th

5249-E-R4

August 2008

5th

5249-E-R5

October 2010

6th

5249-E-R6

April 2011

7th

This manual may be at variance with the actual product due to specification or design changes. Please also note that specifications are subject to change without notice. If you require clarification or further explanation of any point in this manual, please contact your OKUMA representative.